Technical Service Manual

Technical Service Manual
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DrägerService
®
Technical
Service
Manual
Part Number: 4111556-001
Rev: AB
Date: 20 May 2002
© 2002 Draeger Medical, Inc.
Narkomed 4
Anesthesia System
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DrägerService
®
Narkomed 4 Service Manual Table of Contents
Summary of What's New in Rev. AB
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
SECTION 1:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2:
Diagnostics .
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
........................................
Main Service Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PMS Criteria Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O.R. DATA MANAGER Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . .
O.R. DATA MANAGER Software Version Window
O.R. DATA MANAGER Printer Configuration . . .
SECTION 3:
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
Power Supply and Voltage Distribution
3.2
Processor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3
Troubleshooting Guide Flow Charts . . .
3.4
O.R. DATA MANAGER Troubleshooting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-1
2-2
2-4
2-9
2-10
2-17
2-20
2-21
2-22
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-1
3-6
3-6
3-27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-2
4-5
4-8
4-11
4-15
4-19
4-22
4-25
4-28
4-30
4-34
4-37
4-40
4-43
4-45
4-48
4-51
4-54
4-56
SECTION 4:
Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1
Cylinder Yoke Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2
Cylinder Pressure Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3
Cylinder Cutoff Valves (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4
Cylinder and Pipeline Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5
Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6
Flow Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7
Oxygen Supply Failure Protection Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch (earlier machines) . . .
4.9
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Whistle (Canada) . . . . . . . . .
4.10
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11
Oxygen Ratio Controller (later machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12
Vaporizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13
O2 Flush Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14
AV-E Ventilator Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15
AV-E Ventilator Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16
AV-2 and AV2+ Ventilator Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17
Convenience Outlet AC Power Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18
AV-E Inspiratory Flow Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.19
Ventilator Bellows Valve & Guide Assembly (AV-E Ventilator)
4.20
Ventilator Bellows Valve & Guide Assembly
with Pressure Limit Control (AV-2 Ventilator) . . . . . .
Rev. W
i
. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS (continued)
NM4
DESCRIPTION
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
4.28
4.29
4.30
4.31
4.32
4.33
4.34
4.35
4.36
4.37
4.38
4.39
4.40
4.41
4.42
4.43
4.44
4.45
4.46
4.47
4.48
PAGE
Alarm Channel (without oxygen supply pressure alarm switch)
Alarm Channel and Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch . . .
Caster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Interface Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backplane Circuit Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multispec Analyzer Assembly (Model 4600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multispec Analyzer Assembly (Model 4610) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Bezel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Display Assembly (without Datagrip) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Display Assembly (with Datagrip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datagrip Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIBP Pump and Sensor Circuit Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Oximeter (SpO2) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VPO Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPIROMED Respiratory Volume Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Sphygmomanometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boom Arm Assembly (earlier machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Arm Assembly (later machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Strip Chart Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O.R. DATA MANAGER CPU Assembly (earlier machines) . . . .
O.R. DATA MANAGER Sub-Assembly (later machines) . . . . . .
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Oxygen Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PEEP Valve Magnet Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SECTION 5:
Adjustment and Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment (except CO2) . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1A CO2 Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment (earlier machines)
5.3
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment
(later machines with switch on alarm channel) . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller (ORMC) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5
Oxygen Ratio Controller (ORC) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5A Low Flow Oxygen Ratio Controller (ORC) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6
Boom Arm Tension Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7
Display Arm Tension Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8
Oxygen Sensor Zero Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9
Breathing Pressure Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10 Respiratory Flow Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 SpO2 Monitor Calibration Check - Nellcor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11A SpO2 Monitor Calibration Check - Novametrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12 NIBP Inflation Pressure Calibration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-65
4-68
4-72
4-74
4-76
4-78
4-80
4-82
4-85
4-94
4-103
4-106
4-108
4-110
4-113
4-117
4-119
4-122
4-124
4-125
4-127
4-130
4-133
4-135
4-138
4-141
4-143
4-145
. . 5-1
. . 5-2
. . 5-4
. 5-5
. . 5-8
. 5-11
. 5-15
5-17A
. 5-18
. 5-20
. 5-22
. 5-24
. 5-26
. 5-28
5-29A
. 5-30
Rev. Z
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
CONTENTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
5.13
5.14
5.15
PAGE
Multispec Span and Line Block Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Vaporizer Interlock Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Vaporizer Select Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
SECTION 6:
PMS Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
Safety Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
Battery Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3
Manual Sphygmomanometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4
Vapor Exclusion System and Agent Indicator Lamp Test
6.5
High Pressure Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6
Oxygen Supply Failure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7
Flowmeter Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8
NAD O2 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9
Oxygen Concentration Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 Freshgas Leak test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12 Absorber System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.13 Ventilator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.14 Bellows Drive Gas Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.15 "F" Bellows Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.16 Pressure Limit Control Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17 Ventilator Relief Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.18 SPIROMED or Ultrasonic Flow Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . .
6.19 Alarm Circuit Delay Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20 Apnea Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.21 High Pressure Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.22 Sub-Atmospheric Pressure Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.23 Continuing Pressure Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.24 Oxygen Ratio Monitor Control (ORMC) Test . . . . . . . . . .
6.24A Oxygen Ratio Control (ORC) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25 SpO2/Pulse - Nellcor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.25A SpO2 Monitor Calibration Check - Novametrix . . . . . . . .
6.26 NIBP Alarm and Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.27 Agent Analyzer Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.28 Open Reservoir Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.28A Scavenger Interface, A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.28B Scavenger Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.29 Service Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.30 Oxygen Flush and 100% O2 Final Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.31 Final Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SECTION 7:
Software Update Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
Software Transfer to PC via Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
Installing NM4 Software from a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
Installing NM4 Software from the ORDM . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
Installing NM4 Software from a PC using the SST . . . . .
7.5
Installing NM4 Software from the ORDM using the SST
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Rev. K
iii
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-8
6-10
6-12
6-14
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-24
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-28
6-30
6-30
6-31
6-31
6-31
6-31
6-33
6-34
6-34A
. 6-35
. 6-37
. 6-41
. 6-43
. 6-44
. 6-47
. 6-48
. 6-49
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-6
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTENTS (continued)
NM4
SECTION 8:
Spare and Replacement Parts
ASSEMBLY/PART
PAGE
Monitor Chassis and related assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2, 8-3
Front Bezel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4, 8-5
Serial Interface Assembly, Pulse Oximeter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6, 8-7
Multispec Analyzer Assembly, Model 4600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9
Multispec Analyzer Assembly, Model 4610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11
AV-E Ventilator Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13
AV-2 Ventilator Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14, 8-15
AV-E Ventilator Bellows, Valve Case Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16, 8-17
AV-2 Ventilator Bellows, Valve Case Assembly and Pressure Limit Control . . . 8-18, 8-19
Boom Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20, 8-21
Remote Display, Datagrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22, 8-23
Display Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24, 8-25
Pipeline Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26, 8-27
Failsafe Assemblies, Minimum O2 Flow Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28, 8-29
Exclusion System, 3-vapor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29A, 8-29B
Vapor Select Switches, Vapor Ind. Circuit Board, Gas Selector Switch Assembly 8-30, 8-31
ORMC (Earlier Config.) O2 Alarm Switch, Alarm Channel, Alarm Whistle . . . . 8-32, 8-33
ORC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34, 8-35
Alarm Channel Assembly with O2 Alarm Switch (Later Configurations) . . . . . . 8-36, 8-37
Flowmeter Shields, Knobs, Labels, Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 8-39
Flow Tubes, Flow Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40, 8-41
Cylinder Pressure Regulators, O2 Flush Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42, 8-43
Fresh Gas Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43A, 8-43B
Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44, 8-45
Canada Fresh Gas Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45A, 8-45B
Cylinder Yokes and Related Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46, 8-47
VPO, AC Power, Batteries, Power Supply, Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48, 8-49
O.R. Data Manager, 386 and earlier, Incl. Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50, 8-51
Absorber Assembly, Breathing Pressure Hoses, Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52, 8-53
Ultrasonic Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53A, 8-53B
Ultrasonic Flow Sensor Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53C, 8-53D
Man/Auto Selector Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54, 8-55
Man/Auto Selector Valve (Later Design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56, 8-57
Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58, 8-59
Open Reservoir Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60, 8-61
Open Reservoir Scavenger, old style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62, 8-63
A/C Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64, 8-65
Suction Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66, 8-67
iv
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NARKOMED 4 ANESTHESIA SYSTEM
MAIN DISPLAY
PATIENT
INTERFACE
PANEL
MAIN KEY PANEL
CONTROL
KEY PANEL
DISPOSABLE
WATER TRAP
STRIP CHART
PRINTER
O.R.DATA
MANAGER
REMOTE
DISPLAY
DATAGRIP
MANUAL
SPHYGMOMANOMETER
BREATHING SYSTEM
SENSOR INTERFACE PANEL
(VPO ASSEMBLY)
SV45024
1-0
Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
INTRODUCTION
1.0 Recommendations
Because of the sophisticated nature of Draeger Medical, Inc. anesthesia equipment and its critical
importance in the operating room setting, it is highly recommended that only appropriately
trained and experienced professionals be permitted to service and maintain this equipment.
Please contact DrägerService® at (800) 543-5047 for service of this equipment.
Draeger Medical, Inc. also recommends that its anesthesia equipment be serviced at three-month
intervals. Periodic Manufacturer’s Service Agreements are available for equipment manufactured
by Draeger Medical, Inc. For further information concerning these agreements, please contact us
at (800) 543-5047.
Draeger Medical, Inc. products/material in need of factory repair shall be sent to:
DrägerService
3124 Commerce Drive
Telford, PA 18969
(Include RMA Number)
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The manual is divided into several sections. The DIAGNOSTICS section describes self-test and
service diagnostics for checking the system functions. An understanding of the on-board service
capabilities is necessary before any attempt is made to troubleshoot the unit. The
TROUBLESHOOTING section lists error codes and provides troubleshooting guides to assist the
TSR in locating the source of a problem. The REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES section contains
instructions for removal and replacement of the assemblies that are considered field-replaceable.
The ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES section contains the field procedures
needed to restore original system specifications. The Periodic Manufacturer’s Service (PMS)
PROCEDURE section outlines the steps required to verify the electrical, mechanical and
pneumatic safety of the unit and also identifies components requiring periodic replacement.
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES
Troubleshooting the Narkomed 4 should always begin by communicating with those who observed
or experienced a problem with the unit. This may eliminate unnecessary troubleshooting steps.
Once a general problem is identified, refer to the troubleshooting flow charts in Section 3 to
determine the proper corrective action to be taken.
After a component has been replaced, verify that the unit is operating properly by running the
appropriate diagnostic procedure. The PMS PROCEDURE in Section 6 must also be performed
after any component has been replaced.
The general arrangement of the Narkomed 4 Anesthesia System is shown on the opposite page.
WARNINGS are used in this manual before procedures which if not performed correctly could
result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS are used in this manual to alert service personnel to the possibility of damage to the
equipment if a procedure is not performed correctly.
Rev. K
1-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
NM4
Copyright
Copyright © 1999 by Draeger Medical, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication
may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, or stored in a retrieval system in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the
written permission of Draeger Medical, Inc.
Trademark Notices
CliniDAS, Datagrip, NAD Information Systems, NAD Logo, Narkomed, O.R. Data Manager,
O.R. Link, ORM, PC Prep/View, Quality Service For Life, Vigilance Audit, Vitalert, Vitalink
and Narkomed GS are registered trademarks of Draeger Medical, Inc. All other products or
name brands are trademarks of their respective owners.
Disclaimer
The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change
without notice. Draeger Medical, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this manual.
1-2
Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS
2.0 DIAGNOSTICS
The NARKOMED 4 contains a diagnostic system that monitors certain system functions and
records their operational status. A series of tests is performed when the system is powered
up and the results are displayed on the diagnostics screen shown in Figure 2-1. Further
diagnostic functions are available through a series of service screens that can be called up
by a Technical Service Representative at the display panel. The following paragraphs provide
a description of each of the service screens that can be accessed through touch keys on the
display panel. If no display is present upon system power-up, refer to Section 3 of this
manual for troubleshooting assistance.
A PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE DUE message will appear on the screen if the current
date exceeds the Periodic Manufacturer’s Service due date stored in the machine.
DIAGNOSTICS
VIDEO TEST
FIRMWARE TEST
MEMORY TEST BANK1
MEMORY TEST BANK2
TIMER/INTERRUPT TEST
ANALOG TEST
AUDIO TEST -PRIMARY
-BACKUP
-SpO2
SERIAL I/O TEST
CLOCK TEST
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY TEST
ALTERNATE PROCESSOR TEST
NARKOMED 4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
(C) COPYRIGHT 1988-1995, NAD INC.
VERSION: 1.30
97 CF
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
MONITOR
FUNCTIONAL
Figure 2-1: POWER-UP DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN
Rev. C
POWER SUPPLY STATUS:
FULLY FUNCTIONAL
2-1
CHECKOUT
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.1
NM4
Main Service Screen
2.1.1
View Mode
To access the Main Service Screen, press and hold the Selection DIAL, and
simultaneously press the MONITOR and SYSTEM CONFIG keys. The View
mode service screen shown in Figure 2-2 will appear, displaying the machine
serial number, last service date and machine hours accumulated. Version
numbers for each software set in the machine are also displayed.
If the MONITORS service screens are accessed in the View mode, current
values will be displayed but the operator will not be able to perform
calibrations. A VIEW entry will not be logged into the Service Log.
MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER
LAST SERVICE DATE
HOURS RUNNING SINCE LAST SERVICE
TOTAL HOURS RUNNING
:
:
:
:
00124001
03-14-96
97
5610
SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION
TOUCH PANEL SOFTWARE VERSION
DATAGRIP SOFTWARE VERSION
MULTISPEC SOFTWARE VERSION
VPO SOFTWARE VERSION
POWER SUPPLY SOFTWARE VERSION
PURITAN BENNETT SW VERSION
CRITICAR 1100 SW VERSION
CRITICAR POET IQ SW VERSION
TRAM NET SW VERSION
SPACELAB LOGGER SW VERSION
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1.40
1.02
1.01
1.04
1.72
1.01
1.00
1.01
1.00
1.01
1.00
MAIN
SERVICE
LOG
0016FF00
00171900
00173D00
00175E00
00178600
PMS
CRITERIA
MONITORS
SERVICE CODE
VIEW
PERIPHERALS
Figure 2-2: VIEW MODE SERVICE SCREEN
2-2
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.1.2
Service Mode
Touch the Service Code box on the screen, then scroll through the following list
of service codes with the Selection DIAL:
PMS: When performing scheduled Periodic Manufacturer’s Service.
INST: For initial installation of the NM4. This selection will establish
the start date for the warranty period.
SRVC: For unscheduled service visits requiring component
replacements or calibrations.
Press the Selection DIAL to enter the service event into the Service Log.
The Technical Service Representative ID boxes will appear on the screen as
shown in Figure 2-3. Touch the first box, scroll to the desired alpha-numeric
with the Selection DIAL, and press the dial to enter the first character of the
ID. Enter the remaining three characters in the same manner.After the ID has
been entered, the RESET key will be displayed.
NOTE: Following any service procedures, return to this screen and touch the
RESET key to enter the current date as the last service date, and to reset the
Hours Running Since Last Service to zero. Touching the RESET key also
places an entry into the service log.
MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER
LAST SERVICE DATE
HOURS RUNNING SINCE LAST SERVICE
TOTAL HOURS RUNNING
:
:
:
:
00124001
03-14-96
97
5610
SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION
TOUCH PANEL SOFTWARE VERSION
DATAGRIP SOFTWARE VERSION
MULTISPEC SOFTWARE VERSION
VPO SOFTWARE VERSION
POWER SUPPLY SOFTWARE VERSION
PURITAN BENNETT SW VERSION
CRITICAR 1100 SW VERSION
CRITICAR POET IQ SW VERSION
TRAM NET SW VERSION
SPACELAB LOGGER SW VERSION
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1.40
1.02
1.01
1.04
1.72
1.01
1.00
1.01
1.00
1.01
1.00
MAIN
RESET
SERVICE
LOG
0016FF00
00171900
00173D00
00175E00
00178600
PMS
CRITERIA
TECHNICAL SERVICE
REPRESENTATIVE I.D.
SERVICE CODE
0
0
0
SRVC
Figure 2-3: SERVICE MODE SERVICE SCREEN
Rev. H
2-3
0
MONITORS
PERIPHERALS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.2
NM4
Service Log Screen
Touch the SERVICE LOG key to display a list of stored events. Figure 2-4
shows a typical service log screen. The codes displayed are classified as Normal
Events, Failed Events, Error Events, Service Events, and Calibration Events.
These are listed in Tables 2-1 thru 2-6.
Up to 1000 events may be logged. Touching the PREV PAGE key will move the
display backward in time; touching the NEXT PAGE key will move the display
forward in time.
SERVICE LOG
DATE
07-14-91
07-14-91
07-14-91
TIME
18:10
18:13
18:19
MAIN
PARAMETER
0000FB64
JOHN
JOHN
CODE
0000
C009
C008
DESCRIPTION
SERVICE
LOG
POWER ON
RESP FLOW ZERO
RESP FLOW SPAN
PMS
CRITERIA
MONITORS
PREV
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
PRINT
SERVICE LOG
PERIPHERALS
Figure 2-4: SERVICE LOG SCREEN
2-4
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
Table 2-1: NM4 SERVICE LOG NORMAL EVENT CODES
Code
0000
Description
Power on
Table 2-2: NM4 SERVICE LOG FAILED EVENT CODES
Code
Description
F011
QPDM Address Register Error
F012
QPDM Data Register Error
F013
QPDM Vblank Int Timeout Err
F014
QPDM VRAM Memory Error
F021
PROM CRC Test Error
F031
SRAM Memory Test Error
F051
MFP Bus Error
F052
MFP TimerA Error
F053
MFP TimerB Error
F054
MFP TimerC Error
F055
MFP TimerD Error
F056
System Clock Error
F057
FIFO Empty Interrupt Error
F058
ADC Interrupt Error
F059
CNTOVF Interrupt Error
F061
ADC Interrupt Error
F062
12V to -12V Out of Tol Error
F063
5V to GND Out of Tol Error
F071
Pri Spkr Static Test Error
F072
Pri Spkr Dynamic Test Error
F073
Pri Spkr FIFO Test Error
F074
Pri Spkr No Vol Test Error
Rev. L
Recommended Action
Replace Processor
2-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
NM4
Table 2-2 (continued): NM4 SERVICE LOG FAILED EVENT CODES
Code
Description
F081
Backup Spkr Dynamic Test Err
F082
Backup Spkr No Vol Test Err
F091
SAO2 Spkr Static Test Error
F092
SAO2 Spkr Dynamic Test Error
F093
SAO2 Spkr No Vol Test Error
F111
Real Time Clock Test Error
F121
Bad File Warning
F122
Bad Files Error
F123
Event Memory Error
F130
Alt Processor Fail
F200
UART1 Internal Init Fail
F201
UART1 Register Readback Fail
F202
UART1 Transmit Interrupt Fail
F203
UART1 Receive Interrupt Fail
F204
UART1 Receive Err Int Fail
F205
UART1 Baud Rate Test 1 Fail
F206
UART1 Baud Rate Test 2 Fail
F207
UART1 Baud Rate Test 3 Fail
F210
UART1 Channel 0 Fail
F211
UART1 Channel 1 Fail
F212
UART1 Channel 2 Fail
F213
UART1 Channel 3 Fail
Recommended Action
Replace Processor
2-6
Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
Table 2-2 (continued): NM4 SERVICE LOG FAILED EVENT CODES
Code
Description
F214
UART1 Channel 4 Fail
F215
UART1 Channel 5 Fail
F216
UART1 Channel 6 Fail
F217
UART1 Channel 7 Fail
F300
UART2 Internal Init Fail
F301
UART2 Register Readbk Fail
F302
UART2 Transmit Interrupt Fail
F303
UART2 Receive Interrupt Fail
F304
UART2 Receive Err Int Fail
F305
UART2 Baud Rate Test 1 Fail
F306
UART2 Baud Rate Test 2 Fail
F307
UART2 Baud Rate Test 3 Fail
F310
UART2 Channel 0 Fail
F311
UART2 Channel 1 Fail
F312
UART2 Channel 2 Fail
F313
UART2 Channel 3 Fail
F314
UART2 Channel 4 Fail
F315
UART2 Channel 5 Fail
F316
UART2 Channel 6 Fail
F317
UART2 Channel 7 Fail
Rev. L
Recommended Action
Replace Processor
2-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
NM4
Table 2-3: NM4 SERVICE LOG ERROR EVENTS
Touch Panel Events
Code
T001
Description
Recommended Action
Bad Device Recalibration
Clear obstructions. If recurring,
replace touch panel
Head Assembly Events
Code
Description
Recommended Action
H001
Head Temperature Error
Call Tech. Service
A001
Pattern Adjusted
None
Power Supply Events
Code
Description
Recommended Action
P001
AC Fail
Restore AC power
P002
AC Good
None
P003
Battery Low
Recharge battery. If persistent,
replace battery
P004
Battery Good
None
P005
Brick Bad
Replace Pwr Supply PCB
MSPEC Events
Code
Description
M001
Channel Err Active CPU
M002
Channel Err Inactive CPU
M003
Command Retry
M004
Comm Error
M005
System Fault Max
M006
Versiion ID Retry
M007
Span Fail
M008
Solenoid Stuck
M009
Zero Timeout
M010
Zero Fail Max
Recommended Action
Replace MSPEC
2-8
Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
Table 2-3 (continued): NM4 SERVICE LOG ERROR EVENTS
MSPEC Events (continued)
Code
Description
Recommended Action
M011
RX Buffer Overflow
Replace MSPEC
M012
No Continuous Data
Replace MSPEC
M013
Line Block Diff
Clear Blockage
M014
Line Block Less Than Min
Clear Blockage
M016
Multispec Shutdown
Replace MSPEC
M101
CD Chan Err
M102
Chan Err O2 Info P1
M103
Chan Err O2 Info P2
Call Tech. Service
Datagrip Events
DG00
Datagrip Internal Error
DG01
Datagrip Internal Error
DG02
Datagrip Internal Error
Replace Datagrip
Table 2-3 (continued): NM4 SERVICE LOG ERROR EVENTS
NIBP Events
Code
Description
Recommended Action
N001
NIBP Mon Error
Replace NIBP
N002
NIBP Com Error
Replace NIBP
N003
NIBP Bad Data
Call Tech. Service
N004
Infl Pres Not GT 30
Check for Leaks
N005
Error Rcvd from NIBP
Replace NIBP
N006
NIBP Mode Conflict
Replace NIBP
2-8A
Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
NM4
Table 2-4: NM4 SERVICE LOG SERVICE EVENT CODES
Code
Description
S001
INST
S002
PMS
S003
SRVC
S004
Secondary Serv Screen Entry
S005
Reset Service Date
S006
Service Log Clear
Table 2-5: NM4 SERVICE LOG CALIBRATION EVENT CODES
Code
Description
Code
Description
C001
O2 Store Zero A
C009
Respiratory Flow Store Span
C002
O2 Store Zero B
C010
Respiratory Flow Store Zero
C003
Line Block Store Reference
C011
Pressure Store Span
C004
Gas Analyzer - Start
C012
Pressure Store Zero
C005
Gas Analyzer - Continue
C013
NIBP Infl Check
C006
NIBP Inflate
C014
NIBP Defl Ck
C007
NIBP Stop
C015
NIBP Leak Ck
C008
NIBP Take Reading
Rev. L
2-8B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
Table 2-6: NM4 O.R. DATA MANAGER EVENT CODES
Code
Description
V001
VTLK Com Error
V002
VTLK Com Lost
V003
VTLK Com Regained
V010
ORDM Startup Failure
V011
ORDM Inact Startup Failure
Recommended Action
Replace ORDM if recurring
None
Replace ORDM
Table 2-7: NM4 TEMPLATE EVENT CODES
Code
Description
TEM0
Template Defaults Loaded
TEM1
Recreating Tmplt Database
TEM2
Templates Reinitalized
TEM3
Templates Reinitalized
TEM4
Factory Defaults Installed
Recommended Action
None
2-8C
Rev. L
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
NM4
Touch the PRINT LOG key to obtain a Service Log Printout from the internal
printer. Figure 2-5 shows the format of the printed service log.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
************************
SERVICE LOG PRINTOUT
-----------------------MMDDYYHHMM PARAM
CODE
0714911819 JOHN
/
C0
/0
/8
/714911813 JOHN
0
C0
/0
/9
/714911810
0
/ 0
/0
/0
/0
/FB64 /
00
/0
/0
/
************************
Figure 2-5: SERVICE LOG PRINTOUT
Rev. L
2-8D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.3
PMS Criteria Screen
Touch the PMS CRITERIA key to bring up the screen shown in Figure 2-6.
Touch the Month window, scroll to the next PMS due month with the Selection
DIAL, and press the dial to enter the month in which the PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE DUE message will appear on the power-up screen.
MAIN
SELECT CRITERIA FOR "PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE" MESSAGE
SERVICE
LOG
MONTH :
DEC
1991
PMS
CRITERIA
MONITORS
PERIPHERALS
Figure 2-6: PMS CRITERIA SCREEN
2-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.4
NM4
Monitors
Touch the MONITORS key to bring up a second column of touch keys. These
keys select the calibration screens for the system sensors.
2.4.1
Oxygen Monitor Screen
The Oxygen Monitor Screen displays current oxygen cell readings and
provides a calibration procedure for the oxygen sensor circuitry. A touch
key allows entry of a new zero value. See Figure 2-7.
CURRENT CELL A: 110
CURRENT CELL B: 108
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE FUEL CELL FROM SENSOR HOUSING.
- LET CURRENT CELL VALUES STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE ZERO" KEY TO ENTER
CURRENT VALUES AS CALIBRATED VALUES.
- DISCONNECT O2 SENSOR HOUSING CABLE
BEFORE RE-INSTALLING FUEL CELL.
- RE-INSTALL FUEL CELL.
- RE-CONNECT CABLE
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
STORED CELL A ZERO: 3
STORED CELL B ZERO: 6
STORE
ZERO
Figure 2-7: OXYGEN MONITOR SCREEN
2-10
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.4.2
Breathing Pressure Monitor Screen
The Breathing Pressure Monitor Screen displays current airway
pressure and provides a calibration procedure for the pressure sensing
circuitry. Touch keys allow entry of new zero and span settings. See
Figure 2-8.
CURRENT PRESSURE VALUE : 205
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE PRESSURE SAMPLE LINE FROM
ABSORBER; EXPOSE TO AIR.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE ZERO" KEY TO ENTER THE
CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION ZERO.
STORE
SPAN
STORE
ZERO
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 2-8: BREATHING PRESSURE MONITOR SCREEN
2-11
MAIN
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE PRESSURE SAMPLE LINE FROM
ABSORBER.
- APPLY 50 CM H2O CONSTANT PRESSURE AT
SAMPLE LINE, VERIFIED BY A KNOWN,
CALIBRATED METER.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE SPAN" KEY TO ENTER THE
CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION SPAN.
STORED ZERO: 244
STORED SPAN: 540
OXYGEN
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.4.3
NM4
Respiratory Flow Monitor Screen
The Respiratory Flow Monitor Screen displays the current flow reading
and also shows a calibration procedure for the flow sensing circuitry.
Touch keys are provided for entry of new zero and span settings. See
Figure 2-9.
CURRENT FLOW VALUE : 76
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE SPIROMED SENSOR FROM ABSORBER.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE ZERO" KEY TO ENTER THE
CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION ZERO.
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE SPIROMED SENSOR FROM ABSORBER.
- ATTACH A GAS SUPPLY AT INPUT OF SENSOR,
AND A CALIBRATED FLOWMETER AT OUTPUT.
- PROVIDE A STEADY 10 L/MIN FLOW THROUGH
SPIROMED SENSOR.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE SPAN" KEY TO ENTER THE
CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION SPAN.
STORED ZERO: 78
STORED SPAN: 161
STORE
SPAN
STORE
ZERO
Figure 2-9: RESPIRATORY FLOW MONITOR SCREEN
2-12
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.4.4
SpO2 Monitor Screen
The SpO2 Screen displays current values for SpO2, Pulse, SpO2 Pleth
and SpO2 Bargraph. See Figure 2-10.
SpO2 VALUE :
98
PULSE VALUE :
75
PLETH VALUE :
125
BARGRAPH VALUE : 12
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
Figure 2-10: SpO2 MONITOR SCREEN
2-13
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.4.5
NM4
NIBP Monitor Screen
The NIBP Monitor Screen displays Real Time, Systolic, Diastolic and
Mean blood pressure and Pulse.
The TAKE READING touch key will initiate a single NIBP
measurement cycle.
A procedure for checking NIBP cuff inflation pressure against an
external gauge is also displayed, with touch keys to perform the test.
See Figure 2-11.
Refer to Section 6 of this manual for inflation, deflation, and leak
testing procedures.
REAL TIME PRESSURE : 0
SYSTOLIC
:
130
DIASTOLIC :
78
MEAN
:
98
PULSE
:
75
NIBP
NIBP
-
TAKE
READING
PRESSURE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION:
PLACE A "T" IN LINE WITH THE BP CUFF.
ATTACH A PRESSURE GAUGE AT "T".
TOUCH THE "INFLATE" KEY.
NIBP MODULE WILL INFLATE CUFF TO
180 MM Hg.
VERIFY WITH PRESSURE GAUGE.
TOUCH THE "STOP" KEY TO END THE TEST.
INFLATION, DEFLATION, AND LEAK CHECKS:
REFER TO SERVICE MANUAL FOR PROCEDURES.
INFLATION
CHECK
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
DEFLATION
CHECK
LEAKAGE
CHECK
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
STOP
INFLATE
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 2-11: NIBP MONITOR SCREEN
2-14
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.4.6
Gas Analyzer Screen
Current values of CO2, N2O and anesthetic agent are displayed on the
Gas Analyzer Screen along with a span calibration procedure. See
Figure 2-12. (The scrubber bottle replacement instruction is not
displayed on machines having a Model 4610 gas analyzer.)
The MODE window on the gas analyzer screen displays the following
messages:
INHIBIT during warm-up
READY after 30 minute warm-up
The STATUS window on the gas analyzer screen displays the following
messages:
IDLE before starting calibration
ZERO IN PROGRESS during calibration
ZERO COMPLETE during calibration
SPAN IN PROGRESS during calibration
PASSED or FAILED after calibration
The complete calibration procedure is outlined in Section 5.
CURRENT CO2
CURRENT N2O
CURRENT AGENT
: *INV*
: 10
: *INV*
MODE:
STATUS:
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- WAIT FOR MODE = "READY".
- PERFORM GAS ANALYZER ACCURACY TEST.
- IF TEST FAILS, PERFORM SPAN CAL:
- WITH PATIENT CIRCUIT ENABLED:
- TOUCH "START" KEY,
- WAIT FOR STATUS = "ZERO COMPLETE"
- ATTACH SAMPLE LINE TO CALIBRATION BOTTLE.
- TURN FLOW ON BOTTLE TO 250 ML/MIN
- LET THE CURRENT CELL VALUES STABILIZE
- REMOVE THE SAMPLE LINE FROM THE BOTTLE
- TOUCH "CONTINUE" KEY.
- WAIT FOR STATUS = "PASSED" OR "FAILED"
- REPLACE SCRUBBER BOTTLE ANNUALLY.
CONTINUE
START
Figure 2-12: GAS ANALYZER SCREEN
Rev. C
2-15
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.4.7
NM4
Line Block Screen
The current sample pressure is displayed on the Line Block screen
along with a calibration procedure and a touch key to enter a setpoint
value. See Figure 2-13. The stored reference value is displayed at the
lower left corner of the screen.
CURRENT SAMPLE PRESSURE:
200
LINE BLOCK CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- WITH PATIENT CIRCUIT ENABLED:
- ENSURE THAT SAMPLE LINE IS
CONNECTED AND UNOCCLUDED.
- PLACE A FLOWMETER AT THE SAMPLE
EXHAUST.
- ATTACH FLOW RESTRICTOR, FIX 0336, TO
PATIENT SAMPLE LINE.
- WAIT FOR VALID CURRENT SAMPLE PRESSURE.
- ADJUST RESTRICTION IN ORDER TO
OBTAIN A FLOW OF 100 ML/MIN.
- TOUCH "STORE REFERENCE" KEY.
- FULLY OCCLUDE SAMPLE LINE AND OBSERVE
THAT LINE BLOCK ALARM BECOMES
ACTIVE AFTER AT LEAST 15 SECONDS.
- REMOVE FLOW RESTRICTOR FROM SAMPLE LINE.
STORED REFERENCE :
200
STORE
REFERENCE
Figure 2-13: LINE BLOCK CALIBRATION SCREEN
2-16
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
2.5
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
Peripherals
Touching the PERIPHERALS key brings up a second column of touch keys
that are used to select additional service screen functions. When
PERIPHERALS is selected, the Relays Status And Control Screen will appear
as shown in Figure 2-14.
2.5.1
Relays Status And Control Screen
Printer Relay:
When the ORDM key is selected, the external printer port is
connected to the O.R. DATA MANAGER. See Paragraph 2.8
Remote Panel Relay:
When the ORDM key is selected, the Remote Display will show
the O.R. DATA MANAGER functions. See Paragraph 2.6. When
the NM4 key is selected, the Remote Display shows the NM4
data and alarms.
RELAYS STATUS AND CONTROL SCREEN
MAIN
SERVICE
LOG
PRINTER RELAY:
ORDM
NM4
REMOTE PANEL RELAY:
ORDM
NM4
RELAYS
PMS
CRITERIA
DUMP
MONITORS
PERIPHERALS
Figure 2-14: RELAYS STATUS AND CONTROL SCREEN
Rev. A
2-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.5.2
NM4
Service Dump Screen
The DUMP key will bring up the Service Dump Screen shown in Figure
2-15. This screen displays processor address and register debug
information. This screen should be checked whenever the machine is
serviced, and any non-zero codes that appear should be recorded and
reported to the N.A.D. Engineering Department.
Touch the PRINT DUMP key to print out the codes on the strip chart
recorder. Figure 2-16 shows the printed format of the Service Dump.
SERVICE DUMP SCREEN
D0-D3: 00000000 00000000
D4-D7: 00000000 00000000
A0-A3: 00000000 00000000
A4-A7: 00000000 00000000
SR/FO: 00000000
PC: 00000000
USP: 00000000
MSP: 00000000
ISP: 00000000
ORVEC: 00000000
COUNT: 00000000
PSOS: 00000000 00000000
PSOS: 00000000 00000000
PSOS: 00000000 00000000
PSOS: 00000000 00000000
STACK: 00000000 00000000
STACK: 00000000 00000000
STACK: 00000000 00000000
MAIN
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
PRINT
DUMP
Figure 2-15: SERVICE DUMP SCREEN
2-18
SERVICE
LOG
RELAYS
PMS
CRITERIA
DUMP
MONITORS
PERIPHERALS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
************************
SERVICE DUMP
-----------------------D0
/-D1:
D2-D3:
D4-D5:
D6-D7:
A0
/-A1:
A2-A3:
A4-A5:
A6-A7:
SR/FO:
PC:
USP:
MSP:
ISP:
ORVEC:
COUNT:
PSOS:
PSOS:
PSOS:
PSOS:
PSOS:
PSOS:
PSOS:
STACK:
STACK:
STACK:
STACK:
STACK:
STACK:
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
//
0
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
//
00
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
0/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
//
00
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
//
0
/
00
/0
//
00
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
//
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
//
00
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
//
00
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
//
00
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
//
0
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
0/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
//
0
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
00
/
//
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
//
00
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
//
00
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
//
00
//
0
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
/0
//
00
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
0
//
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
//
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
//
00
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
//
00
/0
/0
/
/
00
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/0
/
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
//
00
//
0
/0
0
/0
/0
/0
/0
//
00
/
Figure 2-16: SERVICE DUMP PRINTOUT
2-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.6
NM4
O.R. DATA MANAGER Diagnostics
During Power Up/Initialization and following completion of the NM4 boot
sequence, the O.R. DATA MANAGER performs diagnostic tests on its CPU.
Figures 2-17A and 2-17B show the O.R. DATA MANAGER boot information
that appears on the Remote Display.
Error messages may appear in the display at this time. If the keyboard is not
connected at power-up, a keyboard error message appears as shown in the
illustration. System configuration or set-up errors may also appear in the area
shown in the illustration. If an error message is displayed, the screen display
will freeze with a choice of options at the bottom of the screen. The
Troubleshooting Guides in Section 3 provide additional information that
correlates error messages to recommended hardware replacement.
386 Modular BIOS V 3.10/
Copyright (c) 1984 - 90/ Award Software Inc.
LB/386SX R2.0/4 Copyright (c) 1985 - 92 Ampro Computers, Inc.
TESTING INTERRUPT CONTROLLER #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING INTERRUPT CONTROLLER #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING CMOS BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING CMOS CHECKSUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIZING SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING UNEXPECTED INTERRUPTS AND STUCK NMI
TESTING PROTECTED MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIZING EXTENDED MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING MEMORY IN PROTECTED MODE . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING PROCESSOR EXCEPTION INTERRUPTS . . . . .
BIOS SHADOW RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . PASS
. . . . . . . PASS
. . . . . . . PASS
. . . . . . . PASS
. . 640/K FOUND
. . 640/K PASS
. . . . . . . PASS
. . . . . . . PASS
0/7168K FOUND
. 0/780/8K PASS
. . . . . . . PASS
. . . ENABLED
CONFIGURATION OR SET-UP ERRORS APPEAR HERE
KEYBOARD ERROR OR NO KEYBOARD PRESENT
<PRESS CTRL-ALT-ESC FOR SETUP>
Figure 2-17A: O.R. DATA MANAGER POWER-UP DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN
2-20
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
Press ESC to abort Hard disk boot
Booting Hard Drive
Loading...
EMM 386 V1.21 /Frame = C0/0/0/ /Kb = 7168 /Bdos = FFFF
DR DOS Release 5.0/
Copyright (c) 1976, 1982, 1988, 1990 Digital Research Inc. All rights reserved.
Ampro Computers, Inc.
Executing runtime.bat on the hard drive.
Executing numoff.com.
Checking the CRC on ordm386.EXE with the CRC saved in the file CRC_ordm.
CRC calculation taking place.
Figure 2-17B: O.R. DATA MANAGER DIAGNOSTICS - SECOND SCREEN
2.7
O.R. DATA MANAGER Software Version Window
After power-up and when the O.R. DATA MANAGER is in its normal display
mode, the software version can be displayed by pressing the ALT and V keys
simultaneously. The window shown in Figure 2-18 will appear at the center of
the display for approximately three seconds. The message in parenthesis
(xxxxH) is an identifier that is unique to the particular software installation.
ORDM S/W Ver x.x (xxxxH)
Figure 2-18: SOFTWARE VERSION WINDOW
Rev. A
2-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.8
NM4
Printer Configuration
The O.R. DATA MANAGER is configured to operate with the Hewlett Packard
LaserJet IIP Printer or the Hewlett Packard LaserJet IIIP Printer in the serial
port configuration. The following paragraphs describe how to run a printer selftest, and illustrate the configuration menus that appear on the self-test
printout page.
2.8.1
Hewlett Packard LaserJet IIP Printer Self-Test:
If the printer ON LINE indicator light is on, press the ON LINE key to
take the printer off-line.
While holding the down the ALT key, press the TEST key. The printer
display window will show 05 SELF TEST.
A few seconds later, 06 PRINT TEST will appear in the display window.
Two pages will print: the self-test printout page and a "cleaning" page.
The self-test printout page lists the settings for both the printer menu
and the configuration menu. The list should read as follows:
PRINTING MENU
COPIES
1
FONT SRC I (Internal)
FONT NUM 0
TRAYS
LC ONLY
JOB SIZE LETTER
ORIENT
P (Portrait)
LINES OF TXT 60
MAN FEED OFF
SYM SET
ROMAN-8
CONFIGURATION MENU:
AUTOCONT ON
I/O
SERIAL
BAUDRATE 9600
ROBUST
XON ON
DTRPOLAR HI
RAM size: 1536K bytes
Firmware Datecode: 19890523
Internal Font Datecode: 19890213
Font Cartridges Installed: NO
Installed options: LC TRAY (LETTER)
If the self test printout differs from that shown in the illustration (with
the exception of Firmware Datecode and Internal Font Datecode), the
printer’s internal setup must be changed. Refer to the instructions in
the H-P LaserJet IIP Printer User’s Manual, Chapters 3 and 4,
supplied with the printer, for making any changes.
2-22
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
DIAGNOSTICS (continued)
2.8.2
Hewlett Packard LaserJet IIIP Printer Self-Test:
If the printer ON LINE indicator light is on, press the ON LINE key to
take the printer off-line.
While holding the down the ALT key, press the TEST key. The printer
display window will show 05 SELF TEST.
A few seconds later, 06 PRINT TEST will appear in the display window.
Two pages will print: the self-test printout page and a "cleaning" page.
The self-test printout page lists the settings for both the printer menu
and the configuration menu. The list should read as follows:
PRINTING MENU:
MP SIZE
LETTER
COPIES
1
FONT SRC I (Internal)
FONT NUM 0
TRAYS
LC ONLY
JOB SIZE LETTER
ORIENT
P (Portrait)
LINES OF TXT 60
MAN FEED OFF
SYM SET
ROMAN-8
CONFIGURATION MENU:
AUTOCONT ON
I/O
SERIAL
BAUDRATE 9600
ROBUST
XON ON
DTRPOLAR HI
RET
MEDIUM
RAM size: 1024K bytes
Page Count: 6574
Firmware Datecode: 19910523
Internal Font Datecode: 19910213
Font Cartridges Installed: NO
Installed options: LC TRAY (LETTER)
If the self test printout differs from that shown in the illustration (with
the exception of Page Count, Firmware Datecode and Internal Font
Datecode), the printer’s internal setup must be changed. Refer to the
instructions in the H-P LaserJet IIIP Printer User’s Manual,
Chapters 2 - 4, supplied with the printer, for making any changes.
2-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
3.0
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains information to assist the Draeger Medical, Inc. qualified
Technical Service Representative (TSR) in locating electrical faults affecting the
NARKOMED 4 monitoring and display devices. Since most troubleshooting efforts
begin with verifying power supply voltages, the following paragraphs outline the
voltage distribution scheme on the backplane along with power supply and test
connector pin identification.
Also contained in this section are troubleshooting guide flow charts that provide a
method of tracing faults to specific field replaceable assemblies or sub-assemblies in
response to observed failure modes or symptoms.
3.1
Rev. H
Power Supply and Voltage Distribution
3.1.1
In the NARKOMED 4, voltages are distributed to the processor boards
and peripheral devices from the backplane assembly. The TSR should
start the troubleshooting procedure with voltage checks at the
backplane. The wire harnesses originating at the power supply circuit
board are connected to J28, J29, and J30 on the backplane.
3.1.2
These voltages can also be measured at test connector J15 on later
model backplane assemblies. The acceptable voltage levels are listed in
Table 3-1. Figure 3-1 shows the location of these connectors on the
backplane. Refer to the replacement procedures in Section 4 for
instructions on access to the backplane assembly. Be sure to observe all
cautions that are listed.
3.1.3
If all the voltages are present, then ensure that all interconnecting
ribbon cables and wire harnesses between suspected assemblies are
properly seated. If all cables are properly seated, then proceed to the
troubleshooting guides.
3.1.4
If any voltage is missing from backplane connectors J28, J29 or J30,
proceed to the power supply voltage measurements in Paragraph 3.1.5.
3-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
TABLE 3-1: BACKPLANE VOLTAGES
LOCATION
TEST
CONNECTOR
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTORS
VOLTAGE
ACCEPTABLE
RANGE
J15-30
J15-32
J15-33
J15-31
J28-1
J28-4
J28-5
J28-2,3
+5SaO2
+15SaO2
-15SaO2
COMMON
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
14.25 to 15.75 VDC
-14.25 to -15.75 VDC
J15-17
J15-12
J15-18
J15-23
J15-24
J15-25
J15-27
J15-10
J29-1,2
J29-5,6,7
J29-10,11
J29-16
J29-17
J29-18
J29-20
J29-12,13
+12CRTA
+5VMAIN
+12CRTB
+5VNIBP
0 **
+5VNIBP *
+12VPUMP
COMMON
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
J15-13
J15-20
J15-14
J15-19
J15-21
J30-1,2
J30-5,6
J30-9,10
J30-13,14
J30-3,12
+5VBKUP
+12VPP
+5VXTRA
+12CRTC
COMMON
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
* Was -12 V on machines with early NIBP assembly.
** Was +12 V on machines with early NIBP assembly.
3-2
Rev. K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NARKOMED 4 BACKPLANE CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY
J15
J28
J29
NARKOMED 4 BACKPLANE CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY (EARLY MODELS)
Figure 3-1: BACKPLANE CONNECTORS FOR POWER SUPPLY CABLES
Rev. A
3-3
J30
SV49031
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
3.1.5
NM4
The red lamps on the power supply circuit board assembly provide
diagnostic information on the status of the power supply. Figure 3-2
shows the location of these lamps. Refer to the replacement procedures
in Section 4 for instructions on access to the power supply circuit board.
The red LED (DS2) will be lighted if any of the power supply voltages
are out of tolerance. This lamp will also be lighted if the levels of the
two backup batteries differ by more than 1.1 volt. The red LED (DS4)
will be lighted during the power up self-test period, and will be off after
the self-test is completed. This lamp will remain lighted if there is a
power up self-test failure of the monitoring and communication circuitry
on the power supply board.
The DC-DC converters supplying the 5V bus are protected by
replaceable fuses F1 and F2, and the DC-DC converters supplying the
12V bus are protected by replaceable fuses F3, F4, and F5. Figure 3-2
shows the location of these fuses on the power supply circuit board.
Measure the voltages at connectors J1, J2 and J5 of the Power Supply
Circuit Board assembly. The acceptable voltage levels are listed in
Table 3-2. Figure 3-2 shows the location of these connectors on the
circuit board.
TABLE 3-2: POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES
LOCATION
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
1,2
5,6
9,10
13,14
17,18
3,4,7,8
+5VBKUP
+12VPP
+5VXTRA
+12CRTC
+12VMGM
COMMON
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
J2 - 1,2
J2 - 5,6,7
J2 - 10,11
J2 - 16
J2 - 17
*J2 - 18
J2 - 20
J2 - 3,4,8,9
+12CRTA
+5VMAIN
+12CRTB
+5VNIBP
+12VNIBP
-12VNIBP
+12VPUMP
COMMON
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
-11.40 to -12.60 VDC
11.40 to 12.60 VDC
+5SaO2
+15SaO2
-15SaO2
COMMON
4.85 to 5.15 VDC
14.25 to 15.75 VDC
-14.25 to -15.75 VDC
J5
J5
J5
J5
-
VOLTAGE
-
1
4
5
2,3
* Not used in later design
3-4
Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
TO BACKPLANE J30
TO BACKPLANE J23
TO BACKPLANE J29
TO
BACKPLANE
J28
TO ALARM
CHANNEL J4
J3
DS3 (GREEN)
J1 J2
J4
DS1 (GREEN)
J5
DS4 (RED)
DS2 (RED)
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT BOARD
ASSEMBLY
F1
F2
F6
F3
F4
F5
F7
F8
J7
J8
J6
FROM BATTERY
AND POWER
TRANSFORMER COMPARTMENT
TO MULTISPEC
POWER SUPPLY BOARD J2
SV49032
Figure 3-2: POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTORS, LAMPS AND FUSES
Rev. A
3-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
3.2
NM4
Processor Test
If a Processor related failure is reported, it will be flagged either as the "Main" or
the "Back-Up" processor board. When the System Power switch is turned ON, the
unit performs extensive self-diagnostics on its internal hardware. As the
diagnostics are performed, each test and its result (PASS - FAIL) appear on the
display. First the "Main" or upper processor board is tested and then the "BackUp" or lower processor board is tested. If the "Back-Up" processor is reported
defective, press the BACKUP key to obtain a more detailed display of what is nonfunctional on that board.
When diagnosing a processor related problem, use the BACKUP key to toggle
between processors. As an additional diagnostic aid, the green lamp on the edge
of each processor board, when lighted, indicates the presence of +5 VDC supplied
to that board. Refer to the replacement procedures Section 4 for instructions on
access to the processor boards.
3.3
Troubleshooting Guide Flow Charts
Table 3-3 lists failure modes that could be detected during the power-up self test
and the service diagnostic tests. Each failure mode is keyed to a troubleshooting
guide flow chart to assist the Technical Service Representative in locating the
problem. These flow charts assume that the machine is plugged into an AC outlet
with the correct voltage, and the machine is not running on its backup battery.
Table 3-3: NARKOMED 4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDES
FAILURE MODE
New Patient Alarm Not Displayed
Loss of O2 Monitor
Loss of Breathing Pressure Monitor
Loss of GAS Monitor
Loss of Pulse Oximeter Monitor
Loss of Respiratory Volume Monitor
Loss of Blood Pressure Monitor
Touch Screen Failure
No Audio Alarms
DataScan function not Logging Data
Alarm Silence Failure
Vitalink Failure
Incorrect Display
Measure Data Incorrect
No Oxygen Ratio Monitor Alarm
No Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm
Display Screens Blank upon System Power-Up
Power Supply Voltages Out of Tolerance
No Keypanel or Selection Dial Response
Internal Printer Not Working
3-6
CORRECTIVE ACTION
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 1: New Patient Alarm Not Displayed
START
ARE NEW
PATIENT ALARMS
PRESENT ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
Y
N
ARE NEW
PATIENT ALARMS
PRESENT ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
PERFORM
PROCESSOR TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 3.2
Y
N
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
-------------------------------------REPLACE REMOTE
DISPLAY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.32 OR 4.33
DID
PROCESSOR TEST
INDICATE PROCESSOR
PROBLEM?
Y
REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
ARE NEW
PATIENT ALARMS
PRESENT ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
---------------------------------REPLACE BACKPLANE
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
ARE NEW
PATIENT ALARMS
PRESENT ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
Y
N
Y
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
REMOTE DISPLAY
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
3-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 2: Loss of O2 Monitor
START
IS
"O2 MON ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
Y
CONNECT OXYGEN
SENSOR CABLE TO
INTERFACE PANEL
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
VPO BOARD
---------------------------------PERFORM PROCESSOR
BOARD TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 3.2
IS
"O2 SENS DISC"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
REPLACE
OXYGEN SENSOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.39
N
DID
PROCESSOR TEST
INDICATE PROCESSOR
PROBLEM?
Y
IS
"O2 MON ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
N
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
OXYGEN SENSOR
---------------------------------REPLACE VPO BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.37
IS
"O2 MON ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
Y
IS
"O2 MON ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
N
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
3-8
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 3: Loss of Breathing Pressure Monitor
START
IS "BAROMED
ERROR" PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
Y
CONNECT
PILOT LINE TO
INTERFACE PANEL
N
REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
IS PILOT
LINE CONNECTED
TO INTERFACE
PANEL?
Y
REPLACE
VPO BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.37
IS "BAROMED
ERROR" PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
Y
IS "BAROMED
ERROR" PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
VPO BOARD
---------------------------------PERFORM PROCESSOR
BOARD TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 3.2
DID
PROCESSOR TEST
INDICATE PROCESSOR
PROBLEM?
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
Y
Rev. A
3-9
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 4: Loss of GAS Monitor
START
IS "CO2/
AGT ERR"PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
Y
REPLACE OCCLUDED
SAMPLE LINE OR
WATER TRAP
Y
IS "CO2/
AGT ERR"PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
IS "CO2
LINE BLK" PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
Y
REPLACE BACKPLANE
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
N
REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
N
IS "CO2/
AGT ERR"PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
Y
REPLACE MULTISPEC
ANALYZER ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.29
OR 4.30
N
IS "CO2/
AGT ERR"PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
N
IS "CO2/
AGT ERR"PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
Y
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
MULTISPEC ANALYZER
---------------------------------PERFORM PROCESSOR
BOARD TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 3.2
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
N
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-10
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 5: Loss of Pulse Oximetry Monitor
START
IS
"OXIMETER ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
IS SPO2
MONITOR DISPLAY
PANEL BLANK?
Y
CHECK
CONNECTIONS
BETWEEN SENSOR
AND SPO2
CABLE
CONNECTOR
Y
IS "OXI
SENS DISC" PRESENT
ON CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
IS SPO2
CABLE CONNECTED
TO INTERFACE
PANEL?
REPLACE
BACKPLANE
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
N
REPLACE
PULSE OXIMETER
(SPO2) ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.36
IS SPO2
MONITOR DISPLAY
PANEL BLANK?
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
IS SPO2
MONITOR DISPLAY
PANEL BLANK?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
SPO2 SENSOR
CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY
-----------------------------------PERFORM PROCESSOR
BOARD TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 3.2
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
IS SPO2
MONITOR DISPLAY
PANEL BLANK?
Y
Y
N
REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
Y
N
CONNECT
SPO2 CABLE TO
INTERFACE PANEL
N
3-11
N
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 6: Loss of Respiratory Volume Monitor
START
IS
"SPIROMED ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
Y
CONNECT
SENSOR CORD TO
INTERFACE PANEL
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
VPO BOARD
-------------------------------------REPLACE BACKPLANE
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
IS
"VOL SEN DISC"
DISPLAYED ON
RESP. VOLUME
MONITOR?
N
REPLACE
RESPIRATORY
VOLUME SENSOR
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.38
IS
"SPIROMED ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
Y
IS
"SPIROMED ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
RESP. VOLUME SENSOR
-------------------------------------REPLACE VPO BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.37
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
IS
"SPIROMED ERR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
N
Y
3-12
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 7: Loss of Blood Pressure Monitor
START
IS "NIBP
MON ERROR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
REPLACE NIBP PUMP
AND SENSOR CIRCUIT
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.35
PERFORM
PROCESSOR TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 3.2
N
CHECK CUFF
CONNECTION
AT PATIENT
INTERFACE
PANEL
Y
IS "NIBP
CUFF DISC"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
IS "NIBP
MON ERROR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
Y
N
Y
REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
IS "NIBP
MON ERROR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
IS "NIBP
MON ERROR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
IS "NIBP
CUFF ERROR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
NIBP PUMP AND SENSOR
CIRCUIT ASSEMBLY
-----------------------------------------REPLACE BACKPLANE
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
N
CHECK FOR
LEAKS AT
NIBP CUFF,
REPLACE CUFF
IF NECESSARY
IS "NIBP
MON ERROR"
DISPLAYED ON
CENTRAL ALARM
PANEL?
N
N
Y
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
3-13
N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 8: Touch Screen Failure
START
Y
IS TOUCH
SCREEN
RESPONSIVE?
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
FRONT BEZEL ASSEMBLY
-----------------------------------------REPLACE BACKPLANE
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
N
REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
PERFORM
PROCESSOR TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 3.2
Y
IS TOUCH
SCREEN
RESPONSIVE?
IS TOUCH
SCREEN
RESPONSIVE?
IS TOUCH
SCREEN
RESPONSIVE?
Y
Y
N
N
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
REPLACE FRONT
BEZEL ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.31
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
IS TOUCH
SCREEN
RESPONSIVE?
Y
N
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-14
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 9: No Audio Alarms
START
Y
ARE WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS AUDIBLY
ANNUNCIATED?
N
ARE WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS AUDIBLY
ANNUNCIATED?
CHECK
WIRING HARNESS
FROM SPEAKER
TO BACKPLANE
REPLACE MAIN
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4.26
Y
N
REPLACE
BACKPLANE PCB
ASM OUTLINED IN
SECTION 4.28
ARE WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS AUDIBLY
ANNUNCIATED?
ARE WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS AUDIBLY
ANNUNCIATED?
Y
N
N
ARE WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS AUDIBLY
ANNUNCIATED?
Y
REPLACE
SPEAKER
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE PCB
ARE WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS AUDIBLY
ANNUNCIATED?
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
Y
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL SPEAKER
-------------------------------PERFORM PROCESSOR
BOARD TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
SECTION 3.2
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
3-15
Y
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 10: DataScan Function not Logging Data
START
ARE
DATASCAN
READINGS PRESENT
ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
Y
ARE
DATASCAN
READINGS PRESENT
ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
N
REPLACE
REMOTE DISPLAY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.32 OR 4.33
Y
REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
N
REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
ARE
DATASCAN
READINGS PRESENT
ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
ARE
DATASCAN
READINGS PRESENT
ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
N
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
REMOTE DISPLAY
------------------------------------REPLACE FRONT
BEZEL ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.31
Y
ARE
DATASCAN
READINGS PRESENT
ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
Y
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
Y
ARE
DATASCAN
READINGS PRESENT
ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
FRONT BEZEL ASSEMBLY
-----------------------------------PERFORM PROCESSOR
BOARD TEST
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 3.2
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
N
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-16
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 11: Alarm Silence Failure
START
SILENCE
FUNCTION OK AT
MAIN AND REMOTE
PANELS
Y
N
SILENCE
FUNCTION FAIL AT
MAIN PANEL
ONLY?
SILENCE
FUNCTION FAIL AT
REMOTE PANEL
ONLY?
N
Y
PERFORM
PROCESSOR BOARD
TEST AS OUTLINED
IN SECTION 3.2
N
Y
CHECK CABLES:
BEZEL ASM TO
BACKPLANE J4;
SWITCH PANEL TO
TOUCH PANEL PCB J3
CHECK INTERNAL
CABLE FROM PATIENT
INTERFACE PANEL TO
BACKPLANEJ8
SILENCE
FUNCTION OK AT
MAIN AND REMOTE
PANELS
Y
SILENCE
FUNCTION OK AT
MAIN PANEL ?
Y
Y
SILENCE
FUNCTION OK AT
REMOTE PANEL ?
N
REPLACE MAIN
PROCESSOR BOARD
N
REPLACE FRONT
BEZEL ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.31
REPLACE
REMOTE DISPLAY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.32 OR 4.33
SILENCE
FUNCTION OK AT
MAIN AND REMOTE
PANELS
Y
N
SILENCE
FUNCTION OK AT
MAIN PANEL ?
Y
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
----------------------------------REPLACE BACKPLANE
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
SILENCE
FUNCTION OK AT
REMOTE PANEL ?
N
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BEZEL ASSEMBLY
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
REMOTE DISPLAY
Y
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
SILENCE
FUNCTION OK AT
MAIN AND REMOTE
PANELS
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
Y
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
3-17
N
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 12: Vitalink Failure
START
DOES HOST
FAIL TO COMMUNICATE
WITH PERIPHERAL
DEVICE?
N
Y
CONNECT
PERIPHERAL DEVICE
TO CORRECT SERIAL
INTERFACE PORT
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
SERIAL INTERFACE
ASSEMBLY
--------------------------------REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
IS
PERIPHERAL
CABLE CONNECTED TO
SERIAL INTERFACE
PORT?
Y
CHECK PERIPHERAL
DEVICE AND HOST
SERIAL PORT
CONFIGURATION
SETTINGS
N
DOES HOST
FAIL TO COMMUNICATE
WITH PERIPHERAL
DEVICE?
Y
DOES HOST
FAIL TO COMMUNICATE
WITH PERIPHERAL
DEVICE?
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
------------------------------------REPLACE
PROCESSOR BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.26
N
Y
REPLACE SERIAL
INTERFACE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.27
DOES HOST
FAIL TO COMMUNICATE
WITH PERIPHERAL
DEVICE?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
Y
DOES HOST
FAIL TO COMMUNICATE
WITH PERIPHERAL
DEVICE?
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
PROCESSOR BOARD
N
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
3-18
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 13: Incorrect Display
START
IS WRONG
MONITOR SCREEN
DISPLAYED?
N
Y
REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
IS WRONG
MONITOR SCREEN
DISPLAYED?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
Y
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
Rev. A
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 14: Measure Data Incorrect
START
IS MEASURE
DATA INCORRECT?
N
Y
REPLACE MULTISPEC
ANALYZER ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.29 OR 4.30
IS MEASURE
DATA INCORRECT?
N
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
MULTISPEC
ANALYZER ASSEMBLY
------------------------------------ENSURE THAT
COOLING FANS
ARE OPERATING
IS MEASURE
DATA INCORRECT?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-20
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 15: No Oxygen Ratio Monitor Alarm
START
Y
IS O2/N2O
RATIO ALARM
FUNCTIONAL?
N
REPLACE ALARM
CHANNEL ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.21
IS O2/N2O
RATIO ALARM
FUNCTIONAL?
Y
N
IS O2/N2O
RATIO ALARM
FUNCTIONAL?
Y
REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
ALARM CHANNEL
ASSEMBLY
-------------------------------------CHECK ORMC
ADJUSTMENTS
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 5.4
IS O2/N2O
RATIO ALARM
FUNCTIONAL?
Y
N
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
3-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 16: No Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm
START
DOES
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE ALARM
FUNCTION?
Y
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL OXYGEN
SUPPLY PRESSURE
ALARM SWITCH
----------------------------------------REPLACE ALARM
CHANNEL ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.21 OR 4.22
CHECK
WIRE HARNESS
FROM ALARM SWITCH
TO ALARM CHANNEL
DOES
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE ALARM
FUNCTION?
Y
DOES
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE ALARM
FUNCTION?
N
Y
N
REPLACE OXYGEN
SUPPLY PRESSURE
ALARM SWITCH
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.8
OR 4.22
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
ALARM CHANNEL
ASSEMBLY
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
DOES
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE ALARM
FUNCTION?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
Y
N
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-22
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 17: Display Screens Blank upon System Power-Up
START
ARE BOTH
DISPLAY PANELS
BLANK ON SYSTEM
POWER UP?
N
Y
ARE BOTH
DISPLAY PANELS
BLANK ON SYSTEM
POWER UP
REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
N
Y
ARE BOTH
DISPLAY PANELS
BLANK ON SYSTEM
POWER UP?
N
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
FRONT BEZEL
ASSEMBLY
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
------------------------------------REPLACE FRONT
BEZEL ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.31
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
3-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 18: Power Supply Voltages Out of Tolerance
START
ARE
POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGES OUT OF
TOLERANCE?
N
Y
REPLACE POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT BOARD
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.25
ARE
POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGES OUT OF
TOLERANCE?
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
N
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT BOARD
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-24
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 19: No Keypanel or Selection Dial Response
START
ARE KEYPANEL
AND SELECTION DIAL
RESPONSIVE?
Y
N
ARE KEYPANEL
AND SELECTION DIAL
RESPONSIVE
REPLACE FRONT
BEZEL ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.31
Y
N
ARE KEYPANEL
AND SELECTION DIAL
RESPONSIVE?
Y
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
FRONT BEZEL ASSEMBLY
-----------------------------------REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
3-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 20: Internal Printer Not Working
START
DOES
INTERNAL PRINTER
FUNCTION?
Y
N
CONNECT PRINTER
CABLE TO
BACKPLANE J1
N
IS PRINTER
CABLE
CONNECTED?
DOES
INTERNAL PRINTER
FUNCTION?
N
Y
REPLACE
INTERNAL PRINTER
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.43
DOES
INTERNAL PRINTER
FUNCTION?
Y
PERFORM A
COMPLETE PMS
ON THE UNIT
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
N
DOES UNIT
PASS PMS?
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
INTERNAL PRINTER
------------------------------------REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-26
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
3.4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
O.R. DATA MANAGER Troubleshooting
Table 3-4 lists failure modes and symptoms for the O.R. DATA MANAGER.
Those that are marked (*) in the table are messages that can appear on the
Remote Display during the power-up self test. Each failure mode or symptom
is keyed to a recommended action to assist the TSR in locating a problem.
Refer to the Replacement Procedures section for instructions on access to the
O.R. DATA MANAGER CPU assembly, cable connections and keyboard.
TABLE 3-4: O. R. DATA MANAGER FAILURE MODES AND SYMPTOM LIST
Rev. A
FAILURE MODE OR SYMPTOM
ACTION
Display Blank
*Keyboard Error or Keyboard Not Present
*Internal Diagnostic Failure upon System Power-Up
*Memory Battery Fail
*CMOS Checksum Fail
*Interrupt Controller #1 Fail
*Interrupt Controller #2 Fail
*Memory in Protected Mode Fail
*Protected Mode Fail
*Processor Exception Interrupts Fail
*Sizing System Memory 640K Not Found
*System Memory 640K Fail
*Sizing Extended Memory 00384K Not Found
*Communications Error with Host
*Disk Error
*Disk Full Error
*Disk Invalid Error
*Disk Not Inserted Error
*"B" Drive Error Messages
Printer Inoperative
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
GUIDE
3-27
21
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
24
25
25
25
25
26
27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 21: Display Blank
START
N
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK?
FIRST:
REMOVE AC POWER
-----------------------------CONNECT REMOTE
DISPLAY CABLE TO
INTERFACE PANEL
-----------------------------RESTORE AC POWER
Y
N
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY
PLUGGED IN?
N
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK
IN ORDM MODE
ONLY?
Y
CHECK CABLE
CONNECTIONS:
INTERFACE PANEL
TO BACKPLANE J8
N
IS INTERFACE
PANEL CABLE
CONNECTED?
Y
N
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK
IN NM4 MODE
ONLY?
Y
SWITCH REMOTE PANEL
RELAY AS OUTLINED IN
PARAGRAPH 2.4.1
Y
SWITCH TO
BACKUP PROCESSOR
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK IN BOTH
NM4 AND ORDM
MODES?
N
Y
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK IN BOTH
MAIN AND BACKUP
PROCESSORS?
REPLACE
REMOTE DISPLAY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.32 OR 4.33
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK IN BOTH
NM4 AND ORDM
MODES?
N
Y
REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.28
N
Y
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
REMOTE DISPLAY
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
3-28
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK?
N
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 21: Display Blank (continued)
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK?
N
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
REMOTE DISPLAY
-------------------------------------CHECK ORDM VIDEO
CABLE CONNECTIONS:
VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
J3 TO BACKPLANE J14
(ALSO CHECK POWER
CONNECTIONS TO CPU
ASSEMBLY)
REPLACE
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE4.28
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK?
N
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
------------------------------------REPLACE ORDM
VIDEO CABLE
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK IN
MAIN PROCESSOR
ONLY?
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK?
N
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
VIDEO CABLE
---------------------------------REPLACE CPU
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.44
OR 4.45
Y
REPLACE MAIN
PROCESSOR BOARD
N
REPLACE BACKUP
PROCESSOR BOARD
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK?
IS REMOTE
DISPLAY BLANK?
Y
Y
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
Rev. A
N
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
CPU ASSEMBLY
3-29
N
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 22: Keyboard Error or Keyboard Not Present
START
IS KEYBOARD
ERROR PRESENT
DURING SYSTEM
POWER-UP?
N
Y
CHECK KEYBOARD
CABLE CONNECTIONS:
INTERNAL KEYBOARD
CABLE TO CPU BOARD J5;
ALSO CHECK FLOATING
KEYBOARD CABLE
CONNECTOR IN
MONITOR BOX
N
IS KEYBOARD
ERROR PRESENT
DURING SYSTEM
POWER-UP?
IS KEYBOARD
CABLE CONNECTED
TO CPU?
Y
N
Y
REPLACE
KEYBOARD
ASSEMBLY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.46
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL CPU
ASSEMBLY
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
IS KEYBOARD
ERROR PRESENT
DURING SYSTEM
POWER-UP?
N
Y
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
-------------------------------------REPLACE CPU
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.44 OR 4.45
3-30
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 23: Internal Diagnostic, Interrupt Controller, or Memory Failure
START
DO ANY
POWER-UP DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS FAIL OR SET-UP
ERRORS OCCUR?
N
Y
REPLACE
CPU ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.44
OR 4.45
DO ANY
POWER-UP DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS FAIL OR SET-UP
ERRORS OCCUR?
N
Y
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL CPU
ASSEMBLY
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
Rev. A
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 24: Communications Error with Host
START
IS "ORDM
COM ERROR" PRESENT
ON REMOTE DISPLAY
ADVISORY?
N
REPLACE
DATA CABLE
Y
SWITCH REMOTE PANEL
RELAY TO ORDM AS
OUTLINED IN PARA. 2.4.1
----------------------------------------CHECK CONFIG OF ORDM:
REF. SETUP AND
INSTALLATION SECTION OF
NM4 OPERATOR'S MANUAL
--------------------------------------RETURN RELAY TO
NM4 MODE
IS "ORDM
COM ERROR" PRESENT
ON REMOTE DISPLAY
ADVISORY?
N
Y
IS "ORDM
COM ERROR" PRESENT
ON REMOTE DISPLAY
ADVISORY?
REINSTALL ORIGINAL
DATA CABLE
--------------------------------REPLACE ORDM CPU
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.44 OR 4.45
N
Y
SWITCH TO
BACKUP PROCESSOR
IS "ORDM
COM ERROR" PRESENT
IN MAIN PROCESSOR
ONLY?
IS "ORDM
COM ERROR" PRESENT
ON REMOTE DISPLAY
ADVISORY?
N
N
Y
IS "ORDM
COM ERROR" PRESENT IN
BOTH MAIN AND BACKUP
PROCESSORS?
Y
N
REPLACE MAIN
PROCESSOR BOARD
REPLACE BACKUP
PROCESSOR BOARD
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL CPU
ASSEMBLY
Y
IS INTERNAL
DATA CABLE
CONNECTED?
Y
IS "ORDM
COM ERROR" PRESENT
ON REMOTE DISPLAY
ADVISORY?
N
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
N
Y
CHECK DATA CABLE
CONNECTIONS:
CPU BOARD J3
TO BACKPLANE J3
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
3-32
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 25: Disk Errors
START
DOES
"DISK ERROR"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
REPLACE DISK
WITH A
FORMATTED
3-1/2" HIGH
DENSITY DISK
Y
DOES
"DISK NOT INSERTED"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
Y
INSERT FORMATTED
DATA DISK INTO
DISK DRIVE
DOES
"DISK NOT INSERTED"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
REPLACE DISK
WITH A
FORMATTED
3-1/2" HIGH
DENSITY DISK
Y
N
DOES
"DISK INVALID"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
Y
REPLACE DISK
WITH A
FORMATTED
3-1/2" HIGH
DENSITY DISK
DOES
"DISK FULL"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
N
N
DOES
"DISK GENERAL ERROR"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
REPLACE
CPU ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.44
OR 4.45
Y
Rev. A
Y
N
N
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
Y
N
N
DOES
"DISK FULL"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
Y
N
N
DOES
"DISK INVALID"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
DOES
"DISK ERROR"
FLASH ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL CPU
ASSEMBLY
3-33
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
Y
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
NM4
GUIDE 26: "B" Drive Error Messages
START
ARE ANY
"B" DRIVE ERRORS
SHOWN ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
N
Y
REPLACE MEMORY
BATTERY AS
OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.44
ARE ANY
"B" DRIVE ERRORS
SHOWN ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
N
Y
REPLACE CPU
ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.44
OR 4.45
ARE ANY
"B" DRIVE ERRORS
SHOWN ON REMOTE
DISPLAY?
N
Y
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL CPU
ASSEMBLY
CONTACT NAD
SERVICE DEPT.
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-34
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
GUIDE 27: Printer Inoperative
START
DOES
EXTERNAL PRINTER
FUNCTION?
Y
N
CONNECT
EXTERNAL PRINTER
CABLE
N
IS
EXT. PRINTER
CABLE CONNECTED
TO PRINTER
PORT?
DOES
EXTERNAL PRINTER
FUNCTION?
Y
CONNECT PRINTER
POWER CORD
N
Y
N
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL CABLE
----------------------------REPLACE ORDM
CPU ASSEMBLY
AS OUTLINED IN
PROCEDURE 4.44
OR 4.45
IS EXTERNAL
PRINTER POWER CORD
CONNECTED?
Y
CHECK
PRINTER CABLE
CONNECTIONS:
CPU BOARD J2 TO
BACKPLANE J13
(ALSO CHECK
SERIAL INTERFACE
BOARD J6 TO
BACKPLANE J2)
N
DOES
EXTERNAL PRINTER
FUNCTION?
IS PRINTER
INTERNAL CABLE
CONNECTED?
N
Y
DOES
EXTERNAL PRINTER
FUNCTION?
CONTACT
NAD SERVICE
DEPARTMENT
N
REPLACE
PRINTER
CABLE
Rev. A
Y
REINSTALL
ORIGINAL ORDM
CPU ASSEMBLY
UNIT IS
FUNCTIONAL
3-35
Y
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.0
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
This section outlines removal and replacement procedures for the field-replaceable
assemblies of the NARKOMED 4 Anesthesia System.
These procedures are to be performed only by a Draeger Medical, Inc. qualified
Technical Service Representative (TSR).
The following are the only procedures authorized by Draeger Medical, Inc. to be
performed in the field. All other service procedures shall be referred to Draeger
Medical, Inc.’s Technical Service Department.
NOTE:
Rev. H
The PMS PROCEDURE given in Section 6 must be performed
after any replacement, removal, calibration or adjustment
procedure.
4-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.1
NM4
Cylinder Yoke Assemblies
Each cylinder yoke contains a replaceable filter and check valve assembly.
Replacement of this assembly requires that the yoke be removed from the
anesthesia machine. Figure 4-1 shows a typical cylinder yoke mounting
arrangement. Access to the yoke mounting screws and gas line connection
requires that the table top be removed from the machine.
4.1.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.1.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.1.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.1.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.1.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.1.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.1.7
Remove the cylinder where the yoke is to be replaced.
WARNING:
Store the cylinder in a safe place and lay it on its side.
4.1.8
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.1.9
Pull the writing or keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.1.10
Disconnect the gas line fitting at the yoke and remove the two yoke
mounting screws.
4.1.11
Remove the filter and check valve assembly from the yoke and install
a replacement assembly.
If the entire yoke assembly is being replaced, verify that the pin
indexing arrangement and the label are in agreement with the gas
designation stamped on the mounting surface of the yoke. Refer to
the parts list in Section 8.
NOTE: If the yoke spacer is removed from the frame rail of the machine, be
sure to re-install it in its original position.
4-2
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
YOKE
ASSEMBLY
(TYPICAL)
YOKE
SPACER
FILTER AND
CHECK VALVE
ASSEMBLY
GAS
LINE
Figure 4-1: CYLINDER YOKE ASSEMBLY
Rev. H
4-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.1.12
Position the yoke on the spacer, and install the two mounting screws
and lockwashers. Tighten the screws securely. Connect the gas line
fitting to the yoke.
4.1.13
If a new cylinder is being installed, remove the old sealing washer
from the gas inlet of the yoke and install a new washer.
4.1.14
Install the correct cylinder in the yoke, making sure that the index
pins are properly engaged before tightening the handle bolt. The
cylinder should hang vertically after the handle is tight.
4.1.15
Perform the following leak test on the yoke assembly:
4.1.15.1
Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure
indication on the corresponding gauge at the gas
instrumentation panel.
NOTE:
The cylinder used for this test must
contain the following minimum pressure at
70°F (21°C):
:
O2
N2O :
O2+He :
CO2 :
AIR :
1000 Psi
600 Psi
1000 Psi
600 Psi
1000 Psi
4.1.15.2
Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the
yoke.
4.1.15.3
For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50
Psi in two minutes.
4.1.16
Re-install the cylinder in the yoke.
4.1.17
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.1.18
Replace the pipeline hoses.
4.1.19
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-4
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.2
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Cylinder Pressure Regulators
Access to the cylinder pressure regulators requires that the table top be
removed from the anesthesia machine. Figure 4-2 shows the mounting
arrangement of the regulators and typical connections.
4.2.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.2.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.2.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.2.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.2.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.2.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.2.7
Remove the cylinder corresponding to the regulator to be replaced.
4.2.8
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.2.9
Remove the top drawer from the cabinet and pull the writing or
keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.2.10
Disconnect the three compression fittings at the regulator.
4.2.11
Loosen the two setscrews holding the regulator to its mounting
bracket and remove the regulator.
4.2.12
Record the serial number of the regulator that was removed, and
record the serial number of the replacement regulator.
NOTE: If fittings must be installed in the replacement regulator, use Loctite
#271 (red). Refer to the parts list in Section 8.
NOTE: For Canadian machines, verify that the correct relief valve is
installed in the regulator. Refer to the parts list in Section 8 for CSA
items.
4.2.13
Rev. A
Position the replacement regulator in its mounting bracket, and
connect the three compression fittings. Do not tighten the fittings yet.
4-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
TOP VIEW OF NARKOMED 4
WITH TABLE TOP REMOVED
N2O CYLINDER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
O2 CYLINDER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
SET
SCREWS
AIR OR OPTIONAL
3RD GAS CYLINDER
PRESSURE REGULATOR
TEST GAUGE
CONNECTION
(TYPICAL)
SIDE VIEW
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
ACORN NUT
CPR
Figure 4-2: CYLINDER PRESSURE REGULATORS
4-6
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.2.14
Tighten the regulator mounting setscrews to a torque of 50 to 55 in.
lbs.
4.2.15
Tighten the compression fittings.
4.2.16
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter regulator output line,
and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
4.2.17
Set the regulator output pressure in accordance with the Cylinder
Pressure Regulator Adjustment given in Section 5.
4.2.18
Perform the following leak test on the high pressure side of the
regulator:
4.2.18.1
Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure
indication on the corresponding gauge at the gas
instrumentation panel.
NOTE:
The cylinder used for this test must
contain the following minimum pressure at
70°F (21°C):
:
O2
N2O :
O2+He :
CO2 :
AIR :
Rev. A
1000 Psi
600 Psi
1000 Psi
600 Psi
1000 Psi
4.2.18.2
Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the
yoke.
4.2.18.3
For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50
Psi in two minutes.
4.2.19
Re-install the cylinder in the yoke.
4.2.20
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.2.21
Replace the top drawer in the cabinet.
4.2.22
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.2.23
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.3
NM4
Cylinder Cutoff Valves (Canada)
Access to the cylinder cutoff valves requires removal of the table top from the
anesthesia machine. Figure 4-3 shows the locations of the O2, Air or 3rd gas,
and N2O cutoff valve assemblies. The instructions apply to all three assemblies.
On earlier machines the tubing arrangement may be slightly different from
that illustrated.
NOTE: Replacement of the O2 Cutoff Valve Assembly shall be performed every
24 months. Documentation shall be created by the service person and a copy
distributed to the owner institution. Testing of the O2 Cutoff Valve shall be
performed at each PMS. (Perform the flow test given at the end of the
following procedure)
4.3.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.3.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.3.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.3.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.3.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.3.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.3.7
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.3.8
Remove the top drawer from the cabinet and pull the writing or
keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.3.9
Disconnect the compression fittings indicated at points marked C on
the illustration.
4.3.10
Cut the tie-wrap clamp and disconnect the flexible tubing from the
cutoff valve assembly at the point marked A on the illustration.
NOTE: On later machines with assemblies that have brass fittings instead
of nylon, the flex tubing is attached with a press-on hose clamp
instead of a tie strap.
4.3.11
Remove the cylinder cutoff assembly.
4.3.12
Connect the flexible tubing to the replacement cutoff valve assembly
and secure it with a new tie-wrap clamp.
4-8
Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
SV50526
C
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
O2 CYLINDER
CUTOFF VALVE
ASSEMBLY
AIR OR 3RD GAS
CYLINDER
CUTOFF VALVE
ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-3: CYLINDER CUTOFF VALVES (CANADA)
Rev. H
4-9
A
N2O CYLINDER
CUTOFF VALVE
ASSEMBLY
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.3.13
Connect and tighten the compression fittings at points marked C on
the illustration.
4.3.14
Perform the following test: --Remove the plug from the test gauge
connection at the Tee fitting in the regulator outlet piping, and install
a test gauge.
NOTE: The cylinders used for this test must contain the following minimum
: 1000 PSI
AIR : 1000 PSI
pressure: O2
N2O : 745 PSI
O2+He : 1000 PSI
--Set the System Power switch to ON.
--For the O2 cutoff valve: open the O2 cylinder valve and set the oxygen flow to
4 liters per min.
--For the N2O cutoff valve: open the O2 cylinder valve and the N2O cylinder
valve. Set each flow to 4 liters per min.
--Verify that regulator outlet pressure is between 43 and 49 PSI.
--Connect the pipeline hoses and pressurize to 50 PSI.
--Turn off the pipeline supply and observe the pipeline pressure gauge.
--The cutoff valve shall open when the pipeline pressure drops through the
range of 45 to 40 PSI.
--Close the cylinder valve(s), and close the flow control valve(s).
--Disconnect test pressure gauge and reinstall the plug in the regulator outlet
piping.
4.3.15
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.3.16
Replace the top drawer in the cabinet.
4.3.17
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.3.18
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
O2 Flow Test:
--Disconnect all pipeline supplies.
--Install a full O2 cylinder on the machine, and open the cylinder valve.
--Turn the System Power switch to ON.
--Set the Inspiratory Flow control to maximum high, and turn the ventilator switch to ON.
--Set the oxygen flow to 10 l/min.
--Verify that the oxygen flow does not drop below 8 l/min. while the ventilator is running.
--Press and hold the O2 FLUSH button while observing the O2 flowmeter, and verify that the
oxygen flow does not drop below 8 l/min.
--If the oxygen flow in either of the above two steps drops below 8 l/min., replace the O2 cutoff
valve assembly.
4-10
Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Cylinder and Pipeline Pressure Gauges
Replacement of the cylinder and pipeline pressure gauges requires that the
plexiglass front cover be removed from the gas instrumentation panel, and also
the rear cover for access to the gauge connections. Figure 4-4 shows
disassembly and mounting details.
4.4.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.4.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.4.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.4.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.4.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.4.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.4.7
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
4.4.8
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.4.9A
Early models: Remove the two screws (from the back) holding the
front plate at the top of the plexiglass cover. Hold the front plate as
the screws are removed from the back.
4.4.9B
Later models (without the O2/N2O ratio alarm lamp): Remove the six
screws holding the flowmeter shield and vapor box cover panel, and
remove the panel.
4.4.10
Remove the flow control knobs. Each knob has two setscrews.
NOTE:
Rev. A
If a knob must be rotated to allow access to a setscrew,
carefully note its position so that it can be re-assembled
in the same position with the "Off Stop" properly set.
4.4.11
Remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place, and remove
the knob guard.
4.4.12
Remove the three screws holding the plexiglass cover over the flow
tubes and gauges, and carefully remove the cover.
4-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
REAR VIEW OF NARKOMED 4
FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
FRONT COVER
RETAINER SCREWS
GAUGE
MOUNTING
NUTS (TYP.)
FLEXIBLE TUBING
CONNECTION
(PIPELINE PRESSURE
GAUGES)
COMPRESSION
FITTING
(CYLINDER PRESSURE
GAUGES)
Figure 4-4: CYLINDER AND PIPELINE PRESSURE GAUGES
4-12
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NOTE:
Intermediate assemblies may need to be removed to allow
access to the gauge connections and mounting hardware.
Be sure to keep a record of the disassembly sequence so
that all tubing can be correctly re-assembled.
4.4.13A For the cylinder pressure gauges:
Disconnect the compression fitting at the back of the gauge.
Remove the gauge mounting nuts, and remove the gauge from
the front of the panel.
Install the replacement gauge in the panel using the flat
washers, lock washers and mounting nuts that were previously
removed.
Connect the gas line to the gauge and tighten the compression
fitting.
4.3.13B For the pipeline pressure gauges:
Locate the flexible tubing connecting the gauge to the pipeline
inlet assembly, cut the tie-wrap tubing clamp at the pipeline
inlet and disconnect the tubing.
NOTE:
On later machines that have brass fittings instead
of nylon, the flex tubing is attached with a presson hose clamp instead of a tie strap.
Remove the gauge mounting nuts, and remove the gauge from
the front of the panel.
Cut the tie-wrap tubing clamp and disconnect the flexible tubing
from the gauge.
Connect a new 7-inch length of tubing (8-inch for the air pipeline
pressure gauge) to the replacement gauge and secure it with a
new tie-wrap clamp.
Place the gauge in the panel and secure it with the flat washers,
lock washers and mounting nuts that were previously removed.
Connect the other end of the flexible tubing to the pipeline inlet
assembly and secure it with a tie-wrap clamp.
4.4.14
Rev. C
If a cylinder pressure gauge was replaced, perform the following leak
test:
4-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.4.14.1
NM4
Open the cylinder valve and check for a pressure
indication on the corresponding gauge at the gas
instrumentation panel.
NOTE:
The cylinder used for this test must
contain the following minimum pressure at
70°F (21°C):
:
O2
N2O :
O2+He :
CO2 :
AIR :
1000 Psi
600 Psi
1000 Psi
600 Psi
1000 Psi
4.4.14.2
Close the cylinder valve and remove the cylinder from the
yoke.
4.4.14.3
For any gas, the pressure should not drop more than 50
Psi in two minutes.
4.4.15
Re-install the cylinder in the yoke.
4.4.16
Place the plexiglass cover over the gauges and flow tubes, and install
the three screws near the top of the cover. Do not over-tighten these
screws as the plexiglass may crack.
4.4.17
Place the knob guard over the flow control valves and install its two
retaining screws.
4.4.18
Install the flow control knobs and tighten their setscrews. If the
knobs are installed properly, their labels will be straight when the
knobs are against their clockwise stops.
4.4.19
Replace the front plate at the top of the plexiglass cover and secure
it with the hardware that was previously removed.
4.4.20
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.4.21
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.4.22
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.4.23
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-14
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.5
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Flowmeters
The flowmeter tubes are held by compression in gaskets at the top and bottom
of each tube. Each upper gasket is seated in an adjustable retainer that allows
removal of the tube as shown in Figure 4-5. Access to the flow tubes and their
retainers requires removal of the plexiglass cover on the gas instrumentation
panel.
4.5.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.5.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.5.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.5.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.5.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.5.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.5.7
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.5.8
Early models: Remove the rear flowmeter housing cover.
4.5.9A
Early models: Remove the two screws (from the back) holding the
front plate at the top of the plexiglass cover. Hold the front plate as
the screws are removed from the back.
4.5.9B
Later models (without the O2/N2O ratio alarm lamp): Remove the six
screws holding the flowmeter shield and vapor box cover panel, and
remove the panel.
4.5.10
Remove the flow control knobs. Each knob has two setscrews.
NOTE:
Rev. A
If a knob must be rotated to allow access to a setscrew,
carefully note its position so that it can be re-assembled
in the same position with the "Off Stop" properly set.
4.5.11
Remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place, and remove
the knob guard.
4.5.12
Remove the three screws holding the plexiglass cover over the flow
tubes and gauges, and carefully remove the cover.
4-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
FLOW TUBE
RETAINER SCREW
UPPER FLOW
TUBE RETAINER
FLOW TUBE
LIGHTING CHANNEL
FLOW
RESTRICTOR
SV40605
GUIDE RING
GASKET
Figure 4-5: FLOWMETERS
4-16
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.5.13
Loosen the screw directly above the flowmeter tube to be replaced.
Turning the screw counter clockwise will raise the upper flow tube
retainer. Raise the retainer far enough to be able to pull the top of
the tube outward, and remove the tube.
NOTE:
If the bottom of the tube is seated in a flow restrictor, be
sure that the arrangement of the restrictor and its
gaskets is not disturbed.
4.5.14
Make sure that the replacement flow tube bears the correct markings
and has a ball.
4.5.15
Place the bottom of the flowmeter tube into the guide ring of the
lower gasket seal, and position the top of the flow tube into the center
guide ring of the top gasket seal. It will be easier to hold the tube if
the adjacent lighting channel is pulled forward and temporarily
removed.
CAUTION: The flowmeter tube must be properly centered over the
guide rings or damage to the flowmeter tube may occur.
4.5.16
Ensure that the markings on the flow tube are facing forward, and
turn the upper retainer screw clockwise until the flow tube is firmly
held in place.
CAUTION: Do not over-tighten the screw as the flowmeter tube may
break.
4.5.17
Rev. A
Perform the following leak test on the system:
4.5.17.1
Disconnect the absorber hose from the freshgas outlet.
4.5.17.2
Connect a test gauge and B.P. bulb to the freshgas outlet,
and pressurize the system to 50 cm H2O.
4.5.17.3
The pressure should not drop more than 10 cm H2O in
thirty seconds.
4.5.18
Disconnect the test gauge and re-connect the absorber hose to the
freshgas outlet.
4.5.19
Replace any lighting channels that were previously removed.
4-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.5.20
Place the plexiglass cover over the gauges and flow tubes, and install
the three screws near the top of the cover. Do not over-tighten these
screws as the plexiglass may crack.
4.5.21
Place the knob guard over the flow control valves and install its two
retaining screws.
4.5.22
Install the flow control knobs and tighten their setscrews. If the
knobs are installed properly, their labels will be straight when the
knobs are against their clockwise stops.
4.5.23
Replace the front plate at the top of the plexiglass cover and secure
it with the hardware that was previously removed.
4.5.24
If applicable, replace the rear flowmeter housing cover.
4.5.25
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.5.26
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.5.27
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-18
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.6
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Flow Control Valves
The flow control valves have replaceable elements that are removable from the
front of the gas instrumentation panel as shown in Figure 4-6. Each flow
control knob has a clockwise positive stop arrangement that prevents damage
to the valve seat. Whenever a valve cartridge is replaced, the "off stop" must
be set as outlined in the following procedure.
4.6.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.6.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.6.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.6.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.6.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.6.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.6.7
Remove the flow control knobs.
4.6.8
Remove the two screws holding the knob guard in place, and remove
the knob guard.
4.6.9
Remove the stop pin nut.
4.6.10
Remove the flow control valve by holding it at the wrench flats and
turning it counter-clockwise.
4.6.11
Install the replacement flow control valve in the valve body.
CAUTION: Before tightening the cartridge, rotate the valve shaft
several turns counter-clockwise to prevent bottoming the
valve element into the seat when the cartridge is
tightened.
Rev. A
4.6.12
Replace the stop pin nut.
4.6.13
Replace the knob guard and secure it with the two mounting screws.
4-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
VALVE
HOUSING
FLOW CONTROL
VALVE
STOP PIN
NUT
WRENCH
FLATS
KNOB GUARD
(NEW STYLE)
LABEL
KNOB
KNOB GUARD
(OLD STYLE)
SV20606
Figure 4-6: FLOW CONTROL VALVES
4-20
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.6.14
Set the System Power switch to ON.
4.6.15A For the O2 flow control valve:
Open the oxygen cylinder valve.
Turn the flow control valve clockwise until the flow rate will not
drop any further. (If the machine has been modified to eliminate
the minimum flow feature, turn the valve until the flow rate is
zero.)
4.6.15B For the other gas flow control valves:
Open the oxygen cylinder valve, and open the cylinder valve
corresponding to the flow control valve replacement.
Set the oxygen flow rate to four liters per minute.
Turn the other gas flow control valve clockwise until the flow
rate is zero.
Rev. A
4.6.16
Place the knob on the flow control valve shaft and turn it clockwise
until it engages the stop pin. Tighten one of the knob setscrews.
4.6.17
Turn the knob in both directions and ensure that the flow can be
controlled over its entire range. When the valve is closed, the knob
should be against the clockwise stop. Tighten the remaining setscrew.
4.6.18
If the knob label is not horizontal when the valve is closed, remove
the label and install a new label in the correct position.
4.6.19
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.6.20
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.7
NM4
Oxygen Supply Pressure Failure Protection Device
The oxygen supply failure protection devices (failsafe assemblies) are located
behind the gas instrumentation panel. Access to these assemblies requires
removal of the rear cover. For earlier machines, replacement assemblies are
supplied with all hardware out to the first compression fitting in each line.
On later machines with flowmeter assemblies having an Oxygen Ratio
Controller (ORC), failsafe assemblies have an additional inlet port that allows
both pipeline and cylinder supplies to be connected directly to the failsafe
assemblies. Figure 4-7 shows the arrangement for both types of assemblies.
4.7.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.7.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.7.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.7.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.7.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.7.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.7.7
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
4.7.8
Cut the tie-wrap clamp on the flexible O2 control line, and disconnect
the flexible tube.
NOTE: On later machines with assemblies that have brass fittings instead
of nylon, the flex tubing is attached with a press-on hose clamp
instead of a tie strap.
4.7.9
Disconnect the compression fittings at the side ports and at the check
valve, and remove the assembly.
NOTE: If fittings must be installed in the replacement block assembly, use
Loctite #271 (red). See parts list in Section 8.
4.7.10
Install the replacement failsafe assembly, and tighten all compression
fittings.
4.7.11
Connect the flexible tubing to the control port, and install a new tiewrap clamp.
4-22
Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
EARLIER DESIGN SUPPLIED
WITH FITTINGS
LATER DESIGN OF MACHINES
WITH FLOWMETER ASSEMBLIES
HAVING AN ORC
O2 CONTROL LINE
O2
CONNECTION
OXYGEN SUPPLY
FAILURE PROTECTION
DEVICE (N2O CONTROL
DEVICE ILLUSTRATED)
OUTLET
CYLINDER
INLET
CHECK VALVE
SV70 10 1
PIPELINE
INLET
Figure 4-7: OXYGEN SUPPLY FAILURE PROTECTION DEVICE
Rev. H
4-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.7.12
NM4
Perform the following test:
4.7.12.1
Open the cylinder valves.
4.7.12.2
Set the System Power switch to ON.
4.7.12.3
Set the oxygen flow to five liters per minute.
4.7.12.4
Set the other gas flow to five liters per minute.
4.7.12.5
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.7.12.6
As the oxygen flow decreases, the other gas flow should
also decrease proportionally.
4.7.12.7
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.7.13
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.7.14
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.7.15
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-24
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.8
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch (earlier machines)
The oxygen supply pressure alarm switch is located behind the gas
instrumentation panel. Access to the switch requires removal of the flowmeter
housing rear cover. The replacement switch must be tested to ensure that its
operating point is set correctly. Figure 4-8 shows the switch assembly on
earlier machines where the switch is supported by the O2 tubing.
On later machines with flowmeter assemblies having an Oxygen Ratio
Controller (ORC), the oxygen supply pressure alarm switch is part of the alarm
channel assembly. Refer to the procedure titled "Alarm Channel and Oxygen
Supply Pressure Alarm Switch" for specific replacement instructions.
Rev. A
4.8.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.8.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.8.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.8.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.8.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.8.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.8.7
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
4.8.8
Disconnect the two compression fittings at the TEE.
4.8.9
Note the position of the wires on the switch so that the replacement
unit can be connected in the same manner. Disconnect the wires from
the switch and remove the assembly.
4.8.10
Connect the wires to the replacement assembly; connect and tighten
the compression fittings on the O2 lines.
4.8.11
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.8.12
Pull the writing or keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.8.13
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter output line of the O2
regulator and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
4.8.14
Connect a dedicated O2 test gauge to the TEE fitting.
4-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
REAR VIEW, FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
O2 LINES
ALARM
WIRES
INCREASE
SETPOINT
ADJUSTMENT
WHEEL
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE
ALARM SWITCH
OSPAS
Figure 4-8: OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH
4-26
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.8.15
Open the oxygen cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to
ON.
4.8.16
Set the oxygen flow to five liters per minute.
4.8.17
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.8.18
As the pressure drops, the O2 SUPPLY alarm should activate when
the pressure is between 40 and 34 psi as shown on the test gauge.
4.8.19
If the alarm activates when the pressure is below 34 psi, turn the
adjustment wheel counter-clockwise, repeat the test and adjust as
necessary to bring the set point into the correct range.
If the alarm activates when the pressure is above 40 psi, turn the
adjustment wheel clockwise,repeat the test and adjust as necessary
to bring the set point into the correct range.
Rev. A
4.8.20
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.8.21
Disconnect the test gauge and replace the plug in the regulator line
TEE fitting.
4.8.22
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.8.23
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.8.24
Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.8.25
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.9
NM4
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Whistle (Canada)
The oxygen supply pressure alarm whistle is located inside the flowmeter
housing. Access to the whistle assembly requires removal of the flowmeter
housing rear cover. Figure 4-9 shows the arrangement of the whistle assembly
within the flowmeter housing, and indicates the compression fittings that need
to be disconnected in order to remove the assembly.
4.9.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.9.2
Close all cylinder valves and disconnect the pipeline hoses.
4.9.3
Press the O2 FLUSH button to remove pressure from the oxygen
circuit.
4.9.4
Remove the screws holding the flowmeter housing rear cover, and
remove the cover.
4.9.5
Disconnect the three compression fittings at the locations shown in
the illustration, and remove the whistle assembly.
4.9.6
Position the replacement whistle assembly in the flowmeter housing,
connect and tighten the three compression fittings.
4.9.7
Replace the flowmeter housing rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.9.8
Connect the pipeline hoses and perform the following test:
4.9.9
--
Set the System Power switch to ON.
--
Set the oxygen flow rate to 1 l/min.
--
Close the pipeline supply valve and observe the pipeline
pressure gauge.
--
The alarm whistle shall sound for a minimum of 10 seconds
when the pressure drops below the range of 35 to 30 PSI.
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-28
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REAR VIEW OF NARKOMED 4 (CANADA)
FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
COMPRESSION
FITTING
WHISTLE
ASSEMBLY
COMPRESSION
FITTING
COMPRESSION
FITTING
SIDE VIEW OF
LOWER
COMPRESSION
FITTINGS
WHIS
Figure 4-9: OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE ALARM WHISTLE (CANADA)
Rev. H
4-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.10
NM4
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller
The oxygen ratio monitor/controller (ORMC) is located in the vapor box and is
accessible by removing the rear cover panel above the vaporizer mounts.
Figure 4-10 shows the location of the ORMC mounting screws and connections.
Test and adjustment instructions are included in the following procedure.
NOTE: Steps marked with an asterisk (*) do not apply to later model
machines that do not have the O2/N2O ratio lamp on the alarm
channel.
4.10.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.10.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.10.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.10.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.10.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.10.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.10.7
Remove the four screws holding the vapor box rear cover, and remove
the cover.
4.10.8
Remove the two screws holding the ORMC to the bottom of the vapor
box.
4.10.9
Remove the four screws holding the bottom plate of the vapor box,
and remove the plate to gain access to the ORMC connections.
4.10.10 Disconnect the flexible O2 tubing from the left side of the ORMC, and
disconnect the flexible N2O tubing from the right side of the MPL
switch. (Later models do not have the MPL switch.)
*
4.10.11 Cut the tie-wrap clamp on the in-line wiring harness connectors, and
separate the two ORMC connections.
4.10.12 While holding the ORMC, carefully disconnect the compression
fittings on the N2O lines.
4.10.13 Disconnect the remaining flexible N2O tubing from the tee fitting at
the front of the ORMC. (Later models do not have the tee fitting.)
4-30
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NARKOMED 4
REAR VIEW
N2O TUBING
O2 TUBING
N20
MPL SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT
(TURN CLOCKWISE
TO DECREASE
SETPOINT)
N20
A
CAM
MOUNTING
BRACKET
OXYGEN RATIO
MONITOR/CONTROLLER
E
SWITCH MOUNT
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT CAM
(TURN CLOCKWISE
TO CLOSE CONTACTS)
H
SV40311
Figure 4-10: OXYGEN RATIO MONITOR/CONTROLLER
Rev. H
4-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.10.14 Connect the flexible N2O tubing that was removed in the previous
step to the tee fitting at the front of the replacement ORMC, and
secure the connection with a new tie strap clamp. (Later models do
not have the tee fitting.)
4.10.15 Connect the copper N2O lines to the replacement ORMC and tighten
the compression fittings.
*
4.10.16 Join the in-line wiring harness to the replacement ORMC connectors
and install a new tie-wrap cable clamp.
4.10.17 Connect the flexible O2 tubing to the left side of the ORMC, and
connect the flexible N2O tubing to right side of the MPL switch.
Secure each connection with a press-on clamp. (Later models do not
have the MPL switch.)
4.10.18 Open the O2 and N2O cylinder valves.
4.10.19 Set the System Power switch to ON, and perform the following test:
*
*
4.10.19.1
Open the N2O flow control valve three turns. There
should be no nitrous oxide flow.
4.10.19.2
Slowly open the O2 flow control valve. The nitrous oxide
should start to flow when the oxygen flow is between 200
and 300 ml per minute.
4.10.19.3
Connect a calibrated oxygen monitor to the Freshgas
Outlet.
4.10.19.4
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1 liter per minute. The oxygen
concentration should be between 21% and 29% oxygen.
4.10.19.5
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should be lighted.
4.10.19.6
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1.5 liters per minute. The
oxygen concentration should be between 21% and 29%
oxygen.
4.10.19.7
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should be lighted.
4.10.19.8
Adjust the oxygen flow to a point where the nitrous oxide
flowmeter indicates 10 liters per minute.
4-32
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
*
4.10.19.9
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm
panel should be lighted.
4.10.19.10 Close the oxygen flow control valve. The nitrous oxide
flow should decrease proportionally, and the oxygen
concentration should remain between 21% and 29%
oxygen.
4.10.19.11 The nitrous oxide flow should stop when the flow of
oxygen is between 200 and 300 ml per minute.
4.10.19.12 Close the N2O flow control valve and set the System
Power switch to STANDBY.
NOTE:
If the ORMC is not working properly,
perform the adjustment procedure given in
Section 5.
4.10.20 Replace the bottom plate of the vapor box. Be sure it is oriented
correctly with the ORMC mounting holes in the correct position.
4.10.21 Secure the ORMC to the bottom of the vapor box with its two
mounting screws.
4.10.22 Replace the rear cover of the vapor box.
4.10.23 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-33
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.11
NM4
Oxygen Ratio Controller (later machines)
The Oxygen Ratio Controller (ORC) is part of the N2O flowmeter sub-assembly
and is located within the flowmeter housing. The ORC is accessible by
removing the rear flowmeter housing cover. Figure 4-11 shows a typical ORC
location and mounting arrangement, with a detail of the O-rings and filter.
The following procedure applies to both ORC designs: P/N 4111800, and Low
Flow design P/N 4113229.
4.11.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.11.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.11.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.11.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.11.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.11.6
Set the System, Power switch to STANDBY.
4.11.7
Remove the press-on clamp securing the flexible O2 line to the ORC,
and carefully disconnect the tubing from the hose barb.
4.11.8
Remove the three screws holding the ORC to the flowmeter subassembly, and carefully remove the ORC from the flowmeter housing.
4.11.9
For low flow ORC (P/N 4113229) replacement, install the 6 in. length
of flexible tubing with a blue N2O label on the replacement ORC (see
detail view in illustration) Secure each connection with a press-on
hose clamp.
Position the replacement ORC at the back of the N2O flowmeter subassembly; be sure that its O-rings and filter are in place, and install
its three mounting screws.
4.11.10 Connect the flexible O2 line to the ORC and secure it with the presson hose clamp.
4.11.11 Open the O2 and N2O cylinder valves.
4-34
Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REAR VIEW OF FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
SV50504
ADJUSTING
SCREW
LOCKNUT
O2
CONNECTION
ORC
ASSEMBLY
O-RING,
#105
(NEOPRENE)
FILTER
O-RING,
0.066 X 0.042
(BUNA-N)
ORC
ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING
SCREWS (3X)
DETAIL OF LOW FLOW
ORC ASSEMBLY WITH
6 IN. FLEXIBLE TUBING
Figure 4-11: OXYGEN RATIO CONTROLLER
Rev. H
4-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.11.12 Perform the ORC adjustment procedure given in Section 5 of this
manual.
NOTE: There are two adjustment procedures - one for ORC P/N 4111800,
and one for low flow ORC P/N 4113229. Be sure to follow the correct
procedure.
4.11.13 Reinstall the flowmeter housing rear cover.
4.11.14 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-36
Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.12
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Vaporizers
Each vaporizer is held to the machine by two metric sized hex screws. These
screws are accessible at the back of the vaporizer mount, below the interlock
mechanism as shown in Figure 4-12. Before removing a vaporizer from the
machine, it must be completely drained and dried in accordance with the
procedure given below. Be sure to have a suitable packing or storage container
available in which to place the vaporizer.
CAUTION:
The following steps must be performed in the sequence given.
4.12.1
Set the System Power switch to ON.
4.12.2
Set all vaporizer handwheels to their Zero or OFF position.
WARNING:
4.12.3
Remove the filler and drain plugs, and drain the vaporizer into a
suitable container. Dispose of the residual agent in an approved
manner.
4.12.4
Turn the vaporizer handwheel to the maximum concentration setting.
4.12.5
Set the oxygen flow to 10 l/min. for at least 20 minutes.
WARNING:
This procedure must be performed in a well
ventilated area and without personnel present.
4.12.6
Turn the vaporizer handwheel to 0 (zero), and replace the filler and
drain plugs.
4.12.7
Turn the oxygen flow off, and set the System Power switch to
STANDBY.
4.12.8
While holding the vaporizer, remove the mounting screws and
carefully separate the vaporizer from the machine. Note the
arrangement of gaskets so that the replacement vaporizer can be
installed in the same manner.
4.12.9
Place the vaporizer in a suitable container for transport or storage.
WARNING:
Rev. A
Do not inhale anesthetic vapors as this could
result in personal injury.
Do not tilt a vaporizer that contains anesthetic
agent more than 45 degrees. Failure to observe
this precaution will render the handwheel
calibration invalid.
4-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
VAPORIZER MOUNT
LOCKING
NUT
INTERLOCK
PIN
HANDWHEEL
SETSCREW
VAPORIZER
VAPORIZER
MOUNTING
SCREWS (2 EA)
(RECESSED)
SV20325
VAPORIZER
INTERLOCK
MECHANISM
REAR VIEW
LEFT
SETSCREW
VAPORIZER
MOUNTING SCREW
LOCATIONS (2 EA)
RIGHT
SETSCREW
CENTER
SETSCREWS
(RECESSED)
Figure 4-12: VAPORIZER INSTALLATION AND INTERLOCK ADJUSTMENT
4-38
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NOTE:
Should a vaporizer containing anesthetic agent be
accidentally tilted more than 45 degrees, it must be
drained and flushed in accordance with instructions given
in the manual supplied with the vaporizer.
4.12.10 Set the handwheel on the replacement vaporizer to its Zero position.
4.12.11 Install the replacement vaporizer on the machine (be sure the O-rings
are in place) and tighten the mounting screws to a torque of 24 to
26.5 inch pounds.
4.12.12 Perform the following test on the interlock mechanism and make any
necessary adjustments:
4.12.12.1
Turn the center vaporizer handwheel ON. The left and
the right vaporizer handwheels should be locked in their
Zero position. If the left or right vaporizer does not lock,
tighten the corresponding center set screw until the
handwheel locks properly.
4.12.12.2
Turn the center vaporizer OFF and turn the left
vaporizer ON. The center and the right vaporizer
handwheels should be locked in their Zero position. If
the right vaporizer does not lock, loosen the locking nut
on the right set screw and adjust the set screw until the
handwheel locks properly. Tighten the locking nut while
holding the set screw to maintain the correct adjustment.
NOTE:
4.12.12.3
Do not over-tighten the set screws. Each
vaporizer handwheel must turn easily
while the other vaporizers are locked .
Turn the left vaporizer OFF and turn the right vaporizer
ON. The center and the left vaporizer handwheels
should be locked in their Zero position. If the left
vaporizer does not lock, loosen the locking nut on the left
set screw and adjust the set screw until the handwheel
locks properly. Tighten the locking nut while holding the
set screw to maintain the correct adjustment.
4.12.13 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.13
NM4
O2 Flush Valve
The O2 flush valve is located at the front of the machine next to the freshgas
outlet. Access to the flush valve requires removal of the table top. Figure 4-13
shows the mounting and assembly details of the flush valve.
4.13.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.13.2
Disconnect all pipeline hoses.
4.13.3
Close the O2 cylinder valve.
4.13.4
Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.13.5
Remove the screws holding the table top to the machine and lift out
the table top.
4.13.6
Hold the O2 Flush button in and rotate it until one of its set screws
are visible through an access hole in the guard ring, and loosen the
set screw.
4.13.7
Turn the O2 Flush button 180 degrees, hold it in and loosen the other
set screw.
4.13.8
Remove the O2 Flush button and washer from the valve shaft.
4.13.9
Disconnect the two compression fittings at the valve.
NOTE:
Do not lose the flow restrictor located at the right-angle
fitting. This restrictor will be transferred to the
replacement valve assembly.
4.13.10 The O2 Flush valve is retained by the guard ring on the front of the
machine frame. Hold the body of the Clippard valve with an open end
wrench; insert a rod or hex wrench through the holes in the guard
ring (or use a spanner wrench), and un-screw the guard ring from the
front of the frame rail.
4.13.11 Assemble the replacement O2 Flush valve, spacer, internal tooth lock
washer and guard ring through the frame and tighten the assembly,
making sure that the valve is mounted straight.
4.13.12 Connect the compression fittings to the valve. Be sure the flow
restrictor is in place at the right-angle fitting.
4.13.13 Place the washer and the O2 Flush button on the valve shaft.
4-40
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
COMPRESSION
FITTINGS
RESTRICTOR
O2 FLUSH
VALVE
SPACER
ACCESS
HOLES
WASHER
INTERNAL TOOTH
LOCKWASHER
PUSH
BUTTON
GUARD
RING
FRONT VIEW WITH
TABLE TOP REMOVED
SET SCREWS
SV49099
Figure 4-13: O2 FLUSH VALVE
Rev. H
4-41
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.13.14 Hold the O2 Flush button in and turn it until a set screw is visible
through an access hole in the guard ring. Tighten the set screw.
Rotate the button 180 degrees until the other set screw is visible, and
tighten the set screw.
4.13.15 Disconnect the absorber freshgas hose from the freshgas outlet.
Connect a test gauge and B.P. bulb to the freshgas outlet, and
perform the following test:
4.13.15.1
Open the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.13.15.2
Release any pressure that is indicated on the test gauge.
4.13.15.3
Over the next 60 seconds, the test gauge should not show
a pressure increase greater than 2 cm H2O.
4.13.15.4
Increase the pressure to 50 cm H2O.
4.13.15.5
The pressure should not drop more than 10 cm H2O in
the next 30 seconds.
4.13.15.6
Disconnect the test gauge from the freshgas outlet.
4.13.15.7
Open the oxygen cylinder valve and allow the pressure to
stabilize. (The cylinder pressure must be at least 1000 psi
for this test.)
4.13.15.8
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.13.15.9
The pressure should not drop more than 50 psi in two
minutes.
4.13.15.10 Connect a volumeter to the freshgas outlet, and reset the
volumeter to zero.
4.13.15.11 Press the O2 Flush button and observe the flow rate. It
should be between 45 and 65 liters per minute.
4.13.15.12 Disconnect the volumeter from the freshgas outlet.
4.13.16 Connect the absorber freshgas hose to the freshgas outlet.
4.13.17 Replace the table top and secure it with the mounting screws.
4.13.18 Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.13.19 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-42
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.14
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
AV-E Ventilator Controller Assembly
The ventilator controller assembly is located in the left side of the ventilator
box. Access to the controller requires removing the front panel from the
ventilator box. Figure 4-14 shows the mounting screw locations and cable
connections to the ventilator controller.
Rev. A
4.14.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.14.2
Remove the four screws holding the ventilator box front panel.
Remove the panel and carefully separate the ventilator switch in-line
connector.
4.14.3
Remove the two screws holding the ventilator controller assembly to
the floor of the ventilator box.
4.14.4
Pull the controller assembly forward and disconnect the two cables
from J1 and J2 at the back of the assembly, and remove the
controller assembly.
4.14.5
Plug the cables that were previously removed into J1 and J2 on the
back of the replacement controller assembly.
4.14.6
Mount the replacement controller assembly to the floor of the
ventilator box and secure it with the two mounting screws.
4.14.7
Join the ventilator switch in-line connector, and replace the front
panel of the ventilator box.
4.14.8
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
NARKOMED 4 VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
IN-LINE
CONNECTOR
J1
J2
VENTILATOR
SWITCH
VENTILATOR
CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY
VENTILATOR BOX
FRONT PANEL
SCREWS (4)
VENTILATOR BOX
FRONT PANEL
VENTILATOR
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS
Figure 4-14: AV-E VENTILATOR CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
4-44
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.15
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
AV-E Ventilator Solenoid Valve
The ventilator solenoid valve is located in the ventilator box and is mounted
on the inner back wall of the box. Replacement of the solenoid valve requires
lifting the monitor box to gain access to its mounting and connections. Figure
4-15 shows the mounting location, electrical connections and tubing
arrangement of the solenoid valve.
4.15.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.15.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient interface panel on the
left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display and Datagrip cables
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
4.15.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.15.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
4.15.5
Remove the four screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4.15.6
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J32 on the backplane.
4.15.7
Raise the rear of the monitor box chassis approximately two inches,
and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Rev. H
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.15.8
Remove the two screws holding the safety cover over the AC power
filter, and remove the cover.
4.15.9
Remove the two screws holding the solenoid valve to the inner wall
of the ventilator box.
4-45
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
COVER SCREWS
VENTILATOR SOLENOID VALVE
MOUNTING SCREWS (2)
AC POWER
FILTER COVER
XXX
XXX.
XXX
INPUT
PORT
OUTPUT
PORT
SV20328
VENTILATOR
SOLENOID VALVE
Figure 4-15: AV-E VENTILATOR SOLENOID VALVE
4-46
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.15.10 Remove the prop from the rear of the monitor box, and return the box
to its normal position.
4.15.11 Raise the front of the monitor box approximately four inches, and
prop the box open.
4.15.12 Pull the solenoid valve forward to gain access to its connections, and
remove the electrical connections.
4.15.13 Remove the three flexible tubing connections and remove the solenoid
valve. Mark each tube so that the replacement solenoid can be
connected in the same manner.
4.15.14 Connect the flexible tubing to the replacement solenoid valve.
4.15.15 Connect the two wires to the solenoid, and place the solenoid near its
mounting position.
4.15.16 Remove the prop from the front of the monitor box and lower the box
to its original position.
4.15.17 Raise the rear of the monitor box chassis approximately two inches,
and prop the box open.
4.15.18 Mount the solenoid valve to the ventilator box using the original
hardware.
4.15.19 Replace the safety cover over the AC power filter and secure it with
the two screws.
4.15.20 Remove the prop from the rear of the monitor box, and return the box
to its normal position.
4.15.21 Replace the four screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4.15.22 Connect the ribbon cable that was previously removed from J32 on
the backplane.
4.15.23 Place the cover over the monitor box and secure it with its six screws.
4.15.24 Connect the remote display cable, BP cuff and BP gauge lines, and
pulse oximeter sensor cable to the patient interface panel. Install the
disposable reservoir in its holder.
4.15.25 Restore power to the machine and perform the PMS Procedure given
in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-47
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.16
NM4
AV-2 and AV2+ Ventilator Controller Assembly
The Ventilator Controller assembly is attached to the left front panel of the
ventilator box and includes electrical and pneumatic components. Figures 4-16
and 4-16A show the mounting screw locations and connections to the ventilator
controller. Flexible tubing allows the assembly to be pulled from the front of
the ventilator box without raising the monitor box.
4.16.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.16.2
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.
CAUTION:
The controller circuit board contains static sensitive devices. Use
ESD protection when handling the controller assembly.
4.16.3
Remove the two screws securing the left end of the ventilator
controller panel.
4.16.4
Pull the left side of the panel outward, slide it to the left until the
locking tab on the right side of the panel is clear of its receptacle,
then pull the assembly out far enough to gain access to its
connections.
4.16.5
Disconnect the alarm channel wiring harness from J2 on the
controller circuit board. On AV2+ controllers, also disconnect the
Man/Auto selector interface cable from J7 on the circuit board.
4.16.6
Disconnect the following large and small diameter pneumatic tubing
(the letters are keyed to the illustration):
A:
B:
C:
D:
Small dia. tube from solenoid to rear vent fitting on bellows box
Large dia. tube from supply valve to venturi
Small dia. tube to auto-ranging valve
Large dia. tube from main switch (O2 supply)
4.16.7
Remove the controller assembly from the machine.
4.16.8
Position the replacement controller assembly in the ventilator box
and reconnect the four pneumatic lines.
4.16.9
Reconnect the alarm channel wire harness to J2 on the controller
circuit board. On AV2+ controllers, also reconnect the Man/Auto
selector interface cable to J7 on the circuit board.
4-48
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
TO VENTURI
TO AUTORANGING VALVE
O2 SUPPLY
TO VENT
TOP VIEW OF
CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY
IN VENTILATOR
BOX
RETAINING
SCREWS (2X)
SUPPLY VALVE
D
B
C
INSPIRATORY
FLOW
REGULATOR
SOLENOID
A
CONTROLLER
ASSEMBLY
ON-OFF
SWITCH
J2
(ALARM CHANNEL
CABLE)
Figure 4-16: AV-2 VENTILATOR CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
Rev. H
4-49
GAUGE
SV50509
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
SELECTOR CABLE
FROM INTERFACE
PANEL
SV49050
B
D
C
A
J2 (ALARM CHANNEL
WIRE HARNESS)
AV2+ CONTROLLER &
BEZEL ASSEMBLY
J7
(SELECTOR CABLE)
Figure 4-16A: AV-2+ VENTILATOR CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
4-49A
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
This page intentionally left blank.
Rev. H
4-49B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.16.10 Slide the controller into the ventilator box, carefully fit the locking
tab into its receptacle at the right side of the panel, and slide the
assembly to the right until it is properly seated.
4.16.11 Reinstall the two retaining screws at the left side of the panel.
4.16.12 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-50
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.17
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Convenience Outlet AC Power Filter
The convenience outlet AC power filter is located in the back of the ventilator
box near the AC convenience outlets. Access to the power filter requires lifting
the monitor box. Figure 4-17 shows the location of the filter, its connections
and its mounting arrangement.
4.17.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.17.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient interface panel on the
left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display and Datagrip cables
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
4.17.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.17.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
4.17.5
Remove the four screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4.17.6
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J32 on the backplane.
4.17.7
Raise the rear of the monitor box chassis approximately two inches,
and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Rev. A
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.17.8
Remove the two screws holding the safety cover over the AC power
filter, and remove the cover.
4.17.9
Disconnect the AC wiring from each side of the filter. Note the
position of the wires so they can be re-installed in the same manner.
4-51
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
NARKOMED 4 VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
FILTER
MOUNTING
SPACERS (2X)
CONVENIENCE OUTLET AC
POWER FILTER
BLACK
WHITE
BROWN
GREEN/YELLOW
BLUE
COVER
SCREWS
AC POWER
FILTER COVER
Figure 4-17: CONVENIENCE OUTLET AC POWER FILTER
4-52
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.17.10 Unscrew the two hex post nuts holding the filter to the ventilator box,
and remove the filter.
4.17.11 Install the replacement filter and secure it with the two hex post
nuts.
4.17.12 Connect the AC wiring to the replacement filter. Be sure to observe
the wire color code as illustrated.
4.17.13 Place the safety cover over the filter and secure it with the two
screws.
4.17.14 Remove the prop from the rear of the monitor box, and return the box
to its normal position.
4.17.15 Replace the four screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4.17.16 Connect the ribbon cable that was previously removed from J32 on
the backplane.
4.17.17 Place the cover over the monitor box and secure it with its six screws.
4.17.18 Connect the remote display cable, BP cuff and BP gauge lines, and
pulse oximeter sensor cable to the patient interface panel. Install the
disposable reservoir in its holder.
4.17.19 Restore power to the machine and perform the PMS Procedure given
in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-53
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.18
NM4
AV-E Inspiratory Flow Regulator
The inspiratory flow regulator is located in the ventilator box. Access to the
regulator requires removal of the ventilator box front panel, and lifting the
monitor box. Figure 4-18 shows the regulator mounting arrangement and its
connections.
4.18.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.18.2
Remove the four screws holding the ventilator box front panel.
Remove the panel and carefully separate the ventilator switch in-line
connector.
4.18.3
Remove the four screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4.18.4
Raise the front of the monitor box chassis approximately four inches,
and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.18.5
Disconnect the two compression fittings at the regulator.
4.18.6
Remove the tie strap securing the small diameter flex tubing to the
hose barb on the flow regulator assembly, and disconnect the tubing.
4.18.7
Un-screw the retaining ring holding the regulator to its mounting
bracket, and remove the regulator.
4.18.8
Install the replacement regulator in the mounting bracket and
tighten the mounting ring.
4.18.9
Connect the two compression fittings to the regulator.
4.18.10 Reattach the small diameter flex tubing previously removed from the
regulator assembly and secure the connection with a tie strap.
4.18.11 Remove the prop from the front of the monitor box, and return the
box to its normal position.
4.18.12 Replace the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
4.18.13 Join the ventilator switch in-line connector, and replace the front
panel of the ventilator box.
4.18.14 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-54
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
VENTILATOR BOX TOP VIEW
HOSE BARB
FITTING
COMPRESSION
FITTING
COMPRESSION
FITTING
INSPIRATORY
FLOW
REGULATOR
REGULATOR
MOUNTING NUT
VENTILATOR BOX
FRONT PANEL
SCREWS (4)
SV20341
Figure 4-18: INSPIRATORY FLOW REGULATOR
Rev. H
4-55
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.19
NM4
Ventilator Bellows Valve and Guide Assembly (AV-E Ventilator)
The ventilator bellows valve and guide assembly is located in the bellows box
on the left side of the machine. Access to the valve and guide assembly
requires that the front panel, the bellows cannister, and the upper bellows
plate be removed from the bellows box. The monitor box will also need to be
raised for access to connections inside the ventilator box. Figure 4-19 shows the
valve and guide assembly arrangement, and the tubing connections for
assemblies with either a Humphrey or a Clippard valve.
4.19.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, remove AC power from
the machine, and disable all circuit breakers.
4.19.2
Close all cylinder valves, and disconnect the pipeline hoses from the
machine.
4.19.3
Press the O2 FLUSH button to relieve pressure from the system.
4.19.4
Adjust the TIDAL VOLUME knob to fully extend the volume
indicator to its minimum setting.
4.19.5
Disconnect the bellows hose and the scavenger hose from the bellows
assembly. Loosen the wingnuts and remove the bellows assembly and
the canister.
4.19.6
Remove the canister from the bellows box by pulling it downward.
4.19.7
Remove the screws holding the front panel and tidal volume
adjustment knob, and remove the panel. The knob assembly remains
with the panel. On machines with a two-piece panel, remove the
angle plate above the knob panel.
4.19.8
Remove the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator box.
WARNING:
4.19.9
Two people are required to perform the remaining
portion of the procedure.
Raise the front of the monitor box chassis approximately four inches,
and prop the box open.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before raising the monitor box. Failure to
observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
4.19.10 Remove the bellows guide by unscrewing its stem from the bellows
adjustment rod.
4-56
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
VENTILATOR BOX
INSIDE TOP VIEW
VENTILATOR
SOLENOID
"OUT" PORT
COMPRESSION
FITTING
COPPER TUBE
VENTILATOR BOX
AND BELLOWS BOX
FRONT VIEW
FRONT PANEL
MOUNTING SCREWS (4X)
BELLOWS
GUIDE
FRONT PANEL AND TIDAL
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT KNOB
BELLOWS
ASSEMBLY
VOLUME INDICATOR
SET SCREWS (2X)
VOLUME INDICATOR
SV20333
Figure 4-19: TIDAL VOLUME ADJ. & VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY
Rev. H
4-57
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
ASSEMBLY WITH
CLIPPARD VALVE
NM4
ASSEMBLY WITH
HUMPHREY VALVE
BELLOWS BOX
INSIDE TOP VIEW
INTAKE
HOSE
EXHAUST
HOSE
HOSE
CLAMP (2X)
BELLOWS TOP
PLATE MOUNTING
SCREWS (3X)
COPPER TUBE
BELLOWS
ADJUSTING
ROD TUBE
BELLOWS VALVE
AND GUIDE
ASSEMBLY
BELLOWS BOX FRONT VIEW
WITH PANEL REMOVED
TO VENTILATOR
SOLENOID
TO VENTILATOR
SOLENOID
BELLOWS
TOP PLATE
VALVE AND GUIDE
ASSEMBLY MOUNTING
SCREWS (2X)
SV45016
Figure 4-19: TIDAL VOLUME ADJ. & VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY (continued)
4-58
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.19.11 Remove the volume indicator from the bellows adjustment rod by
loosening its two set screws. Note the position of the indicator on the
rod so that it can be reassembled in the same manner.
4.19.12 Remove the screws securing the muffler access panel at the rear of
the bellows box, and remove the panel.
4.19.13 Remove the muffler/silencer (white tube) from the intake flange at
the interface wall by turning the muffler counter-clockwise.
4.19.14 Disconnect the press-on clamp and small diameter tubing from the
left side hose barb on the ventilator solenoid valve (port labeled
"out").
4.19.15 Disconnect the compression fitting at the outboard end of the copper
tube from the valve case assembly.
4.19.16 Unscrew the bellows adjustment rod tube from the top of the
assembly. Do not misplace the spacer ring.
4.19.17 Pull the bellows adjustment rod up.
4.19.18 Remove the two screws securing the valve case and guide assembly
to the bellows top plate.
NOTE:
Be careful not to misplace the two O-rings and the spacer
ring under the valve case assembly.
4.19.19 Pull both large diameter tubes forward until they clear the muffler
housing interface wall.
4.19.20 Rotate the valve case and guide assembly as needed in order to
withdraw it from the bellows box.
CAUTION: Do not damage any of the fittings or small hose barbs on
the assembly during its removal.
4.19.21 Transfer the large diameter tubing and hose clamps to the intake and
exhaust ports on the replacement valve case and guide assembly.
4.19.22 Carefully position the replacement valve case and guide assembly in
the bellows box, with the copper tube extending up into the ventilator
box, and with the intake and exhaust hoses correctly positioned in the
muffler housing interface wall.
4.19.23 Secure the valve case assembly to the bellows top plate with the two
screws that were previously removed. Be sure that the spacer ring
and the two O-rings in the bellows top plate are properly seated.
Rev. A
4-59
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.19.24 Connect the copper tube to the tee fitting in the ventilator box.
4.19.25 Install the spacer ring and bellows adjustment rod tube at the top of
the valve case and guide assembly.
4.19.26 Attach the small diameter tubing from the miniature actuator to the
left side hose barb on the ventilator solenoid valve (port labeled
"out"), and secure the connection with a press-on clamp.
NOTE:
After the connection is made, ensure that there are no
kinks or sharp bends in the tubing.
4.19.27 Reattach the muffler/silencer to the intake flange at the muffler
housing interface, and reattach the rear access panel using the screws
that were previously removed.
4.19.28 Install the volume indicator on the bellows adjustment rod in the
same position as before disassembly, and tighten its two setscrews.
4.19.29 Install the bellows guide by screwing its stem into the bellows
adjustment rod. Secure it with #222 (purple) Loctite.
4.19.30 Remove the prop from the monitor box and carefully lower it into
position. Replace the screws holding the monitor box to the ventilator
box.
4.19.31 Place the bellows box front panel into position, ensure that the slot
in the knob assembly is correctly aligned with the drive pin on the
bellows adjustment shaft, and install the four screws holding the
front panel to the machine.
4.19.32 Replace the bellows assembly and tighten the wingnuts holding it in
place. Connect any hoses that were previously removed from the
bellows assembly.
4.19.33 Reconnect the pipeline hoses and AC power cord, and reset all circuit
breakers.
4.19.34 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-60
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.20
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Ventilator Bellows Valve and Guide Assembly with Pressure Limit Control
(AV-2 Ventilator)
The Ventilator Bellows Valve and Guide Assembly, and the Pressure Limit
Control are located in the bellows box on the left side of the machine. Access
to the components requires removal of the bellows box front panel, and removal
of the upper bellows support plate from the bellows box. Figure 4-20 shows the
pneumatic connections and the mounting arrangement of the components.
4.20.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.20.2
Close all cylinder valves, and disconnect the pipeline hoses from the
machine.
4.20.3
Press the O2 Flush button to relieve pressure from the system.
4.20.4
Adjust the TIDAL VOLUME control to raise the volume indicator to
its maximum setting.
4.20.5
Disconnect the breathing hose and the scavenger hose from the
bellows assembly. Loosen the wing nuts and remove the bellows
assembly.
4.20.6
Remove the canister from the bellows box by pulling it downward.
4.20.7
Unscrew the bellows guide from the adjustment rod.
4.20.8
Loosen the set screws on the tidal volume indicator (note the position
of the indicator on the adjustment rod so that it can be reassembled
in the same position) and remove the indicator.
4.20.9
Remove the screws holding the bellows box front panel and knob
assemblies, and remove the panel.
4.20.10 Loosen the rear support plate screw, and remove the two front
support plate screws.
4.20.11 Pull the support plate forward, then lower it to a point where the
tubing connections are accessible.
4.20.12 Disconnect the large diameter tubing from the venturi, and the small
diameter tubing from the auto-ranging valve.
4.20.13 Carefully remove the assembly from the machine. Mounting screws
for the adjustable pressure limit control and the valve case assembly
are shown in the illustration.
Rev. A
4-61
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
10
1:2 .5
FREQUENCY
/min
I:E RATIO
NM4
SV50514
BELLOWS BOX
FRONT VIEW
FRONT PANEL
MOUNTING SCREWS (4X)
BELLOWS
GUIDE
FRONT PANEL AND
KNOB ASSEMBLY
CANISTER
VOLUME INDICATOR
SET SCREWS (2X)
VOLUME INDICATOR
BELLOWS
ASSEMBLY
ADJUSTMENT ROD
Figure 4-20: TIDAL VOLUME ADJ. & VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY
4-62
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
SV50414
BELLOWS BOX
FRONT VIEW WITH
FRONT PANEL REMOVED
FLEX TUBING
FROM CONTROLLER
UPPER BELLOWS
SUPPORT PLATE
SUPPORT PLATE
SCREWS (3X)
BOTTOM VIEW
OF BELLOWS BOX
PRESSURE LIMIT
CONTROL
MOUNTING SCREWS (4X)
VALVE CASE
ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS
Figure 4-20: TIDAL VOLUME ADJ. & VALVE CASE ASSEMBLY (continued)
Rev. A
4-63
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
NOTE: If components are removed from the support plate, be sure that any
spacers and O-rings are correctly positioned during reinstallation.
4.20.14 Following component replacement, position the support plate in the
bellows box and reconnect the large and small diameter tubing that
was previously removed.
4.20.15 Slide the support plate up and to the rear until it is seated properly
in the bellows box.
4.20.16 Reinstall the two front support plate screws, and tighten the rear
support plate screw.
4.20.17 Install the volume indicator on the bellows adjustment rod in the
same position as before disassembly, and tighten its two setscrews.
4.20.18 Install the bellows guide by screwing its stem into the bellows
adjustment rod.
4.20.19 Place the bellows box front panel into position, ensure that the slots
in the knob assemblies are correctly aligned with their drive pins on
the bellows adjustment and pressure limit control shafts, and
reinstall the screws holding the front panel to the machine.
4.20.20 Replace the bellows canister; ensure that its markings are facing
forward.
4.20.21 Replace the bellows assembly and tighten the wing nuts holding it in
place.
4.20.22 Reconnect any hoses that were previously removed from the bellows
assembly.
4.20.23 Reconnect the pipeline hoses and AC power cord.
4.20.24 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-64
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.21
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Alarm Channel (without oxygen supply pressure alarm switch)
Replacement of the alarm channel requires removal of the upper flowmeter
front cover plate. (On later models the vapor box cover plate is extended to also
cover the flowmeter shield and alarm channel.) The alarm channel assembly
is held in place by two screws from the back. Figure 4-21 shows a rear view of
the assembly and its connections.
4.21.1
Disconnect the pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.
4.21.2
Press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.21.3
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.21.4
Remove the screws holding the rear cover, and remove the cover.
4.21.5
Remove the screws holding the table top, and lift out the table top.
CAUTION: The circuit board contains static sensitive devices. Use
ESD protection when handling this assembly.
4.21.6
Disconnect the cables from J1, J2, J3 and J4 on the alarm circuit
board.
WARNING:
4.21.7
Ensure that AC power is removed from the
machine before disconnecting the cables. Failure
to observe this precaution may cause injury by
electric shock.
Disconnect the two compression fittings at the system power switch
valve.
4.21.8A Early models: Remove the two screws (from the back) holding the
angled cover plate at the top of the channel. Hold the cover plate as
the screws are removed from the back.
4.18.8B Later models (without the O2/N2O ratio alarm lamp): Remove the six
screws holding the flowmeter shield and vapor box cover, and remove
the panel.
4.21.9
Rev. A
Feed the flowmeter lights wire harness through the hole at the top of
the alarm channel.
4-65
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REAR VIEW
FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
NM4
J2
J1
J3
J4
COMPRESSION
FITTINGS
ALARM
P.C. BOARD
P.C. BOARD
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4)
SYSTEM
POWER
SWITCH
FLEXIBLE O 2
CONNECTION
ALARM CHANNEL
BOTTOM MOUNTING
SCREW
Figure 4-21: ALARM PANEL AND SYSTEM POWER SWITCH
4-66
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.21.10 Remove the alarm channel mounting screws. If the machine does not
have an auxillary O2 flow meter, skip the next two steps.
4.21.11 If the machine is equipped with an auxillary O2 flow meter,pull the
alarm channel forward far enough to gain access to the system power
switch valve, cut the tie-wrap clamp on the flexible tube at the valve,
and remove the tube from the valve.
4.21.12 Connect the flexible tube to the system power switch valve on the
replacement alarm channel and install a new tie-wrap clamp.
4.21.13 Set the replacement alarm channel in position and connect the two
compression fittings to the system power switch valve. Do not tighten
the fittings yet.
4.21.14 Reinstall the alarm channel mounting screws.
4.21.15 Feed the flowmeter lights wire harness connector through the hole at
the top of the alarm channel.
4.21.16 Reinstall the cover plate at the top of the channel and secure it with
the hardware that was previously removed.
4.21.17 Tighten the two compression fittings at the system power switch
valve and perform the following leak test:
4.21.17.1
Open the oxygen cylinder valve and allow the pressure to
stabilize.
4.21.17.2
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.21.17.3
The pressure should not drop more than 50 psi in two
minutes. (The cylinder pressure must be at least 1000
psi for this test.)
4.21.18 Connect the cables that were previously removed from J1, J2, J3 and
J4 on the alarm circuit board.
4.21.19 Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.21.20 Replace the table top and its mounting screws.
4.21.21 Connect the pipeline hoses and restore AC power to the machine.
4.21.22 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-67
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.22
NM4
Alarm Channel and Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch
The alarm channel assembly includes the oxygen supply pressure alarm
switch, the alarm circuit board, and the system power switch. Whenever the
alarm channel is replaced, the oxygen supply pressure alarm switch must be
tested to ensure that its operating point is set correctly. Removal of the alarm
channel requires removal of the upper flowmeter and vapor box cover plate,
and removal of the flowmeter housing rear cover. The alarm channel assembly
is held in place by two screws from the back. Figure 4-22 shows a rear view of
the assembly and its connections.
4.22.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to ON.
4.22.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
4.22.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
4.22.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
4.22.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve and the O2 flow control valve. Press the
O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
4.22.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.22.7
Disable the circuit breakers on the power supply by pulling out each
button with a knife or sharp object.
4.22.8
Remove the six screws holding the flowmeter shield and vapor box
front coverpanel, and pull the panel forward approximately ½ inch.
4.22.9
Remove the screws holding the flowmeter housing rear cover, and
remove the cover.
4.22.10 Remove the screws holding the table top, and lift out the table top.
4.22.11 Disconnect the cables from J1, J2, J3 and J4 on the alarm circuit
board.
4.22.12 Disconnect the compression fitting on the O2 line nearest to the
oxygen supply pressure alarm switch.
4.22.13 Disconnect the remaining two O2 lines at the top and bottom of the
tee fitting.
4.22.14 If the machine is equipped with an auxiliary O2 flowmeter, cut the tie
strap on its flexible line and carefully remove the flex line from the
hose barb.
4-68
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REAR VIEW
SIDE VIEW
UPPER ALARM
CHANNEL
MOUNTING SCREW
J2
J1
J3
ALARM CIRCUIT
BOARD
AUXILARY O2
FLOWMETER
CONNECTION
J4
O2 CONNECTIONS
A
ADJUSTMENT WHEEL
INCREASE SETPOINT
DECREASE SETPOINT
OXYGEN
SUPPLY
PRESSURE
ALARM SWITCH
COM.
LOWER ALARM
CHANNEL MOUNTING
SCREW
N.C.
SV50508
Figure 4-22: ALARM CHANNEL AND OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH
Rev. A
4-69
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.22.15 From the back of the flowmeter housing, remove the upper and lower
alarm channel mounting screws.
4.22.16 At the front of the machine, pull the alarm channel assembly
forward, and feed the flowmeter lights wire harness through the hole
at the top of the alarm channel.
4.22.17 Disconnect the orange and orange/white wires from the oxygen supply
pressure alarm switch.
4.22.18 The following steps apply to replacement of the oxygen supply
pressure alarm switch. If the entire alarm channel assembly is being
replaced, skip the next two steps.
4.22.19 Remove the alarm switch from the assembly at point A as shown in
the illustration.
4.22.20 Install the replacement alarm switch with sealing tape on the
threads, and ensure that the switch is oriented on the assembly as
shown in the illustration.
4.22.21 Connect the orange and orange/white wires to the replacement switch
in the same manner as the original.
4.22.22 Feed the flowmeter lights wire harness through the hole at the top of
the alarm channel, and set the alarm channel assembly into place.
4.22.23 Install the upper and lower alarm channel mounting screws.
4.22.24 If applicable, reconnect the flex line from the auxiliary O2 flowmeter
and install a new tie strap at the hose barb.
4.22.25 Reconnect the the O2 lines, and tighten the three compression
fittings.
4.22.26 Reconnect the cables to J1, J2, J3 and J4 on the alarm circuit board.
4.22.27 Reinstall the front flowmeter and vapor box cover with the six screws
that were previously removed.
4.22.28 Pull the writing or keyboard tray out to its fully extended position.
4.22.29 Locate the tee fitting in the ¼ in. diameter output line of the O2
regulator and remove the plug from the tee fitting.
4.22.30 Connect a dedicated O2 test gauge to the tee fitting.
4.22.31 Connect AC power to the machine and enable the circuit breakers by
pressing their buttons in.
4-70
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.22.32 Open an oxygen cylinder valve and turn the System Power switch to
ON.
4.22.33 Set the oxygen flow to five liters per minute.
4.22.34 Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
4.22.35 As the pressure drops, the O2 SUPPLY alarm should activate when
the pressure is between 40 and 34 psi as shown on the test gauge.
4.22.36 If the alarm activates when the pressure is below 34 psi or above
above 40 psi, turn the adjustment wheel (see illustration), repeat the
test and adjust as necessary to bring the set point into the correct
range.
4.22.37 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.22.38 Disconnect the test gauge and replace the plug in the regulator line
tee fitting.
4.22.39 Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
4.22.40 Replace the flowmeter housing rear cover and its retaining screws.
4.22.41 Connect the pipeline hoses.
4.22.42 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-71
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.23
NM4
Caster
Each caster is retained by a set screw in the side of the lower frame rail as
shown in Figure 4-23. Caster replacement requires that the machine be tilted
to provide enough clearance for the caster stem to be withdrawn from the
bottom of the frame rail.
WARNING:
Do not tilt the machine more than 10 degrees or raise the
casters more than 3½ inches from the floor. Failure to observe
this precaution may result in a tip-over, causing personal injury.
Vaporizers containing anesthetic agent may also be damaged.
4.23.1
Obtain a brace capable of supporting one side of the machine with its
casters two to three inches from the floor.
4.23.2
Remove all unsecured equipment and accessories from the machine.
4.23.3
Lock the front casters.
4.23.4
Using at least two people, tilt the machine until the casters on one
side are raised two to three inches from the floor, and position the
support brace under the frame rail between the front and back
casters.
4.23.5
Remove the plastic cap in the side of the frame rail to provide access
to the caster stem set screw.
4.23.6
Loosen the set screw and remove the caster.
4.23.7
Insert the replacement caster into the frame and hold it in its seated
position.
4.23.8
Tighten the caster stem set screw and replace the plastic cap in the
frame rail.
4.23.9
Using at least two people, tilt the machine, remove the support brace
and carefully lower the machine to the floor.
4.23.10 Check for proper operation of the caster and ensure that the front
casters lock properly.
4.23.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6, including a vaporizer
calibration verification.
4.23.12 Replace any unsecured equipment and accessories that were
previously removed.
4-72
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
2 TO 3
INCHES
SETSCREW
PLASTIC
CAP
Figure 4-23: CASTER REPLACEMENT
Rev. A
4-73
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.24
NM4
Battery
The AC backup batteries are located in a compartment below the bottom
cabinet drawer. Access to the batteries requires removal of the battery
compartment cover. Figure 4-24 shows the battery mounting arrangement and
their connections.
4.24.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.24.2
Remove the bottom drawer from the cabinet by pulling it out to its
fully extended position and lifting it from the tracks.
4.24.3
Remove the four screws holding the battery compartment cover, and
remove the cover.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the machine before
opening the battery compartment cover. Failure to observe this
precaution may cause injury by electric shock.
4.24.4
Disconnect the wires from the battery terminals. Note the battery
wire arrangement and wire colors so that the wiring can be reconnected in the same manner.
4.24.5
Remove the screw holding the battery retainer bar, and remove the
retainer bar.
4.24.6
Lift the batteries from the compartment.
4.24.7
Install the replacement batteries in the compartment, making sure
that the battery terminals are oriented correctly as shown in the
illustration.
4.24.8
Install the battery retainer bar by placing its tab through the slot in
the right side of the compartment, and replacing the retainer screw
at the left side of the bar.
4.24.9
Connect the wiring to the battery terminals.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the wiring is connected to the battery terminals in
the correct order and polarity.
4.24.10 Replace the battery compartment cover.
4.24.11 Replace the bottom drawer.
4.24.12 Restore AC power to the machine and perform the PMS Procedure
given in Section 6.
4-74
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
narkomed
POWER TRANSFORMER
AND BATTERY
COMPARTMENT
RETAINER
BAR SCREW
COVER
SCREW
LOCATIONS(4X)
BATTERY(4X)
BATTERY
RETAINER
BAR
RED
YELLOW
YELLOW
BLACK
BLACK
RED
Figure 4-24: BATTERIES
Rev. A
4-75
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.25
NM4
Power Supply Circuit Board
The power supply circuit board assembly is located in a compartment at the
back of the machine. Access to the circuit board requires removal of the
compartment cover. Figure 4-25 shows the location of the board and its mounting arrangement.
4.25.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.25.2
Close the valves on any cylinders that are mounted on the back of the
machine. Remove the cylinders and store them in a safe place.
4.25.3
Remove the ten screws holding the cover over the power supply
circuit board compartment.
4.25.4
Disconnect cables from J1 through J6 on the circuit board.
4.25.5
Loosen the three captive mounting screws holding the circuit board
assembly to the compartment, and remove the assembly.
4.25.6
Position the replacement circuit board assembly over the mounting
holes and fasten the mounting screws.
4.25.7
Connect the cables to J1 through J6.
4.25.8
Restore power to the machine and run the power supply diagnostic
test given in Section 2 to verify that the voltages are within allowable
tolerances.
4.25.9
Replace the cover over the power supply circuit board compartment.
4.25.10 Replace the cylinder(s) that were previously removed from the back
of the machine.
4.25.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-76
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
BOARD COMPARTMENT COVER
NARKOMED 4
REAR VIEW
COVER SCREWS (10X)
J3
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT BOARD
ASSEMBLY
J1 J2
J4
J5
F1
F3
F2
F6
F5
F7
CIRCUIT BOARD
ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS (3X)
F8
J7
J8
J6
SV49021
Figure 4-25: POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT BOARD
Rev. A
F4
4-77
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.26
NM4
Processor Boards
The processor boards are contained in a card cage that is part of a backplane
assembly located behind the display screens in the monitor box. The monitor
box cover must be removed to gain access to the backplane assembly. Figure
4-26 shows the arrangement of the processor boards in the backplane. The
upper board is the primary processor and the lower board is the backup
processor.
4.26.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.26.2
Remove all connections from the patient interface panel on the left
side of the monitor box.
4.26.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.26.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
CAUTION:
The processor boards contain static sensitive devices. Use ESD
protection when handling these boards.
4.26.5
Open the board extractors and carefully withdraw the board assembly
from the card cage.
4.26.6
Slide the replacement processor board assembly into the card cage
and close the board extractors to ensure that the board is seated
properly in the backplane connectors.
NOTE: Ensure that the replacement processor board is electrically
compatible with the existing front bezel assembly. Refer to the part
number combinations listed in Section 8.
NOTE: Both processor boards must have the same part number and revision
level for the machine to work properly.
4.26.7
Restore power to the machine and run the diagnostic test given in
Section 2 to verify that the replacement board is working properly.
4.26.8
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.26.9
Replace the monitor box cover and restore all connections to the
patient interface panel. Replace the disposable reservoir.
4.26.10 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-78
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4 TOP VIEW OF MONITOR BOX
WITH COVER REMOVED
E
C
C
BACKPLANE
CIRCUIT BOARD
PRIMARY
PROCESSOR
BOARD
BACKUP
PROCESSOR
BOARD
(REMOVED)
CARD CAGE
BOARD
EXTRACTORS
SV49022
Figure 4-26: PROCESSOR BOARDS
Rev. A
4-79
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.27
NM4
Serial Interface Assembly
The serial interface assembly containing the external communication ports is
located on the back of the machine and is mounted on the underside of the
monitor box. Figure 4-27 shows the circuit board connections and the mounting
of the board in its housing.
4.27.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.27.2
Disconnect any external cables from the A, B, PRINTER, C and D
ports.
4.27.3
Loosen the four captive screws holding the serial interface housing to
the underside of the monitor box.
CAUTION: The serial interface circuit board contains static sensitive
devices. Use ESD protection when handling this card.
4.27.4
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J6 on the circuit board.
4.27.5
Remove the ground wire at terminal E1 on the circuit board.
4.27.6
Remove the two screwlock connector nuts at each of the five interface
connectors.
4.27.7
Remove the three screws holding the circuit board in its housing.
4.27.8
Install the replacement circuit board in the housing, and replace the
two screwlock connector nuts at each of the five interface connectors.
Connect the ground wire to terminal E1 and the ribbon cable to J6 on
the circuit board.
4.27.9
Mount the serial interface assembly to the underside of the monitor
box.
4.27.10 Connect any external cables that were previously removed from the
serial interface ports.
4.27.11 Restore power to the machine and run the diagnostics test given in
Section 2 to verify that the replacement circuit board is working
properly.
4.27.12 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-80
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NARKOMED 4
REAR VIEW
RIBBON
CABLE
MONITOR BOX
BOTTOM PLATE
GROUND
WIRE
J6
E1
SERIAL
INTERFACE CIRCUIT
BOARD ASSEMBLY
SERIAL INTERFACE
ASSEMBLY MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
ACCESSIBLE FROM UNDERSIDE
SCREWLOCK
CONNECTOR NUTS (10X)
Figure 4-27: SERIAL INTERFACE ASSEMBLY
Rev. A
4-81
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.28
NM4
Backplane Circuit Board Assembly
The backplane circuit board is mounted on the front wall of the card cage
assembly in the monitor box. Access to the circuit board requires removal of
the processor boards, disconnecting all of the cables that are joined to the
backplane, and removing the backplane support from the card cage. Refer to
Figure 4-28 for general arrangement and mounting screw locations. The
following procedure outlines the removal and replacement of the circuit board
assembly.
4.28.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.28.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient interface panel on the
left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display and Datagrip cables
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
4.28.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.28.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
CAUTION:
The backplane and processor circuit boards contain static
sensitive devices. Use ESD protection when handling these
boards.
4.28.5
Remove the processor boards from the backplane assembly.
4.28.6
Disconnect all of the cables that are joined to the backplane circuit
board.
4.28.7
Loosen the captive mounting screws securing the card cage to the
monitor chassis, and move the card cage assembly back far enough
to gain access to the backplane support mounting screws.
4.28.8
Remove the four screws and washers securing the backplane support
to the card cage.
4.28.9
Remove the 15 screws (three across the top and two at each of the six
processor board connectors) securing the backplane PCB to the
backplane support.
4-82
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4 TOP VIEW OF MONITOR BOX
WITH COVER REMOVED
E
C
C
CIRCUIT BOARD
MOUNTING
SCREWS (15X)
BACKPLANE
CIRCUIT BOARD
BACKPLANE
SUPPORT
BACKPLANE
SUPPORT
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
BACKUP
PROCESSOR
BOARDS
(REMOVED)
CARD CAGE
SV49024
Figure 4-28: CARD CAGE AND BACKPLANE ASSEMBLY
Rev. A
4-83
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.28.10 Install the replacement backplane PCB on the backplane support
with the 15 screws that were previously removed.
4.28.11 Reinstall the backplane support to the card cage with the four screws
and washers that were previously removed.
4.28.12 Position the card cage in the monitor chassis, and tighten its captive
mounting screws.
4.28.13 Backplane Jumper Configuration. Connect all of the backplane
circuit board cables that were previously removed. Pay special
attention to the jumpers located at JP19 on the backplane. Refer to
the configuration table below to determine correct jumper
configuration for the type of backplane being installed.
Backplane Type
Jumper / position
Jumper removed
Jumper installed
4110699 (see note below)
oldest style
jumper p/n: S4111720
JP19 pins 1 to 4
JP19 pins 2 to 4
JP19 pins 3 to 4
SCR-4112048
4600 Andros 4111411
without ORDM
SCR-4111129
4610 Andros 4112181
with ORDM
4111881
intermediate
jumper p/n: 4109150
JP19 pins 1 to 2
JP19 pins 3 to 4
JP19 pins 5 to 6
SCR-4112048
4600 Andros 4111411
without ORDM
SCR-4111129
4610 Andros 4112181
with ORDM
4112303
newest
jumper p/n: 4109150
JP19 pins 1 to 2
JP19 pins 3 to 4
JP19 pins 5 to 6
SCR-4112048
4600 Andros 4111411
without ORDM
SCR-4111129
4610 Andros 4112181
with ORDM
NOTE: 4110699 Pin 4 is common. JP19 uses wire wrap connections; use caution to alter connections
4.28.14 Carefully slide the processor boards into the card cage and close the
extractors to ensure that the boards are properly seated in the
backplane connectors.
4.28.15 Restore power to the machine and run the diagnostics test given in
Section 2 to verify that the replacement backplane is working
properly.
4.28.16 Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.28.17 Replace the monitor box cover and connect the remote display cable,
BP cuff and BP gauge lines and the oximeter sensor cable at the
patient interface panel. Replace the disposable reservoir.
4.28.18 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-84
Rev. Y
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.29
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Multispec Analyzer Assembly (Model 4600)
The multispec analyzer assembly is located in the left rear corner of the
monitor box. Access to the assembly requires removal of the monitor box cover.
The analyzer assembly contains several field-replaceable sub-assemblies.
These are: the fan, the scrubber bottle, the Nafion tubing, the sample cell, and
the pump, the HC11 PCB assembly, and the firmware EPROM. Replacement
of the Nafion tubing, sample cell or pump requires that the multispec analyzer
assembly be removed from the monitor box. Figure 4-29 shows the general
arrangement of the multispec analyzer assembly and its connections.
NOTE: If the Model 4600 Multispec Analyzer Assembly is being replaced by
a Model 4610, refer to Service Procedure 00117 for installation
instructions.
4.29.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.29.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient interface panel on the
left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display and Datagrip cables
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
4.29.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.29.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
NOTE: The following procedure applies to replacement of the entire analyzer
assembly. Procedures for replacement of sub-assemblies begin at
Paragraph 4.29.20.
Rev. A
4.29.5
Disconnect the exhaust line from the adjustable flow restrictor. (This
is the line from the exhaust port on the sensor interface panel.)
4.29.6
Disconnect the cables from J1, J3 and J4 on the upper circuit board.
4.29.7
Disconnect the cable from J2 on the lower circuit board.
4.29.8
Disconnect the gas sample (intake) line from the brass fitting on the
floor of the monitor box.
4-85
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
BRASS FITTING
ON FLOOR OF
MONITOR BOX
GAS SAMPLE
LINE
HC11 PCB
ASSEMBLY
FAN
MOUNTING
SCREWS(4X)
J1
J9
J2
J3
J10
J4
PATIENT
SAMPLE LINE
DISPOSABLE
RESERVOIR
SCRUBBER
BOTTLE
PUMP
MULTISPEC
ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING
SCREWS(4X)
SAMPLE FLOW
ADJUSTMENT
(TURN COUNTERCLOCKWISE
TO INCREASE FLOW)
ANAYLYZER
SV45020
Figure 4-29: MULTISPEC ANALYZER ASSEMBLY (MODEL 4600)
4-86
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
TOP VIEW OF MULTISPEC ANALYZER ASSEMBLY
WITH UPPER CIRCUIT BOARD REMOVED
NAFION
TUBING
PUMP
ASSEMBLY
WATER TRAP
HOUSING
OPTICAL HEAD
ASSEMBLY
INTAKE
PORT
J2
EXHAUST
PORT
SAMPLE
CELL
OPTICAL HEAD ASSEMBLY,
FRONT VIEW
THUMB SCREW
VSS
Figure 4-29: MULTISPEC ANALYZER ASSEMBLY (MODEL 4600)(continued)
Rev. A
4-87
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.29.9
NM4
Loosen the four captive mounting screws and lift the multispec
analyzer assembly from the monitor box.
4.29.10 Remove the piece of gas sample line tubing from the solenoid valve
in the analyzer assembly, and install it on the solenoid valve in the
replacement assembly.
4.29.11 Position the replacement assembly in the monitor box and tighten the
captive mounting screws.
4.29.12 Connect the gas sample line to the brass fitting on the floor of the
monitor box.
4.29.13 Connect the cables that were previously removed from J1, J3 and J4
on the upper circuit board.
4.29.14 Connect the cable that was previously removed from J2 on the lower
circuit board.
4.29.15 Connect the exhaust line to the flow restrictor.
4.29.16 Restore power to the machine and perform the multispec calibration
procedures given in Section 5.
NOTE: If the entire analyzer assembly is replaced or if the pump is replaced,
the pump flow rate must be set to the correct value as described in
Section 5 under Multispec Span and Line Block Calibration.
4.29.17 Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.29.18 Replace the monitor box cover and connect the remote display cable,
BP cuff and BP gauge lines and the oximeter sensor cable at the
patient interface panel. Replace the disposable reservoir.
4.29.19 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-88
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.29.20 Fan Replacement:
4.29.20.1
Disconnect the fan power cable from J10 on the upper
circuit board.
4.29.20.2
Remove the four fan mounting screws, and remove the
fan.
4.29.20.3
Install the replacement fan. Use a small amount of loctite
#222 (purple) on the mounting screw threads.
4.29.20.4
Connect the fan power cable to J10 on the upper circuit
board.
4.29.20.5
Proceed to Paragraph 4.29.16.
4.29.21 Scrubber Bottle Replacement:
4.29.21.1
Disconnect the inlet line at the top of the bottle.
4.29.21.2
Loosen the bottle clamp screw and remove the bottle.
4.29.21.3
Install the replacement scrubber bottle in the clamp and
tighten the clamp screw.
4.29.21.4
Connect the inlet line at the top of the bottle.
4.29.21.5
Proceed to Paragraph 4.29.16.
4.29.22 Nafion Tubing Replacement:
Rev. A
4.29.22.1
Remove the nafion tubing from its connections on the
disposable reservoir holder and the solenoid valve. See
Multispec Analyzer Assembly illustration.
4.29.22.2
Install the replacement 12 in.length of nafion tubing
between the disposable reservoir holder and the solenoid
valve. Press the tubing ends firmly onto the hose barbs.
4.29.22.3
Proceed to Paragraph 4.29.16.
4-89
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.29.23 Sample Cell Replacement:
4.29.23.1
Remove the analyzer assembly from the monitor box as
outlined in Paragraphs 4.29.5 thru 4.29.9.
4.29.23.2
Disconnect the ribbon cable from J2 on the optical head
assembly circuit board.
4.29.23.3
Remove the four screws holding the optical head
assembly to the analyzer chassis.
4.29.23.4
Move the optical head assembly out far enough to gain
access to the sample cell, and disconnect the intake and
exhaust tubing from the fittings on the sample cell.
4.29.23.5
Turn the thumbscrew of the sample cell counterclockwise until the cell is released, and carefully
withdraw the cell from the optical head assembly.
4.29.23.6
Rotate the thumbscrew on the replacement sample cell
counter-clockwise several turns. Insert the samle cell into
the optical head assembly, making sure that the locking
tab on the screw is pointing to the right.
Turn the thumbscrew clockwise until the cell is properly
seated, with the locking tab in the slot of the optical head
assembly.
4.29.23.7
Connect the intake and exhaust tubing to the fittings on
the sample cell.
4.29.23.8
Mount the optical head assembly to the analyzer chassis
using the hardware that was previously removed. Use a
small amount of loctite #222 (purple) on the screw
threads.
4.29.23.9
Connect the ribbon cable that was previously removed
from J2 on the optical head assembly circuit board.
4.29.23.10 Position the analyzer in the monitor box and tighten the
captive mounting screws.
4.29.23.11 Proceed to Paragraph 4.29.12.
4-90
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.29.24 Pump Replacement:
4.29.24.1
Remove the analyzer assembly from the monitor box as
outlined in Paragraphs 4.29.5 thru 4.29.9.
4.29.24.2
Disconnect the pump power cable from J9 on the upper
circuit board.
4.29.24.3
Remove the four mounting screws for the water trap
housing, and move the housing aside to gain access to the
pump.
4.29.24.4
Disconnect the input and output tubing from the pump.
4.29.24.5
Remove the four nuts that hold the pump to the
multispec analyzer chassis, and remove the pump.
4.29.24.6
Install the replacement pump in the rubber mounts on
the analyzer chassis. Use a small amount of loctite #222
(purple) when installing the mounting nuts.
4.29.24.7.
Connect the input and output tubing to the pump.
4.29.24.8
Replace the water trap housing and install its mounting
screws. Use a small amount of loctite #222 (purple) on
the mounting screw threads.
4.29.24.9
Connect the pump power cable to J9 on the upper circuit
board.
4.29.24.10 Position the multispec analyzer in the monitor box and
tighten its captive mounting screws.
4.29.24.11 Proceed to Paragraph 4.29.12.
4.29.25 HC11 PCB Assembly Replacement:
CAUTION: Use proper ESD control during the replacement procedure.
4.29.25.1
Disconnect the following cables and wire harnesses from
the HC11 PCB assembly:
J1
J3
J5
J7
J9
Rev. A
Agent Ind.
NM4 Pwr. Supp.
Andros Drivers
(If applicable)
Pump
4-91
J2 Andros Pwr. Supp.
J4 NM4 Serial Comm.
J6 Andros Comm.
J8 Solenoids
J10 Fan
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.29.25.2
Remove the four mounting screws at the corners of the
PCB assembly, and remove the assembly from the
analyzer.
4.29.25.3
Position the replacement PCB assembly on the analyzer
chassis, and secure it with the four mounting screws that
were previously removed.
4.29.25.4
Reconnect all of the cables and wire harnesses that were
previously disconnected, J1 thru J10.
4.29.25.5
Proceed to Paragraph 4.29.16.
4.29.26 Firmware Replacement:
CAUTION: Use proper ESD control during the replacement procedure.
4.29.26.1
Locate firmware chip U4 on the HC11 PCB assembly (see
illustration on next page) and carefully remove the chip
using a 52-pin extraction tool (P/N S0010069).
4.29.26.2
Carefully insert the replacement firmware chip into the
socket, ensuring that its index is oriented as shown in
the illustration. Verify that the label on the chip
corresponds to the desired firmware version number.
4.29.26.3
Proceed to Paragraph 4.29.16.
4-92
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
FIRMWARE
CHIP (U4)
INDEX
MULTISPEC
HC11 PCB
ASSEMBLY
MULTISPEC
ANALYZER
ASSEMBLY
SP70000
Figure 4-29A: MULTISPEC HC11 FIRMWARE LOCATION (MODEL 4600)
Rev. A
4-93
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.30
NM4
Multispec Analyzer Assembly (Model 4610)
The multispec analyzer assembly is located in the left rear corner of the
monitor box. Access to the assembly requires removal of the monitor box cover.
The analyzer assembly contains several field-replaceable sub-assemblies.
These are: the fan, the adjustable exhaust restrictor, the sample cell, the PVC
sample line, the air filter, the pump, the HC11 PCB assembly and the
firmware EPROM. Replacement of the sample cell or the pump requires that
the multispec analyzer assembly be removed from the monitor box. Figure 4-30
shows the general arrangement of the multispec analyzer assembly and its
connections.
NOTE: If the Model 4610 Multispec Analyzer Assembly is replacing a Model
4600, refer to Service Procedure 00117 for installation instructions.
4.30.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.30.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient interface panel on the
left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display and Datagrip cables
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
4.30.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.30.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
NOTE: The following procedure applies to replacement of the entire analyzer
assembly. Procedures for replacement of sub-assemblies begin at
Paragraph 4.30.18.
4.30.5
Disconnect the exhaust line from the adjustable restrictor.
4.30.6
Disconnect the cables from J1, J3 and J4 on the HC11 PCB assembly.
See Figure 4-30A.
4.30.7
Disconnect the gas sample (intake) line from the brass fitting on the
floor of the monitor box.
4.30.8
Loosen the four captive mounting screws and lift the multispec
analyzer assembly from the monitor box.
4-94
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
SA MP LE CEL L
M O UNT I NG
SCREWS (4X)
OPTICAL HEAD
ASSEMBLY DETAILS
S V4 0 0 2 6
SA MP LE CEL L
FA N
GAS SAMPLE
LINE
HC11 PCB
ASSEMBLY
PUMP
AI R
FILTER
PVC
SAMPLE
L I NE
EXHAUST
CONNECTION
ADJUSTABLE
RESTRICTOR
DISPOSABLE
RESERVOIR
PATIENT
SAMPLE LINE
Figure 4-30: MULTISPEC ANALYZER ASSEMBLY (MODEL 4610)
Rev. A
4-95
CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
J4 (NM4 SERIAL COMM.)
J3 (NM4 POWER SUPPLY)
J2 (ANDROS POWER)
J5 (ANDROS
DRIVER)
J1 (AGENT
INDICATORS)
J1
J2
J5
J4
J3
U4
J6
J10
J7
J8
J9
J10
(FAN)
J6 (ANDROS
COMM.)
SV40012
J9 (PUMP)
J7
J8 (SOLENOIDS)
Figure 4-30A: MULTISPEC HC11 PCB ASSEMBLY CONNECTIONS (MODEL 4610)
4-96
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.30.9
Remove the piece of gas sample line tubing from the solenoid valve
in the analyzer assembly, and install it on the solenoid valve in the
replacement assembly.
4.30.10 Position the replacement assembly in the monitor box and tighten the
captive mounting screws.
4.30.11 Connect the gas sample line to the brass fitting on the floor of the
monitor box.
4.30.12 Connect the cables that were previously removed from J1, J3 and J4
on the HC11 PCB assembly.
4.30.13 Connect the exhaust line to the adjustable restrictor.
4.30.14 Restore power to the machine and perform the multispec calibration
procedures given in Section 5.
NOTE: If the entire analyzer assembly is replaced or if the pump is replaced,
the pump flow rate must be set to the correct value as described in
Section 5 under Multispec Span and Line Block Calibration.
4.30.15 Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.30.16 Replace the monitor box cover and connect the remote display cable,
BP cuff and BP gauge lines and the oximeter sensor cable at the
patient interface panel. Replace the disposable reservoir.
4.30.17 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4.30.18 Fan Replacement:
Rev. A
4.30.18.1
Disconnect the fan wire harness from J10 on the HC11
PCB assembly.
4.30.18.2
Remove the four fan mounting screws, and remove the
fan.
4.30.18.3
Install the replacement fan. Use a small amount of
Loctite #222 (purple) on the mounting screw threads.
4.30.18.4
Connect the fan wire harness to J10 on the HC 11 PCB
assembly.
4.30.18.5
Proceed to Paragraph 4.30.14.
4-97
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.30.19 PVC Sample Line Replacement:
4.30.19.1
At the water trap housing, disconnect the sample line
Luer fitting from the air filter.
4.30.19.2
Disconnect the other end of the sample line from the hose
barb on the solenoid, and carefully withdraw the sample
line through the bushing in the water trap housing.
4.30.19.3
Insert the end of the replacement sample line through
the bushing in the water trap housing, and connect it to
the hose barb on the solenoid where the original sample
line was removed.
4.30.19.4
Connect the Luer fitting on the outboard end of the
sample line to the air filter.
4.30.19.5
Proceed to Paragraph 4.30.14.
4.30.20 Air Filter Replacement:
4.30.20.1
At the water trap housing, disconnect the sample line
Luer fitting from the air filter.
4.30.20.2
Remove the air filter from the Luer fitting in the water
trap housing.
NOTE:
On later model gas analyzers the Luer fitting in the
water trap housing and the Luer fitting on the PVC
sample line have a different gender arrangement than
previous models. The later arrangement prevents
connection of the PVC sample line to the water trap
housing without an air filter. (The same air filter is usedoriented 180° from the previous arrangement.)
4.30.20.3
Attach the replacement air filter to the Luer fitting in the
water trap housing.
4.30.20.4
Connect the PVC sample line to the to the air filter.
4.30.20.5
Proceed to Paragraph 4.30.14.
4-98
Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.30.21 Sample Cell Replacement:
NOTE:
The next four steps apply to analyzer assemblies where
the optical head assembly must be removed from the
chassis in order to gain access to the sample cell. Skip
these steps if the the analyzer arrangement allows access
to the sample cell mounting screws without further
disassembly.
4.30.21.1
Remove the analyzer assembly from the monitor box as
outlined in Paragraphs 4.30.5 thru 4.30.8.
4.30.21.2
Disconnect the ribbon cable from the optical head
assembly circuit board.
4.30.21.3
Disconnect the intake and exhaust tubing from the
fittings on the sample cell.
4.30.21.4
Remove the four screws holding the optical head
assembly to the analyzer chassis, and carefully lift out
the optical head assembly. Note the arrangement of the
mounting hardware so that the assembly can be
reinstalled in the same manner.
4.30.21.5
Remove the four screws holding the sample cell to the
optical head assembly and withdraw the sample cell.
4.30.21.6
Position the replacement sample cell in the optical head
assembly and secure it with the four screws that were
previously removed.
4.30.21.7
Reinstall the optical head assembly on the analyzer
chassis using the mounting hardware that was previously
removed. Use a small amount of Loctite #222 (purple) on
the screw threads.
4.30.21.8
Connect the intake and exhaust tubing to the fittings on
the sample cell.
4.30.21.9
Connect the ribbon cable that was previously removed
from the optical head assembly circuit board.
4.30.21.10 Position the multispec analyzer assembly in the monitor
box and tighten the captive mounting screws.
4.30.21.11 Proceed to Paragraph 4.30.11.
Rev. A
4-99
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.30.22 Adjustable Restrictor Replacement:
4.30.22.1
Disconnect the exhaust line from the hose barb on the
restrictor (if not previously disconnected).
4.30.22.2
Remove the two screws securing the restrictor to the
chassis.
4.30.22.3
Disconnect the pump exhaust tubing from the restrictor,
and remove the restrictor.
4.30.22.4
Connect the pump exhaust tubing to the replacement
restrictor, and secure the restrictor to the chassis with
the screws that were previously removed.
4.30.22.5
Connect the exhaust line to the restrictor and proceed to
Paragraph 4.30.14.
4.30.23 Pump Replacement:
4.30.23.1
Remove the analyzer assembly from the monitor box as
outlined in Paragraphs 4.30.5 thru 4.30.8.
4.30.23.2
Disconnect the pump wire harness from J9 on the HC11
PCB assembly.
4.30.23.3
Disconnect the input and output tubing from the pump.
4.30.23.4
Remove the four nuts that hold the pump to the
multispec analyzer chassis, and remove the pump.
4.30.23.5
Install the replacement pump in the rubber mounts on
the analyzer chassis. Use a small amount of loctite #222
(purple) when installing the mounting nuts.
4.30.23.6.
Connect the input and output tubing to the replacement
pump.
4.30.23.7
Connect the pump wire harness to J9 on the HC11 PCB
assembly.
4.30.23.8
Position the multispec analyzer in the monitor box and
tighten its captive mounting screws.
4.30.23.9
Proceed to Paragraph 4.30.11.
4-100
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.30.24 HC11 PCB Assembly Replacement:
CAUTION: Use proper ESD control during the replacement procedure.
4.30.24.1
Disconnect the following cables and wire harnesses from
the HC11 PCB assembly (ref. Figure 4-30A):
J1
J3
J5
J7
J9
Agent Ind.
NM4 Pwr. Supp.
Andros Drivers
(If applicable)
Pump
J2 Andros Pwr. Supp.
J4 NM4 Serial Comm.
J6 Andros Comm.
J8 Solenoids
J10 Fan
4.30.24.2
Remove the four mounting screws at the corners of the
PCB assembly, and remove the assembly from the
analyzer.
4.30.24.3
Position the replacement PCB assembly on the analyzer
chassis, and secure it with the four mounting screws that
were previously removed.
4.30.24.4
Reconnect all of the cables and wire harnesses that were
previously disconnected, J1 thru J10.
4.30.24.5
Proceed to Paragraph 4.30.14.
4.30.25 Firmware Replacement:
CAUTION: Use proper ESD control during the replacement procedure.
Rev. A
4.30.25.1
Locate firmware chip U4 on the HC11 PCB assembly (see
Figure 4-30B) and carefully remove the chip using a 52pin extraction tool (P/N S0010069).
4.30.25.2
Carefully insert the replacement firmware chip into the
socket, ensuring that its index is oriented as shown in
the illustration. Verify that the label on the chip
corresponds to the desired firmware version number.
4.30.25.3
Reinstall the HC11 PCB assembly as outlined in
Paragraph 4.30.22.
4.30.25.4
Proceed to Paragraph 4.30.14.
4-101
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
I NDEX
VER X.XX
FI RMWARE CHIP (U4)
J1
J2
J5
J4
J3
U4
J6
R27
J10
J7
J8
J9
HC11 PCB ASSEMBLY
SV40011
Figure 4-30B: MULTISPEC HC11 FIRMWARE LOCATION (MODEL 4610)
4-102
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.31
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Front Bezel Assembly
The front bezel assembly includes the left and right display panels, key panels,
selection dial encoder and touch screen circuitry. Replacement of the bezel
assembly requires removal of the monitor box cover. Refer to Figure 4-31 for
the general arrangement of the assembly and its cables, and the mounting
screw locations.
4.31.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.31.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient interface panel on the
left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display and Datagrip cables
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
4.31.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.31.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
4.31.5
Disconnect the following cables from the backplane circuit board:
-Left display panel cable from J7
-Right display panel cable from J6
-Touch panel cables from J4 and J5
-Selection dial cable from J26
4.31.6
Disconnect the ground wire from the monitor box chassis.
4.31.7
While holding the bezel assembly, loosen the four captive mounting
screws and slide the bezel assembly to the left. Lift the assembly
from the monitor box.
4.31.8
Position the replacement bezel assembly over the mounting holes in
the monitor box and fasten the captive mounting screws.
NOTE: Ensure that the replacement bezel assembly is electrically compatible
with the existing processor boards. Refer to the part number
combinations listed in Section 8.
Rev. A
4-103
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
NM4 TOP VIEW OF MONITOR BOX
WITH COVER REMOVED
C
C
E
COVER SCREW
LOCATIONS
(6X)
FRONT
BEZEL
MOUNTING
SCREWS
GROUND
WIRE
narkomed
FRONT
BEZEL
MOUNTING
SCREWS
FRONT BEZEL
ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-31: FRONT BEZEL ASSEMBLY
4-104
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.31.9
Connect the ground wire to the monitor box chasis
4.31.10 Join the cables from the replacement bezel assembly to their correct
connectors on the backplane circuit board.
4.31.11 Restore power to the machine and run the keys and touch screen
diagnostics tests given in Section 2 to verify that the replacement
bezel assembly is working properly.
4.31.12 Set the System Power switch on the front panel to STANDBY.
4.31.13 Replace the monitor box cover and reconnect the items that were
previously disconnected from the patient interface panel.
4.31.14 Replace the disposable reservoir.
4.31.15 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-105
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.32
NM4
Remote Display Assembly (without Datagrip)
The remote display is located at the outboard end of the boom arm and
comprises the display panel and its associated circuitry, the keypad switches
and the cable assembly that provides for communications with the machine.
Figure 4-32 illustrates the remote display mounting arrangement.
4.32.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.32.2
Disconnect the remote display cable from the left side panel of the
monitor box and separate the cable from the retainer clamps along
the boom arm.
4.32.3
Remove the plastic cap at the end of the boom arm to expose the
remote display assembly mounting screw.
4.32.4
While holding the remote display, loosen its mounting screw until the
display assembly separates from the boom arm.
4.32.5
Mount the replacement display assembly to the boom arm and
tighten its mounting screw to a torque of 3 to 5 foot pounds. Replace
the plastic cap covering the mounting screw recess.
4.32.6
Install the remote display cable in its retainer clamps along the boom
arm and connect the cable to the panel on the left side of the monitor
box.
4.32.7
Restore power to the machine and verify the operation of the remote
display by running the service diagnostics described in Section 2.
4.32.8
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-106
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
REMOTE DISPLAY
MOUNTING SCREW
PLASTIC CAP
LOCKWASHER
BEARING
THRUST
WASHER
CABLE CLAMP
(TYPICAL)
BOOM
ARM
DELRIN
INSERT
REMOTE
DISPLAY
Figure 4-32: REMOTE DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
Rev. A
4-107
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.33
NM4
Remote Display Assembly (with Datagrip)
The Remote Display Assembly is mounted on a rod extending from the
Datagrip assembly located at the outboard end of the display arm. Figure 4-33
illustrates the Display assembly mounting arrangement. A later style display
arm is illustrated; the display mounting principle is the same on the earlier
style boom arm.
4.33.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
CAUTION:
Do not plug or unplug remote display or Datagrip with power
applied.
4.33.2
Disconnect the remote display cable from its port on the underside of
the ventilator box.
4.33.3
Remove the screws holding the cable clamps along the display arm
and separate the cables from the display arm.
4.33.4
Loosen the display mounting clamp screws (accessible through
clearance holes in the back cover of the display).
4.33.5
Orient the display with its face toward the floor, or as needed to
enable the mounting clamps to slide past the stop pins on the
mounting rod, and pull the display from the rod.
4.33.6
Slide the replacement display assembly onto the mounting rod,
oriented so that the mounting clamps in the display assembly slide
past the stop pins on the rod - until the display is in the correct
position on the rod.
4.33.7
Tighten the display mounting clamp screws (accessible through
clearance holes in the back cover of the display) until the display has
the desired amount of friction on the mounting rod.
4.33.8
Install the remote display and Datagrip cables in the cable clamps
that were previously removed, and reinstall their screws along the
display arm. Ensure that the display arm has full range of motion
with no binding caused by the cables.
4.33.9
Connect the remote display and Datagrip cables to their ports on the
left side of the monitor box.
4.33.10 Restore power to the machine and verify operation of the remote
display and Datagrip by exercising the display selections.
4.33.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-108
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
DATAGRIP
REMOTE
DISPLAY
OXIMETER
SENSOR
BP CUFF
ACCESS TO
CLAMP
SCREWS
CABLE CLAMPS
(APPROXIMATE
LOCATION)
DISPLAY
ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING
ROD
DATAGRIP
SV49041
Figure 4-33: REMOTE DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
Rev. A
4-109
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.34
NM4
Datagrip Assembly
The Datagrip Assembly is attached to the outboard end of the display arm and
comprises the handle and trigger switch, thumbwheel encoder, cable, and
mounting rod for the display. The remote display must be removed from the
Datagrip assembly before the assembly is removed from the display arm.
(Refer to the illustration (Figure 4-33) accompanying the remote display
replacement procedure for details on remote display removal.) Figure 4-34
shows the Datagrip assembly mounting arrangement. A later style display arm
is illustrated; the Datagrip mounting principle is the same on the earlier style
boom arm.
4.34.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
CAUTION:
Do not plug or unplug remote display or Datagrip with power
applied.
4.34.2
Disconnect the Datagrip and remote display cables from their ports
on the underside of the ventilator box.
4.34.3
Remove the screws holding the cable clamps along the display arm
and separate the cables from the display arm.
4.34.4
Loosen the display mounting clamp screws (accessible through
clearance holes in the back cover of the display).
4.34.5
Orient the display with its face is toward the floor, or as needed to
enable the mounting clamps to slide past the stop pins on the
mounting rod, and pull the display from the rod.
4.34.6
Remove the plastic cap at the end of the display arm to expose the
Datagrip assembly mounting screw.
4.34.7
While holding the Datagrip assembly, loosen the mounting screw
until the assembly separates from the display arm.
4.34.8
Mount the replacement Datagrip assembly to the display arm and
tighten its mounting screw to a torque of 3 to 5 foot pounds. Reinstall
the plastic cap to cover the mounting screw recess.
4.34.9
Slide the display onto the mounting rod, oriented so that the
mounting clamps in the display assembly slide past the stop pins on
the rod - until the display is in the correct position on the rod.
4-110
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
DATAGRIP
REMOTE
DISPLAY
OXIMETER
SENSOR
BP CUFF
CAP
MOUNTING SCREW
SPACER
LOCKWASHER
BEARING
SPACER
CABLE CLAMPS
(APPROXIMATE
LOCATION)
DELRIN SPACER
DATAGRIP AND
REMOTE DISPLAY
ASSEMBLY
SV49020
Figure 4-34: DATAGRIP ASSEMBLY
Rev. A
4-111
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.34.10 Tighten the display mounting clamp screws (accessible through
clearance holes in the back cover of the display) until the display has
the desired amount of friction on the mounting rod.
4.34.11 Install the remote display and Datagrip cables in the cable clamps
that were previously removed, and reinstall their screws along the
display arm. Ensure that the display arm has full range of motion
with no binding caused by the cables.
4.34.12 Connect the remote display and Datagrip cables to their ports on the
left side of the monitor box.
4.34.13 Restore power to the machine and verify operation of the remote
display and Datagrip by exercising the display selections.
4.34.14 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-112
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.35
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NIBP Pump and Sensor Circuit Assembly
The location of the NIBP pump and sensor circuit assembly within the monitor
box is shown in Figure 4-35 along with a detail of the mounting screws and
connections to the assembly. The monitor box cover must be removed to gain
access to this assembly.
Figure 4-35A shows the arrangement of the pump assembly on later model or
retrofitted machines where the pump and power module bracket assembly is
mounted on an adapter plate that is permanently attached to the monitor box.
4.35.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.35.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient interface panel on the
left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display and Datagrip cables
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
4.35.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.35.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
NOTE: The cable connector on the circuit board is not keyed. Note the
position of the connector so that it can be connected to the
replacement unit in the same manner.
4.35.5
Disconnect the ribbon cable from the assembly.
4.35.6
Cut the tie-wrap clamp on the BP cuff tubing and remove the tubing
from the assembly.
4.35.7
Disconnect the ground wire from the monitor box chassis.
4.35.8
Loosen the four captive mounting screws holding the assembly to the
monitor box, and remove the assembly (early models).
On later models, loosen the two captive mounting screws at the rear
of the assembly; slide the assembly toward the rear and lift it from
the adapter plate.
Rev. A
4-113
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
TIE WRAP
CLAMP
RIBBON
CABLE
BP CUFF
TUBING
GROUND
WIRE
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
C
C
E
NARKOMED 4
MONITOR BOX
TOP VIEW WITH
COVER REMOVED
Figure 4-35: NIBP PUMP ASSEMBLY (EARLY MODELS)
4-114
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREWS (2X)
NIBP ASSEMBLY
RIBBON CABLE
BP CUFF HOSE
CONNECTION
J9
(BACKPLANE)
GROUND
WIRE
FRONT
TOP VIEW OF NARKOMED 4
MONITOR CHASSIS WITH COVER REMOVED
SV40018
Figure 35A: NIBP PUMP AND POWER MODULE ASSEMBLY (LATER MODELS)
Rev. A
4-115
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.35.9
NM4
Position the replacement assembly over the mounting holes in the
monitor box and fasten the captive mounting screws; connect the
ground wire to the monitor box chassis.
On later models, install the replacement assembly onto the adapter
plate by placing the slotted holes over the shouldered screws in the
adapter plate and sliding the assembly forward. Tighten the two
captive mounting screws and connect the ground wire to the monitor
box chassis.
4.35.10 Connect the BP cuff tubing to the hose barb on the pump assembly
and install a new tie-wrap clamp (later models use a spring-type hose
clamp).
4.35.11 Connect the ribbon cable from the backplane to the assembly.
4.35.12 Restore power to the machine and run the NIBP diagnostics test
given in Section 2 to verify that the replacement assembly is working
properly.
4.35.13 Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.35.14 Replace the monitor box cover and connect the remote display cable,
BP cuff and BP gauge lines and the oximeter sensor cable at the left
side panel of the monitor box. Replace the disposable reservoir.
4.35.15 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-116
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.36
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Pulse Oximeter (SpO2) Assembly
The location of the pulse oximeter assembly within the monitor box is shown
in Figure 4-36. Typical assemblies are illustrated; there may be variations in
the circuit board arrangements and the shape of the mounting bracket. The
monitor box cover must be removed to gain access to this assembly.
4.36.1
Turn the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.36.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient interface panel on the
left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display and Datagrip cables
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
4.36.3
Remove the disposable reservoir from its holder.
4.36.4
Remove the screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully lift
the cover from the monitor box.
4.36.5
Disconnect all backplane wire harnesses and cables to the SpO2
assembly, and disconnect the interface panel cable.
4.36.6
Loosen the two captive screws holding the assembly to the monitor
box, and remove the assembly. On later designs the SpO2 assembly
is located next to the gas analyzer, and the speaker is located on the
card cage assembly.
4.36.7
Install the replacement assembly in the same position as the original.
4.36.8
Connect the interface panel cable, and connect the backplane wire
harnesses and cables to the assembly as shown in the illustration.
(On earlier models without the speaker amplifier board, ensure that
the black wire is connected to the (+) speaker terminal.)
4.36.9
Restore power to the machine and run the SpO2 diagnostics test given
in Section 2 to verify that the replacement assembly is working
properly.
4.36.10 Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.36.11 Replace the monitor box cover and connect the remote display cable,
BP cuff and BP gauge lines and the oximeter sensor cable at the left
side panel of the monitor box. Replace the disposable reservoir.
4.36.12 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. D
4-117
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
PULSE OXIMETER
ASSEMBLY
NARKOMED 4 MONITOR BOX
TOP VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED
NM4
LATER
DESIGN
SPO2 SPEAKER
AND AMPLIFIER
E.T
SV40438
PULSE OXIMETER ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-36: PULSE OXIMETER ASSEMBLY LOCATION
4-118
Rev. D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
SPEAKER WIRE
HARNESS TO
BACKPLANE J21
CONNECT WIRE
HARNESS TO
BACKPLANE J21
AND
BACKPLANE J43
CABLE FROM SpO2
INTERFACE PANEL
WIRE HARNESS
TO BACKPLANE J43
MOUNTING
SCREWS (2X)
RIBBON CABLE
TO BACKPLANE J12
WIRE HARNESS
TO BACKPLANE J28
J1
JP5
JP3
CONNECT RIBBON
CABLE TO
BACKPLANE J12
EARLIER
DESIGNS
CONNECT CABLE
FROM SpO2
INTERFACE PANEL
JP3
CONNECT CABLE FROM SpO2
INTERFACE PANEL
CONNECT CABLE TO
BACKPLANE J12
JP5
LATER
DESIGN
SV40437
Figure 4-36: (continued) PULSE OXIMETER ASSEMBLY
Rev. D
4-118A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
Figure 4-36: (continued) NOVAMETRIX PULSE OXIMETER MODULE
4-118B
Rev. U
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.37
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
VPO Assembly
The VPO assembly is located in a box at the back of the machine as shown in
Figure 4-37. Access to the VPO assembly requires removal of a cover plate and
removal of the AC power inlet filter from the VPO box.
4.37.1
Set the System Power switch on the front panel to the STANDBY
position and remove AC power from the machine.
4.37.2
Remove the AC power cable from the power inlet on the bottom of the
VPO box.
WARNING:
Ensure that AC power is removed from the machine before
opening the VPO box cover. Failure to observe this precaution
may cause injury by electric shock.
4.37.3
Remove the six screws holding the cover plate over the wiring
channel and VPO box, and remove the cover plate.
4.37.4
Disconnect the following items from the sensor interface panel:
-O2 Sensor cable
-Volume Sensor cable
-Breathing Pressure monitor cable
-Exhaust tubing
4.37.5
Remove the line, neutral and ground wires from the terminals of the
EMI filter.
4.37.6
Remove the two screws holding the EMI filter to the bottom of the
VPO box, and remove the EMI filter.
4.37.7
Remove the screw holding the ground wire to the VPO assembly.
4.37.8
Remove the eight connector panel screws.
CAUTION:
4.37.9
Rev. A
The VPO circuit board contains static sensitive devices. Use ESD
protection when handling the VPO assembly.
Carefully move cabling aside to provide clearance for the VPO
assembly, and remove the assembly from the box.
4-119
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
VPO ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREWS (8X)
CONNECTOR PANEL FOR
OXYGEN SENSOR,
VOLUME SENSOR,
BREATHING PRESSURE
AND EXHAUST
WIRING
CHANNEL
GROUND
WIRE
VPO
ASSEMBLY
RIBBON
CABLE
CONNECTOR
EXHAUST TUBING
CONNECTION
VPO HOUSING
REAR VIEW
WITH COVER
REMOVED
EMI FILTER
AND AC POWER
CONNECTOR
N
L
EMI FILTER
MOUNTING
SCREWS
Figure 4-37: VPO ASSEMBLY
4-120
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.37.10 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the exhaust tubing from the VPO
assembly.
4.37.11 Connect the ribbon cable and the exhaust tubing to the replacement
VPO assembly.
4.37.12 Place the assembly in the box, align the connector panels with the
box cutouts and install the eight connector panel screws.
4.37.13 Connect the ground wire to the VPO assembly.
WARNING:
The AC power wiring must be connected to the EMI filter in the
correct polarity. Incorrect connection will compromise the
electrical safety of the machine.
4.37.14 Install the EMI filter in the bottom of the VPO box and connect the
line, neutral and ground wires to the terminals as follows:
-Green/yellow wire to Ground terminal
-Blue wire to Neutral terminal
-Brown wire to Line terminal
4.37.15 Install the cover plate over the wiring channel and back of the VPO
box.
4.37.16 Connect the O2 Sensor, Volume Sensor, Breathing Pressure cables,
and the exhaust tubing to the sensor interface panel.
4.37.17 Connect the AC power cable to the power inlet on the bottom of the
VPO box.
4.37.18 Restore power to the machine and run the Oxygen, Pressure and
Respiratory Flow diagnostics given in Section 2 to verify that the
replacement VPO assembly is working properly.
4.37.19 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-121
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.38
NM4
SPIROMED Respiratory Volume Sensor
The respiratory volume sensor is installed between the top of the absorber
assembly and the expiratory valve. Figure 4-38 shows the volume sensor
mounting arrangement, gaskets and connection to the VPO panel.
4.38.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.38.2
Disconnect the sensor plug from the volume sensor receptacle on
the VPO panel.
4.38.3
Remove the expiratory valve by unscrewing the valve retaining
nut.
4.38.4
Remove the volume sensor from the absorber assembly by
unscrewing its retaining nut.
CAUTION:
Do not twist the body of the sensor when loosening the
retaining nut. Hold the sensor while loosening the retaining
nut to prevent damage to the unit.
4.38.5
Install the replacement volume sensor on the absorber assembly.
Ensure that the gasket is seated properly and hand tighten the
retaining nut.
4.38.6
Install the expiratory valve on the sensor. Ensure that the gasket
is seated properly and hand tighten the valve retaining nut.
4.38.7
Connect the sensor plug to the volume sensor receptacle on the
VPO panel.
4.38.8
Restore power to the machine and perform the respiratory flow
monitor calibration procedure given in Section 5.
4.38.9
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-122
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
EXPIRATORY
VALVE
VALVE
RETAINING NUT
RECEPTACLE
ON SENSOR
INTERFACE PANEL
GASKET
VOLUME
SENSOR
SPIROMED
SENSOR
SENSOR
RETAINING
NUT
SENSOR
PLUG
GASKET
EXPIRATORY
VALVE
MOUNT
ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
RVS
Figure 4-38: RESPIRATORY VOLUME SENSOR
Rev. A
4-123
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.39
NM4
Oxygen Sensor
The oxygen sensor is located on top of the inspiratory valve. Figure 4-39
shows the arrangement of the sensor capsule and its housing, and also its
connection to the VPO (interface) panel.
4.39.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.39.2
Pull the oxygen sensor housing from the inspiratory valve dome. (It
is a press fit.)
4.39.3
Unscrew the cover from the sensor housing and remove the sensor
capsule.
4.39.4
Remove the replacement sensor capsule from its shipping container
and install it in the housing. Ensure that the copper rings on the
capsule mate with the electrical contacts in the sensor housing.
4.39.5
Wait 15 minutes to allow the sensor capsule to stabilize.
4.39.6
Restore power to the machine and perform the ambient air
calibration given in Section 5.
4.39.7
Press the sensor assembly into the inspiratory valve dome.
4.39.8
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
SV20316
SENSOR HOUSING
RECEPTACLE
ON INTERFACE
PANEL
SENSOR CAPSULE
SENSOR HOUSING
COVER
INSPIRATORY
VALVE DOME
INSPIRATORY
VALVE DOME
PLUG
SENSOR
CORD
CONNECTOR
Figure 4-39: OXYGEN SENSOR REPLACEMENT
4-124
Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.40
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Manual Sphygmomanometer
The manual sphygmomanometer gauge is mounted on a threaded piece
attached to the underside of the boom arm mounting block. On later
machines the gauge mount is attached to the display arm support plate.
Figure 4-40 shows the gauge mounting arrangements, and the gauge
connection to the patient interface panel.
4.40.1
Disconnect the gauge line from the BP GAUGE fitting on the
patient interface panel.
4.40.2
Remove the gauge by unscrewing its mounting ring from the fitting
on the boom arm mounting block.
4.40.3
Install the replacement gauge on the threaded fitting on the boom
arm mounting block, and hand tighten the gauge mounting ring.
4.40.4
Connect the gauge line to the BP GAUGE fitting on the patient
interface panel.
4.40.5
Ensure that the remaining connections are properly made:
Connect the hose on the blood pressure cuff to an extension hose,
and the other end of the extension hose to the BP CUFF fitting on
the patient interface panel.
Connect the inflation bulb hose to the BP BULB fitting on the
front of the machine.
4.40.6
Rev. A
Perform the following leak test on the manual sphygmomanometer:
4.40.6.1
Place the blood pressure cuff around a rigid cylindrical
object approximately the same diameter as a human
arm.
4.40.6.2
Inflate the cuff to a pressure of 200 mm Hg, as
indicated on the gauge.
4.40.6.3
The pressure should not drop more than 10 mm Hg in
30 seconds.
4-125
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
INTERFACE PANEL
ON LEFT SIDE
OF MONITOR BOX
BP CUFF
BP GUAGE
GAUGE
MOUNT
THREADED
MOUNTING
RING
MANUAL
SPHYGMOMANOMETER
GAUGE
INTERNAL PIPING CONNECTS
BULB FITTING TO GAUGE
AND CUFF FITTINGS
FEMALE LUER FITTING
(SLIP FIT) FOR CUFF
INFLATION BULB
SV49023
Figure 4-40: MANUAL SPHYGMOMANOMETER
4-126
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.41
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Boom Arm Assembly (earlier machines)
The boom arm is supported by a mounting block attached on the left side of
the machine. This mounting block is part of the boom arm assembly and is
attached to the machine by four socket head screws. Before removing the
boom arm from the machine, the Datagrip and remote display assembly
must be removed from the outboard end of the arm. If the machine is
equipped with an optional manual sphygmomanometer, the gauge must be
removed from the boom arm mounting block. Figure 4-41 shows the boom
arm mounting arrangement.
4.41.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
Rev. A
4.41.2
Disconnect the Datagrip and remote display cables from the
patient interface panel on the left side of the monitor box.
4.41.3
Loosen the cable clamps along the boom arm and separate the
cables from the boom arm.
4.41.4
Remove the plastic cap at the end of the boom arm to expose the
Datagrip and remote display assembly mounting screw.
4.41.5
While holding the remote display, loosen its mounting screw until
the display assembly separates from the boom arm.
4.41.6
If the anesthesia equipment has an optional manual
sphygmomanometer gauge, disconnect its tubing and remove the
gauge by unscrewing its mounting ring.
4.41.7
While holding the boom arm, remove the screws holding the
mounting block to the machine.
4.41.8
Hold the replacement boom arm in place and secure the mounting
block to the machine with the screws that were previously
removed. Install the long screw (¼-20 x 1¾ in.) in the upper right
hole, and the ¼-20 x 1 in. screws in the remaining three holes.
4.41.9
Reinstall the Datagrip and remote display assembly to the boom
arm and tighten its mounting screw to a torque of 3 to 5 foot
pounds. Replace the plastic cap covering the mounting screw
recess.
4-127
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
CAP
CENTER HINGE
S CR E W
HINGE
MOUNTING
SCREW
NM4
BOOM ARM
MOUNTING
BLO CK
L O CKW ASHER
SETS C R EW
NUT WITH
CAPTIVE
LOCKWASHER
BOOM ARM
MOUNTING
S CR EW S
CAP
DELRIN
WA SH ER
T HRUST
W A SHE R
B OO M ARM
BEARING
THRUST
WA SH ER
SPRING
WA SH ER
GA UG E
MO UN T
BOOM ARM
HINGE SCEW
RETAINING
RING
MAN UAL
SPHYGMOMANOMETER
(OPTIONAL)
S V4 0 0 0 4
Figure 4-41: BOOM ARM ASSEMBLY
4-128
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.41.10 Install the remote display and Datagrip cables in the retainer
clamps along the boom arm.
4.41.11 Connect the remote display and Datagrip cables to the patient
interface panel on the left side of the monitor box.
4.41.12 If tension adjustments to the boom arm hinges are needed, refer to
the adjustment procedure in Section 5 of this manual.
4.41.13 If applicable, reinstall the manual sphygmomanometer gauge.
4.41.14 Restore power to the machine and verify that the Datagrip and
remote display are working properly.
4.41.15 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-129
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.42
NM4
Display Arm Assembly (later machines)
This procedure applies to both the adjustable arm and the short arm.
The display arm assembly includes a support plate that attaches to the left
side of the machine with socket head screws that thread into the bellows
box and ventilator box. Before removing the display arm from the machine,
the Datagrip and remote display assembly must be removed from the
outboard end of the arm. Figure 4-42 shows a typical display arm mounting
arrangement. Figure 4-42A shows the cable routing arrangement for the
adjustable arm, and Figure 4-42B shwos the cable routing arrangement for
the short arm.
Refer to Figure 4-42C for installations with an optional patient line boom
arm.
4.42.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
CAUTION: Do not plug or unplug remote display with power applied.
4.42.2
Disconnect the remote display and Datagrip cables from their ports
on the left side of the monitor box.
4.42.3
Remove the screws holding the cable clamps along the display arm
and separate the cables from the display arm.
4.42.4
Remove the plastic cap at the end of the display arm to expose the
Datagrip assembly mounting screw.
4.42.5
While holding the Datagrip assembly, loosen the mounting screw
until the assembly separates from the display arm.
WARNING:
Do not attempt to disassemble the display arm sections.
Release of the internal spring may cause injury to personel.
4.42.6
While holding the display arm, remove the six screws holding its
support plate to the side of the machine.
......................................................................
NOTE: If the replacement display arm hardware was not pre-assembled,
refer to Service Procedure SP00114 for assembly details.
4.42.7
Hold the replacement display arm assembly in place and secure
the support plate to the machine with the screws that were
previously removed. If the machine is equipped with a manual
sphygmomanometer, the longer screw is used to secure the gauge
mount at the lower front corner of the support plate.
4-130
Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
DISPLAY ARM
SUPPORT PLATE
LOCKWASHER (6X)
SUPPORT PLATE
MOUNTING SCREWS (6X)
SV50525
Figure 4-42: DISPLAY ARM
Rev. A
4-131
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
DATAGRIP
REMOTE
DISPLAY
OXIMETER
SENSOR
BP CUFF
THREADED
HOLE FOR
3/4 IN. CABLE
CLAMP MOUNTING
PATIENT IV
LOOM
DETAIL:
CABLES
CAP
(P/N 4111184)
MOUNTING
SCREW
SPACER
(P/N 4110792-064)
(P/N 4111199-005)
LOCKWASHER
(P/N HW65010)
BEARING
(P/N 4111181)
SPACER
(P/N 4117092-064)
CABLE CLAMPS
(APPROXIMATE
LOCATION)
DELRIN SPACER
(P/N 4110792-044)
DATAGRIP AND
REMOTE DISPLAY
ASSEMBLY
SV40025
Figure 4-42A: CABLE ROUTING ARRANGEMENT FOR ADJUSTABLE DISPLAY ARM
4-131A
Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
DATAGRIP
REMOTE
DISPLAY
OXIMETER
SENSOR
CAP
BP CUFF
(P/N 4111184)
MOUNTING SCREW
(P/N 4111199-005)
SPACER
(P/N 4110792-064)
LOCKWASHER
(P/N HW65010)
BEARING
(P/N 4111181)
SPACER
(P/N 4117092-064)
THREADED
HOLE FOR 3/4 IN. CABLE
CLAMP MOUNTING
3/8 IN. CABLE CLAMP
DELRIN SPACER
(P/N 4110792-044)
SV40024
DATAGRIP AND
REMOTE DISPLAY
ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-42B: CABLE ROUTING ARRANGEMENT FOR SHORT DISPLAY ARM
Rev. C
4-131B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.42.8
Reinstall the Datagrip and remote display assembly to the display
arm and tighten its mounting screw to a torque of 4 foot pounds.
Replace the plastic cap covering the mounting screw recess.
4.42.9
Route the cables as shown in the applicable illustration. For the
adjustable arm, coil the excess cable in the patient IV looms. For
the short arm, coil the excess cable around the cord wraps on the
bellows box.
4.42.10 Connect the remote display and Datagrip cables to their ports on
the left side of the monitor box. Verify that the arm and the
Datagrip have full range of motion with no binding caused by the
cables. Position the cables in their clamps as needed.
4.42.11 If tension adjustment is needed on the adjustable display arm
hinge, refer to the adjustment procedure in Section 5 of this
manual.
4.42.12 Restore power to the machine and verify that the Datagrip and
remote display are working properly.
4.42.13 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
SV40028
PATIENT LINE
BOOM ARM
1/4 - 20 X 1 3/4 IN.
SOCKET HEAD
CAP SCREW (2X)
3/8 - 24 X 2 3/4 IN.
FLAT HEAD
SOCKET SCREW (2X)
SUPPORT PLATE
1/4 - 20 X 7/8 IN. BUTTON
HEAD SOCKET SCREW
AND LOCKWASHER (4X)
DISPLAY
ARM
Figure 4-42C: OPTIONAL PATIENT LINE BOOM ARM ASSEMBLY DETAILS
4-132
Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.43
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Internal Strip Chart Printer
The internal strip chart printer can be removed from the monitor box at the
front panel. Figure 4-43 shows the location of the printer mounting screws
that are accessible with the printer door open.
4.43.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.43.2
Press the right side of the release bar to open the printer door.
4.43.3
Loosen the two captive mounting screws at the back of the printer.
4.43.4
Carefully withdraw the printer forward through the panel opening
and disconnect the ribbon cable at the back of the printer.
4.43.5
Connect the ribbon cable to the replacement printer and slide the
unit through the panel opening until it is seated against its
mounting bracket.
NOTE: If the replacement printer is a later model (P/N 4112048), remove
the jumper from J19 pins 1 & 2 on the backplane PCB assembly.
Refer to Section 4-24 for access to the backplane PCB assembly.
Rev. C
4.43.6
Tighten the captive mounting screws at the back of the printer; DO
NOT apply more than 8 in.lbs. of torque.
4.43.7
Load the printer with paper and close the door.
4.43.8
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-133
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
na rkome d
RELEASE
BAR
NARKOMED 4 FRONT VIEW
PRINTER MOUNTING
SCREWS (IN BACK OF BOX)
IP
Figure 4-43: INTERNAL PRINTER
4-134
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.44
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
O.R. DATA MANAGER CPU Assembly (earlier machines)
The O.R. DATA MANAGER (ORDM) CPU assembly is located in the right
side of the ventilator box. Access to the ORDM CPU assembly requires
removal of the right front panel of the ventilator box, and removal of the
monitor box cover. Figure 4-44 shows the CPU assembly mounting and
cable connection arrangement. The lower PC board contains a 3-volt lithium
battery that provides data retention when power is removed from the CPU.
The location and orientation of the battery are shown in the illustration.
4.44.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.44.2
Remove any disk from the disk drive.
4.44.3
Remove the four screws holding the right front panel of the
ventilator box, and remove the panel.
CAUTION: Use ESD protection when handling the CPU assembly.
4.44.4
Loosen the two captive mounting screws holding the ORDM CPU
assembly to the floor of the ventilator box. Carefully slide the CPU
assembly forward.
4.44.5
Disconnect all cables from the patient interface panel on the left
side of the monitor box.
4.44.6
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
4.44.7
Disconnect the ORDM cables from backplane connectors J3, J13,
and J14.
4.44.8
Disconnect the keyboard cable floating connector (P7-P8), and the
power wire harness floating connector (P2-P1).
4.44.9
Carefully pull the ORDM CPU assembly from the ventilator box.
NOTE: The next step refers to memory battery replacement only. Skip this
step if the entire ORDM CPU assembly is being replaced.
4.44.10 Battery Replacement
4.44.10.1
Rev. A
Disconnect the ribbon cables from J8 and J9 on the
CPU board.
4-135
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
FRONT VIEW OF VENTILATOR BOX
WITH RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVED
O.R.DATA MANAGER
CPU ASSEMBLY
CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREWS
P2 P1
POWER
P7 P8
KEYBOARD
J14 (BACKPLANE)
J13 (BACKPLANE)
J3 (BACKPLANE)
J5
VIDEO
INTERFACE
J3 BOARD
J1
CPU BOARD
MOUNTING
SCREWS (3X)
J2
J2
J3
CPU
BOARD
J8
J5
DISK
DRIVE
J9
BATTERY
(LOCATED ON LOWER
PC BOARD)
CPU ASSEMBLY
CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREWS (2X)
SV40917
TOP VIEW OF O.R.DATA MANAGER CPU ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-44: O.R. DATA MANAGER CPU ASSEMBLY CONNECTIONS
4-136
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.44.10.2
Remove the three CPU board mounting screws and
carefully set the board aside.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the battery in its proper orientation,
as reversed polarity could damage the CPU circuitry.
4.44.10.3
Remove the battery from its holder and install a
replacement battery.
4.44.10.4
Mount the CPU board to the CPU assembly with the
three screws that were previously removed, and reconnect the ribbon cables to J8 and J9 on the CPU
board.
4.44.11 Install the replacement ORDM CPU assembly into the ventilator
box. Feed the cables up through the hole into the monitor box and
around the right side of the backplane.
4.44.12 Join the ORDM keyboard floating connector (P7-P8), and the power
wire harness floating connector (P2-P1). Connect the remaining
ORDM cables to backplane connectors J3, J13, and J14.
4.44.13 Reinstall the monitor box cover and restore all connections to the
patient interface panel.
4.44.14 Carefully slide the CPU assembly into position in the ventilator
box and fasten the captive mounting screws.
4.44.15 Replace the ventilator box right side front panel and secure it with
its four mounting screws.
4.44.16 Insert the O.R. DATA MANAGER Program Disk into the disk
drive. Restore power to the machine and set the System Power
switch to ON.
4.44.17 Follow the ORDM boot information that appears on the Remote
Display.
4.44.18 Perform the PMS procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-137
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
4.45
NM4
O.R. DATA MANAGER Sub-Assembly (later machines)
The O.R. DATA MANAGER sub-assembly is located behind the right front
ventilator box cover. Replacement of the ORDM requires removal of the
monitor box cover and disconnecting the ORDM cables. The ORDM can then
be withdrawn from the front of the ventilator box for access to the
remaining cables. Figure 4-45 shows the ORDM mounting and cable
connection arrangement.
4.45.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.45.2
Remove any disk from the disk drive.
CAUTION:
Use ESD protection when handling the ORDM sub-assembly.
4.45.3
Disconnect all cables from the patient interface panel on the left
side of the monitor box.
4.45.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover, and carefully
lift the cover from the monitor box.
4.45.5
Disconnect the ORDM cables from backplane connectors J3, J13,
and J14.
4.45.6
Disconnect the ORDM Datagrip cable from Datagrip PCB J3
(located on the front of the backplane).
4.45.7
Disconnect the power wire harness floating connector.
4.45.8
Disconnect the keyboard cable floating connector.
4.45.9
Remove the right front ventilator box cover.
On later machines with an AV-2 ventilator, remove the two screws
securing the right end of the ORDM front bezel. Pull the right side
of the bezel outward, slide it to the right until the locking tab on
the left side of the bezel is clear of its receptacle, and remove the
bezel.
4.45.10 Loosen the two captive mounting screws securing the ORDM subassembly to the ventilator box.
4-138
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
ORDM POWER
CONNECTOR
TOP VIEW OF
MONITOR BOX
KEYBOARD
CABLE
CONNECTOR
CUT-AWAY VIEW OF
VENTILATOR BOXORDM COMPARTMENT
DATAGRIP PCB J3
SYSTEM INTERFACE
BOARD
CAPTIVE MOUNTING
SCREWS
ORDM SUB-ASSEMBLY
REAR VIEW OF
BACKPLANE
CIRCUIT BOARD
J3
J13
J14
J19
J40
TO ORDM CPU J2
TO ORDM
SYSTEM INTERFACE
BOARD J4
TO ORDM CPU J3
KEYBOARD CABLE
NETWORK
CABLE
J2
REAR VIEW OF
SYSTEM INTERFACE
BOARD
J5
J9
J1
SV49040
Figure 4-45: ORDM SUB-ASSEMBLY CONNECTIONS
Rev. A
4-139
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
4.45.11 Carefully pull the ORDM sub-assembly from the ventilator box
while feeding the previously disconnected cables down from the
monitor box.
As the ORDM is pulled out, disconnect the network cable from J9
on the system interface board.
4.45.12 Transfer the backplane, power and Datagrip cables to the
replacement ORDM sub-assembly.
4.45.13 Connect the network cable to J9 on the replacement ORDM system
interface board. Feed the ORDM cables up into the monitor box
while sliding the ORDM sub-assembly into place in the ventilator
box.
4.45.14 When the ORDM sub-assembly is correctly positioned, tighten its
captive mounting screws to secure it to the ventilator box.
4.45.15 Connect the power wire harness at the floating connector.
4.45.16 Connect the floating keyboard cable connector. Route the power
wire harness and the keyboard cable through the cable clamps on
the backplane assembly.
4.45.17 Connect the ORDM Datagrip cable to J3 on the Datagrip PCB
(located on the front of the backplane).
4.45.18 Connect the ORDM cables to J3, J13 and J14 on the backplane.
4.45.19 Reinstall the right front ventilator box cover.
4.45.20 Reinstall the monitor box cover and restore all connections to the
patient interface panel.
4.45.21 Insert the O.R. DATA MANAGER Program Disk into the disk
drive. Restore power to the machine and turn the System Power
switch to ON.
4.45.22 Follow the ORDM boot information that appears on the Remote
Display.
4.45.23 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
4-140
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.46
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Keyboard
The keyboard is mounted on a pull-out tray assembly located just below the
table top of the anesthesia equipment cabinet. The keys are covered by a
polyurethane shield formed to fit over the keys. This shield is held in place
by a self-adhesive strip around its perimeter and can be replaced without
removing the keyboard from the tray. Figure 4-46 shows the keyboard
assembly sequence. Following are the steps needed for removal and
replacement of the keyboard.
4.46.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
4.46.2
Pull the keyboard tray out to its fully extended position, and
carefully remove the polyurethane shield by separating its
adhesive perimeter from the keyboard faceplate.
4.46.3
Remove the four faceplate retaining screws.
4.46.4
Remove the three drawer lip retaining screws and lift the faceplate
from the keyboard.
4.46.5
Disconnect the cable from the keyboard and carefully lift the
keyboard from the pull-out tray.
4.46.6
Carefully lower the replacement keyboard into the pull-out tray
and connect the cable.
4.46.7
Place the faceplate over the keyboard and install the four faceplate
retaining screws.
4.46.8
Install the three drawer lip retaining screws.
4.46.9
Fit a new polyurethane shield over the keys and press its adhesive
perimeter firmly onto the faceplate.
4.46.10 Perform the PMS procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
4-141
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
POLYURETHANE
SHIELD
FACEPLATE
FACEPLATE
RETAINING
SCREWS (4X)
CONNECTOR
PULL-OUT
TRAY
KEYBOARD
DRAWER LIP
RETAINING SCREWS (3X)
FKB
Figure 4-46: KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
4-142
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.47
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
Auxiliary Oxygen Flow Meter
Old and new style auxiliary oxygen flowmeters are attached to the side of
the machine’s flowmeter housing by two screws - accessible from inside the
housing. Later installations of the new style auxiliary oxygen flowmeter
have a stud and nut arrangement for mounting. A flexible O2 supply tube
from the flowmeter connects to a hose barb fitting at the system power
switch. Figure 4-47 shows a typical mounting and tubing arrangement.
4.47.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and close all cylinder valves.
4.47.2
Press the O2 Flush button to drain oxygen pressure from the
system.
4.47.3
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove AC power
from the machine.
4.47.4
Remove the back cover from the flowmeter housing.
4.47.5
Cut the tie strap on the flexible tube at the system power switch,
and remove the tube.
4.47.6
Remove the screws (or nuts) securing the auxiliary O2 flowmeter,
and remove the flowmeter.
4.47.7
Position the replacement flowmeter at the side of the flowmeter
housing (feed the flex tubing through the clearance hole) and
secure the auxiliary O2 flowmeter with the two screws (or nuts)
that were previously removed.
4.47.8
Connect the flex tubing to the hose barb fitting behind the
Clippard valve, and secure it with a tie strap.
4.47.9
Reinstall the flowmeter housing back cover.
4.47.10 Connect the pipeline hoses and restore AC power to the machine.
4.47.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. J
4-143
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
MOUNTING SCREW (2X)
(USED WITH EARLIER
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT)
10
8
6
PRESS-ON
HOSE CLAMP
4
2
FLEX TUBING
AUXILIARY
OXYGEN
KEP HEX NUT
AUXILIARY O2
FLOWMETER
(NEW STYLE ILLUSTRATED)
TIE STRAP
HOSE BARB
FITTING
MACHINES WITH
LATER STYLE
CHANNEL
FLEX TUBING
TIE STRAP
SV50547
Figure 4-47: AUXILIARY O2 FLOWMETER
4-144
Rev. J
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
4.48
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
PEEP Valve Magnet Assembly Replacement
The PEEP valve magnet assembly removal and replacement is outlined in
the following procedure. Figure 4-33 shows the knob and magnet assembly
details.
NOTE: Some older PEEP valve assemblies require the use of a tamperproof 5/56 hex key (P/N S010056).
4.48.1
Loosen the two set screws on the block, at each side of the PEEP
knob using a 5/64 hex key. Back these screws out until they are
flush with the block to allow proper removal of the knob assembly.
4.48.2
Using a flat head screw driver, carefully pry the knob and magnet
assembly away from the block, and remove the assembly.
4.48.3
Remove the four or six screws securing the retaining ring on the
knob and magnet assembly, and remove the retaining ring.
4.48.4
Remove the magnet assembly from the knob and discard the
magnet in an appropriate manner.
4.48.5
Insert the new magnet assembly into the knob.
On new style knobs, make sure the magnet’s dowel pin engages the
slots in the knob. If the magnet is not oriented correctly there will
be freeplay in the knob before it turns the magnet.
4.48.6
Reinstall the retaining ring and secure it with the screws that
were previously removed.
4.48.7
Turn the set screws into the PEEP block until you can just see
them from the inside of the block.
4.48.8
Apply a thin coat of high vacuum grease to the O-rings on the
magnet assembly to aid in its installation.
4.48.9
Align the holes of the magnet assembly with the set screw holes,
and install the knob & magnet assembly into the PEEP block.
4.48.10 Slowly tighten the set screws. If the holes are lined up correctly.
you will be able to tighten the set screws several turns until they
stop. If you experience resistance, STOP tightening the set screw to
prevent damage to the magnet assembly. Re-align the magnet
assembly and tighten the set screw correctly.
4.48.11 Perform the PMS procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. Z
4-145
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
M A G N E T A S S E M B L Y
O -R IN G
O -R IN G
R E T A IN IN G R IN G
S C R E W S
D O W E L P IN
R E T A IN IN G
R IN G
S L O T S
R E A R V IE W
O F K N O B
S E T S C R E W
(2 X )
Figure 4-48: PEEP Valve Magnet Assembly Replacement
4-146
Rev. Z
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
5.0
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
Equipment Required:
Rev. J
--
Test Gauge for setting cylinder pressure regulators,
NAD Part No. S000063A
--
Oxygen Monitor for adjusting oxygen ratio controller
--
Torque wrench for setting boom arm tension
--
Calibration Gas Adapter, NAD Part No. 4110716
--
Calibration Gas Cylinder, NAD Part No. 4110599 or 4110599-001
--
Certified sample gas cylinder for Multispec accuracy check
--
Flowmeter Test Stand, NAD Part No. S000058
--
Nellcor® model PT-2500 Pocket Tester for SpO2 calibration check
--
Test fixture with Luer fittings, TEE connector, and pressure gauge,
for NIBP inflation pressure test
--
Test Hose, freshgas outlet to expiratory valve, for respiratory
volume monitor calibration
--
Test fixture with breathing pressure line connector, TEE connector,
gauge, and inflation device, for breathing pressure monitor
calibration
--
Variable Flow Restrictor, NAD Part No. 4107995
--
7/64 in. hex wrench for display arm friction adjustment
5-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.1
NM4
Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment (except CO2)
5.1.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to
ON.
5.1.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
5.1.3
Set the oxygen flow to 4 liters per min.
5.1.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
5.1.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve. Close all of the flow control valves and
press the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
5.1.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.1.7
Remove the table top from the machine and remove the top cabinet
drawer. Pull the writing tray out out to its fully extended position.
NOTE: Minimum cylinder pressures for this adjustment shall be:
N2O & CO2: 600 psi; O2, Air, He, He/O2, N2: 1000 psi.
5.1.8
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter regulator output line,
and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
5.1.9
Connect a test gauge to the TEE fitting.
NOTE: For gases other than O2, the O2 cylinder valve must be open to
allow other gases to flow. For N2O regulator adjustment, open the
N2O flow control valve completely; then open the O2 flow control
valve until the N2O flow reaches 4 L/min.
5.1.10
Open the cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to ON.
5.1.11
Set the O2 flow to 4 L/min. (also set the N20 or other gas flow to 4
L/min. if these regulators are being adjusted).
5.1.12
Remove the acorn nut on the bottom of the regulator to expose the
adjusting screw. For N2O, turn the screw until the test gauge
indicates 46 psi. (50 psi for CSA machines.) For O2 and other
gases, use the compensated regulator output setting based on the
cylinder pressure given in the following table.
5-2
Rev. X
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
CAUTION: Based on information supplied by the cylinder regulator manufacturer,
when the regulator is used for gases other than N2O or CO2, its output pressure
will decrease 0.5 psi for every 100 psi increase in cylinder pressure above 1000 psi.
Currently, these regulators are calibrated at 47 psi with a cylinder supply of 1000
psi. If a 2000 psi cylinder is then installed, the regulator output will be 42 psi. This
change in output must be compensated for to provide accurate performance
throughout the cylinder’s working range.
NOTE: Cylinder pressure compensation for the N2O regulator is not required.
Cylinder
Pressure (psi)
Compensated Regulator
Output Setting (psi)
Compensated Regulator
Output Tolerances (-4, +2)
2000
42 (*45)
38 - 44 (*41 - 47)
1800
43 (*46)
39 - 45 (*42 - 48)
1600
44 (*47)
40 - 46 (*43 - 49)
1400
45 (*48)
41 - 47 (*44 - 50)
1200
46 (*49)
42 - 48 (*45 - 51)
1000
47 (*50)
43 - 49 (*46 - 52)
* Canada Settings
NOTE:
If the O2 cylinder regulator is adjusted according to the chart,
perform the following test to verify that the Lo O2 supply alarm is
not activated during ventilation.
Open the O2 cylinder valve, install a breathing circuit with test lung to absorber,
and make the following settings:
MAN/AUTO selector to AUTO
Ventilator:
FREQUENCY: 10 BPM
I:E Ratio: 1:2
Tidal Volume: 1400 mL
PLC: MAX
INSP FLOW: HIGH
Set the Fresh Gas flow to 10 L/min.
Turn on the ventilator. While the ventilator is cycling, press the O2 flush button
and verify that the Lo O2 Supply alarm is not activated. If the alarm is activated,
refer to Section 5.2 for Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment.
Rev. X
5-2A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
5.1.13
Replace the acorn nut on the bottom of the regulator.
5.1.14
Close the cylinder valve and allow pressure to drain from the
system.
5.1.15
Close all of the flow control valves and set the System Power
switch to STANDBY.
5.1.16
Disconnect the test gauge from the TEE fitting and replace the
plug in the fitting.
5.1.17
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
5.1.18
Replace the top drawer in the cabinet.
5.1.19
Connect the pipeline hoses.
5.1.20
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-2B
Rev. X
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
TOP VIEW WITH
TABLE TOP REMOVED
O2 CYLINDER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
N2O CYLINDER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
SET
SCREWS
AIR OR OPTIONAL
3RD GAS CYLINDER
PRESSURE REGULATOR
TEST GAUGE
CONNECTION
(TYPICAL)
SIDE VIEW
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW
SV20342
ACORN NUT
Figure 5-1: CYLINDER PRESSURE REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT
Rev. A
5-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.1A
NM4
CO2 Cylinder Pressure Regulator Adjustment
5.1.1.A
Perform Steps 5.1.1 thru 5.1.7.
5.1.2.A
Open the CO2 cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to
ON.
5.1.3.A
Fully open the CO2 flow control valve.
5.1.4.A
Remove the acorn nut on the bottom of the CO2 regulator to expose
the adjusting screw. Turn the screw until the CO2 flowmeter
indicates 550 ml/min.
5.1.5.A
Replace the acorn nut on the bottom of the regulator.
5.1.6.A
Close the cylinder valve and allow pressure to drain from the
system.
5.1.7.A
Close the flow control valve and set the System Power switch to
STANDBY.
5.1.8.A
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
5.1.9.A
Replace the top drawer in the cabinet.
5.1.10.A Connect the pipeline hoses.
5.1.11.A Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-4
Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
5.2
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment (earlier machines)
5.2.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to
ON.
5.2.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
5.2.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
5.2.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
5.2.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
5.2.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.2.7
Remove the flowmeter housing rear cover. Remove the table top
and pull the writing or keyboard tray out to its fully extended
position.
5.2.8
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter O2 regulator output
line, and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
5.2.9
Connect a dedicated O2 test gauge to the TEE fitting.
5.2.10
Open the O2 cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to
ON.
5.2.11
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
5.2.12
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
5.2.13
As the pressure drops, the O2 SUPPLY alarm should activate when
the pressure is between 40 and 34 psi as shown on the test gauge.
5.2.14
If the alarm activates when the pressure is below 34 psi, turn the
adjustment wheel to increase the setpoint (see illustration), repeat
the test and adjust as necessary to bring the set point into the
correct range.
If the alarm activates when the pressure is above 40 psi, turn the
adjustment wheel to decrease the setpoint (see illustration), repeat
the test and adjust as necessary to bring the set point into the
correct range.
Rev. A
5-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
REAR VIEW, FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
O2 LINES
ALARM
WIRES
INCREASE
SETPOINT
ADJUSTMENT
WHEEL
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE
ALARM SWITCH
OSPAS
Figure 5-2: O2 ALARM SWITCH (earlier machines)
5-6
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
Rev. A
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.2.15
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.2.16
Disconnect the test gauge and replace the plug in the regulator
line TEE fitting.
5.2.17
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
5.2.18
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
5.2.19
Connect the pipeline hoses.
5.2.20
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.3
NM4
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch Adjustment
(later machines with switch on alarm channel)
5.3.1
Disconnect all pipeline hoses and set the System Power switch to
ON.
5.3.2
Close all cylinder valves except the O2 valve.
5.3.3
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
5.3.4
Open the other gas flow control valves to drain pressure from the
system.
5.3.5
Close the O2 cylinder valve, and close the flow control valves. Press
the O2 Flush valve to drain oxygen pressure from the system.
5.3.6
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.3.7
Remove the rear cover from the flowmeter housing. Remove the
table top and pull the writing or keyboard tray out to its fully
extended position.
5.3.8
Locate the TEE fitting in the ¼ in. diameter O2 regulator output
line, and remove the plug from the TEE fitting.
5.3.9
Connect a dedicated O2 test gauge to the TEE fitting.
5.3.10
Open the O2 cylinder valve and set the System Power switch to
ON.
5.3.11
Set the oxygen flow to 5 liters per min.
5.2.12
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
5.3.12
As the pressure drops, the O2 SUPPLY alarm should activate when
the pressure is between 40 and 34 psi as shown on the test gauge.
5.3.13
If the alarm activates when the pressure is below 34 psi or above
40 psi, turn the adjustment wheel (see illustration), repeat the test
and adjust as necessary to bring the set point into the correct
range.
5.3.14
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.3.15
Disconnect the test gauge and replace the plug in the regulator
line TEE fitting.
5-8
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
J2
J1
REAR VIEW OF
ALARM CHANNEL,
FLOWMETER HOUSING
REAR COVER REMOVED
J3
J4
ADJUSTMENT WHEEL
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PRESSURE
ALARM SWITCH
INCREASE SETPOINT
DECREASE SETPOINT
SV50552
Figure 5-3: OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH (later machines)
Rev. A
5-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.3.16
Replace the table top and its retaining screws.
5.3.17
Replace the rear cover and its retaining screws.
5.3.18
Connect the pipeline hoses.
5.3.19
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-10
NM4
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
5.4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller (ORMC) Adjustment
5.4.1
Remove the rear cover of the vapor box.
5.4.2
Connect a calibrated oxygen monitor to the Freshgas Outlet.
5.4.3
Disconnect the pipeline hoses.
5.4.4
Open the oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinder valves.
5.4.5
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.4.6
Close the O2 flow control valve.
5.4.7
Open the N2O flow control valve to its counter-clockwise stop.
5.4.8
If there is no nitrous oxide flow, proceed to Step 5.4.10.
5.4.9
If there is nitrous oxide flow, loosen setscrew E and move the cam
mounting bracket to the right until the nitrous oxide flow stops.
Tighten setscrew E.
5.4.10
Slowly open the O2 flow control valve.
5.4.11
If the nitrous oxide starts to flow when the oxygen flow is between
200 and 300 ml per minute, proceed to Step 5.4.14.
5.4.12
If the nitrous oxide does not start to flow when the oxygen flow is
between 200 and 300 ml per minute, loosen setscrew E and move
the cam mounting bracket to the left until nitrous oxide flow
starts. Tighten setscrew E.
5.4.13
Repeat steps 5.4.6 thru 5.4.12 until no further adjustment of the
cam mounting bracket is needed.
5.4.14
Adjust the oxygen flow to a point where the nitrous oxide
flowmeter indicates 10 liters per minute.
NOTE: Steps marked with an asterisk (*) do not apply to later model
machines that do not have the O2/N2O ratio lamp on the alarm
channel.
Rev. A
5-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
NARKOMED 4
REAR VIEW
N2O TUBING
O2 TUBING
N20
MPL SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT
(TURN CLOCKWISE
TO DECREASE
SETPOINT)
N20
A
CAM
MOUNTING
BRACKET
OXYGEN RATIO
MONITOR/CONTROLLER
E
SWITCH MOUNT
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT CAM
(TURN CLOCKWISE
TO CLOSE CONTACTS)
H
SV40311
Figure 5-4: OXYGEN RATIO MONITOR/CONTROLLER ADJUSTMENTS
5-12
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
5.4.15
The oxygen concentration should be between 21% and 29% oxygen.
*
5.4.16
If the yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel is
lighted, proceed to step 5.4.20.
*
5.4.17
If the yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel is not
lighted, loosen setscrew H and turn the switch adjustment cam
until it is pointing downward.
*
5.4.18
Loosen setscrew A and move the switch mount until it is nearly
touching the switch adjustment cam. Tighten setscrew A.
*
5.4.19
Turn the switch adjustment cam clockwise until the contacts close
and the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp is lighted. Tighten setscrew H.
*
5.4.20
Close the N2O flow control valve.
*
5.4.21
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1 liter per minute.
*
5.4.22
Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
*
5.4.23
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel should
light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow of nitrous oxide.
*
5.4.24
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1.5 liters per minute.
*
5.4.25
Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
*
5.4.26
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel should
light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow of nitrous oxide.
5.4.27
Adjust the oxygen flow to 2 liters per minute.
5.4.28
Slowly open the N2O flow control valve.
5.4.29
The yellow O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp on the alarm panel should
light as soon as the ORMC limits the flow of nitrous oxide.
5.4.30
Close the oxygen flow control valve. The nitrous oxide flow should
decrease proportionally, and the oxygen concentration should
remain between 21% and 29% oxygen.
*
Rev. A
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
5.4.31
The nitrous oxide flow should stop when the flow of oxygen is
between 200 and 300 ml per minute.
*
5.4.32
If the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp turns off when the nitrous oxide
flow drops to between 100 and 200 ml per minute, proceed to Step
5.4.34.
*
5.4.33
If the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp does not turn off when the
nitrous oxide flow drops to between 100 and 200 ml per minute,
adjust the MPL switch until the O2/N2O FLOW RATIO lamp turns
off.
5.4.34
Close the N2O flow control valve and set the System Power switch
to STANDBY.
5.4.35
Replace the rear cover of the vapor box.
5.4.36
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-14
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
5.5
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
Oxygen Ratio Controller (ORC) Adjustment
NOTE: See Procedure 5.5A for low flow ORC (P/N 4113229) adjustment.
Rev. F
5.5.1
Remove the rear cover of the flowmeter housing.
5.5.2
Connect a calibrated oxygen monitor to the fresh gas outlet.
5.5.3
Disconnect the pipeline hoses.
5.5.4
Open the oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinder valves.
5.5.5
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.5.6
Close the O2 and N2O flow control valves.
5.5.7
Set the O2 flow control valve to 10 l/min.
5.5.8
Set the N2O flow control valve to 10 l/min.
5.5.9
Set the O2 flow control valve to 800 ml/min for one (1) minute.
Verify that the O2 concentration indicates 21% to 29% O2.
5.5.10
Decrease the oxygen flow rate.
5.5.11
If the nitrous oxide does not stop when the oxygen flow is between
325 and 350 ml per minute, loosen the adjusting screw locknut and
turn the adjusting screw (counter-clockwise to decrease N2O flow,
clockwise to increase N2O flow). Tighten the locknut.
5.5.12
Repeat steps 5.5.6 thru 5.5.11 until no further adjustment is
needed.
5.5.13
Adjust the oxygen flow to a point where the nitrous oxide
flowmeter indicates 10 liters per minute.
5.5.14
The oxygen concentration should be between 21% and 29% oxygen.
5.5.15
Slowly decrease the oxygen flow to 800 ml/min. The nitrous oxide
flow should decrease proportionally, and the oxygen concentration
should remain between 21% and 29% oxygen.
5.5.16
Reduce the O2 flow to 500 ml/min. Verify that the N2O flow is
greater than or equal to 600 ml/min.
5-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
REAR VIEW OF FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
ADJUSTING
SCREW
LOCKNUT
ORC
ASSEMBLY
SV50503
Figure 5-5: OXYGEN RATIO CONTROLLER
5-16
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
Rev. D
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.5.17
The nitrous oxide flow should stop when the flow of oxygen is
between 250 and 400 ml per minute.
5.5.18
Close the N2O flow control valve and turn the System Power
switch to STANDBY.
5.5.19
Reconnect the pipeline hoses.
5.5.20
Replace the flowmeter housing rear cover.
5.5.21
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
5.5A Low Flow Oxygen Ratio Controller (ORC) Adjustment
5.5.1A
Remove the rear cover of the flowmeter housing.
5.5.2A
Connect a calibrated oxygen monitor to the fresh gas outlet.
5.5.3A
Disconnect the pipeline hoses.
5.5.4A
Pinch the N2O bypass line on the ORC. See Figure 5-5A.
5.5.5A
Open the oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinder valves.
5.5.6A
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.5.7A
Close the O2 and N2O flow control valves.
5.5.8A
Set the O2 flow control valve to 10 l/min.
5.5.9A
Set the N2O flow control valve to 10 l/min.
5.5.10A Set the O2 flow control valve to 800 ml/min for one (1) minute.
Verify that the O2 concentration indicates 21% to 29% O2.
5.5.11A Decrease the oxygen flow rate.
5.5.12A If the nitrous oxide flow does not stop when the oxygen flow rate is
between 325 and 350 ml per minute, loosen the adjusting screw
locknut and turn the adjusting screw (counter-clockwise to
decrease N2O flow, clockwise to increase N2O flow). Tighten the
locknut.
5.5.13A Repeat steps 5.5.7A thru 5.5.12A until no further adjustment is
needed.
5.5.14A Adjust the oxygen flow to a point where the nitrous oxide
flowmeter indicates 10 liters per minute.
5.5.15A The oxygen concentration should be between 21% and 29% oxygen.
5.5.16A Slowly decrease the oxygen flow to 800 ml/min. The nitrous oxide
flow should decrease proportionally, and the oxygen concentration
should remain between 21% and 29% oxygen.
5.5.17A Reduce the O2 flow to 500 ml/min. Verify that the N2O flow is
greater than or equal to 600 ml/min.
5-17A
Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.5.18A The nitrous oxide flow should stop when the flow of oxygen is
between 250 and 400 ml per minute.
5.5.19A Un-pinch the N2O bypass line on the ORC.
5.5.20A Close the O2 flow control valve, and fully open the N2O flow control
valve. Verify that the O2 concentration is 22 - 31%.
5.5.21A Close the N2O flow control valve and turn the System Power
switch to STANDBY.
5.5.22A Reconnect the pipeline hoses.
5.5.23A Replace the flowmeter housing rear cover.
5.5.24A Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
ADJUSTING
SCREW
LOCKNUT
LOW FLOW
ORC ASSEMBLY
N2O BYPASS
LINE
SV49042
Figure 5-5A: LOW FLOW OXYGEN RATIO CONTROLLER
Rev. F
5-17B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.6
NM4
Boom Arm Tension Adjustments
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
Boom Arm Mounting Hinge Adjustment:
5.6.1.1
If the anesthesia equipment has an optional manual
sphygmomanometer gauge, disconnect its tubing and
remove the gauge by unscrewing its retaining ring. If
the anesthesia equipment does not have a manual
sphygmomanometer gauge, remove the cap covering
the threads of the gauge mount.
5.6.1.2
Loosen the locking setscrew in the boom arm mounting
block.
5.6.1.3
Tighten the boom arm mounting screw to a torque of
190 to 210 inch pounds, then tighten the locking
setscrew.
5.6.1.4
Replace the cap covering the gauge mount threads, or
replace the manual sphygmomanometer gauge if the
unit is so equipped.
Boom Arm Center Hinge Adjustment:
5.6.2.1
Remove the upper and lower plastic caps to expose the
recessed hinge screws and nuts.
5.6.2.2
While holding each nut from the bottom with a socket
wrench, tighten the center hinge screw to a torque of
70 to 80 inch pounds, and the hinge mounting screw to
a torque of 85 to 95 inch pounds.
5.6.2.3
Replace the upper and lower plastic caps.
Remote Display Torque Adjustment:
5.6.3.1
Remove the plastic cap at the end of the boom arm to
expose the remote display assembly mounting screw.
5.6.3.2
While holding the remote display assembly, tighten the
mounting screw to a torque of 3 to 5 foot pounds.
5.6.3.3
Replace the plastic cap at the end of the boom arm.
5-18
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
CENTER HINGE
SCREW
HINGE
MOUNTING
SCREW
LOCKING
SETSCREW
REMOTE
DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING SCREW
GAUGE MOUNT
BOOM ARM
HINGE SCREW
(INSIDE GAUGE
MOUNT)
SV40023
Figure 5-6: BOOM ARM TENSION ADJUSTMENTS
Rev. A
5-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.7
NM4
Display Arm Tension Adjustments
5.7.1
Display Arm Hinge Adjustment:
5.7.1.1
Loosen the friction adjustment screw on the underside
of the display arm (no more than one turn). (It may be
necessary to raise or lower the arm to align the screw
with the access hole.) See Figure 5-7.
5.7.1.2
Raise and release the arm, and verify that it returns to
an approximately horizontal position.
Lower and release tha arm, and verify that it returns
to an approximately horizontal position.
Contact the NAD Service Department if the display
arm fails to return to a near-horizontal position.
5.7.1.3
5.7.2
Machine Mount Joint:
5.7.2.1
5.7.3
With the arm in a horizontal position, slowly re-tighten
the friction adjustment screw until the arm stays in
position when raised or lowered. (Do not over-tighten
the screw as this will cause the arm to loose tension in
the raised position.)
If there is excessive free swing at the machine mount
joint, tighten the shoulder screw shown in the
illustration. The correct torque setting is 75 in. lbs.
Datagrip and Remote Display Assembly Torque Adjustment:
5.7.3.1
Remove the plastic cap at the end of the display arm to
expose the remote display assembly mounting screw.
5.7.3.2
While holding the remote display assembly, tighten the
mounting screw to a torque of 3 to 5 foot pounds.
5.7.3.3
Replace the plastic cap at the end of the display arm.
5-20
Rev. G
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
SHOULDER SCREW (MACHINE MOUNT
JOINT FRICTION ADJUSTMENT)
FRICTION ADJUSTMENT
SCREW ON UNDERSIDE
OF DISPLAY ARM
(USE 7/64 in. HEX WRENCH)
SV63001
Figure 5-7: DISPLAY ARM ADJUSTMENTS
Rev. G
5-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.8
NM4
Oxygen Sensor Zero Calibration
5.8.1
Remove the oxygen sensor assembly from the inspiratory valve
dome.
5.8.2
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.8.3
Enter the main service screen by simultaneously pressing the
MONITOR key, SYSTEM CONFIG key, and the Selection DIAL.
5.8.4
Touch the MONITORS key on the screen to bring up the second
column of touch keys.
5.8.5
Touch the OXYGEN key on the screen.
5.8.6
Remove the sensor capsule from its housing.
5.8.7
Allow time for the displayed oxygen cell values to stabilize.
5.8.8
Touch the STORE ZERO key on the screen.
5.8.9
Disconnect the sensor cable from the interface panel.
5.8.10
Replace the sensor capsule in its housing.
5.8.11
Install the oxygen sensor assembly in the inspiratory valve dome.
5.8.12
Reconnect the sensor cable to the interface panel.
5.8.13
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, then return it to the
ON position to retain the new value.
5-22
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
SV20316
SENSOR HOUSING
RECEPTACLE
ON INTERFACE
PANEL
SENSOR CAPSULE
SENSOR HOUSING
COVER
INSPIRATORY
VALVE DOME
INSPIRATORY
VALVE DOME
PLUG
SENSOR
CORD
CONNECTOR
CURRENT CELL A: 3
CURRENT CELL B: 6
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
- REMOVE FUEL CELL FROM SENSOR HOUSING.
- LET CURRENT CELL VALUES STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE ZERO" KEY TO ENTER
CURRENT VALUES AS CALIBRATED VALUES.
- DISCONNECT O2 SENSOR HOUSING CABLE
BEFORE RE-INSTALLING FUEL CELL.
- RE-INSTALL FUEL CELL.
- RE-CONNECT CABLE.
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
STORED CELL A ZERO: 3
STORED CELL B ZERO: 6
STORE
ZERO
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 5-8: OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTIONS AND CALIBRATION SCREEN
SCREEN
Rev. E
5-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.9
NM4
Breathing Pressure Monitor Calibration
5.9.1
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.9.2
Enter the main service screen by simultaneously pressing the
MONITOR key, SYSTEM CONFIG key, and the Selection DIAL.
5.9.3
Touch the MONITORS key on the screen to bring up the second
column of touch keys.
5.9.4
Touch the PRESSURE key on the screen.
5.9.5
Disconnect the breathing pressure sample line from the absorber.
5.9.6
Allow the current pressure value displayed to stabilize, and touch
the STORE ZERO key on the screen.
5.9.7
Connect a test fixture having a TEE connector, an external gauge,
and an inflation device, to the breathing pressure line.
5.9.8
Pressurize the line to 50 cm H2O as shown on the external gauge.
5.9.9
Allow the current pressure value displayed to stabilize, and touch
the STORE SPAN key on the screen.
5.9.10
Remove the test fixture from the from the breathing pressure
sample line, and connect the line to the absorber.
5.9.11
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, then return it to the
ON position to retain the new values.
5-24
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
CONNECTION
ON VPO PANEL
ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
TOP VIEW
BREATHING
PRESSURE
TEST
FIXTURE
CURRENT PRESSURE VALUE : 205
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE PRESSURE SAMPLE LINE FROM
ABSORBER; EXPOSE TO AIR.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE ZERO" KEY TO ENTER THE
CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION ZERO.
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE PRESSURE SAMPLE LINE FROM
ABSORBER.
- APPLY 50 CM H2O CONSTANT PRESSURE AT
SAMPLE LINE, VERIFIED BY A KNOWN,
CALIBRATED METER.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE SPAN" KEY TO ENTER THE
CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION SPAN.
STORED ZERO: 244
STORED SPAN: 540
STORE
SPAN
STORE
ZERO
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 5-9: BREATHING PRESSURE MONITOR CALIBRATION SETUP AND
SCREEN
Rev. A
5-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
*
5.10
NM4
Respiratory Flow Monitor Calibration
5.10.1
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.10.2
Enter the main service screen by simultaneously pressing the
MONITOR key, SYSTEM CONFIG key, and the Selection DIAL.
5.10.3
Touch the MONITORS key on the screen to bring up the second
column of touch keys.
5.10.4
Touch the RESP FLOW key on the screen.
5.10.5
Remove the 22 mm hose connected to the expiratory valve, and
remove the Spiromed sensor from the absorber.
5.10.6
Allow the current flow value displayed to stabilize, and touch the
STORE ZERO key on the screen.
5.10.7
Disconnect the absorber freshgas hose from the freshgas outlet of
the machine.
5.10.8
Connect a test hose from the freshgas outlet to the 22 mm
connector on the expiratory valve.
5.10.9
Open the oxygen cylinder valve, and adjust the O2 flow control
valve to achieve a flow rate of 10 liters per minute.
5.10.10 Allow the current flow value displayed to stabilize, and touch the
STORE SPAN key on the screen.
5.10.11 Close the O2 flow control valve, and close the oxygen cylinder
valve.
5.10.12 Disconnect the test hose and connect the absorber freshgas hose to
the freshgas outlet.
5.10.13 Place the Spiromed sensor on the absorber and tighten the sensor
retaining nut. Ensure that the gasket is seated properly.
5.10.14 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, then return it to the
ON position to retain the new values.
5.10.15 Reconnect the 22 mm hose to the expiratory valve.
* This procedure does not apply to units equipped with ultrasonic flow sensor.
5-26
Rev. T
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
EXPIRATORY
VALVE
FRESHGAS
OUTLET
TEST
HOSE
SPIROMED
SENSOR
SENSOR
RETAINING
NUT
RECEPTACLE
ON VPO PANEL
GASKET
EXPIRATORY
VALVE
MOUNT
SENSOR
PLUG
ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
CURRENT FLOW VALUE : 76
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE SPIROMED SENSOR FROM ABSORBER.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE ZERO" KEY TO ENTER THE
CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION ZERO.
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE SPIROMED SENSOR FROM ABSORBER.
- ATTACH A GAS SUPPLY AT INPUT OF SENSOR,
AND A CALIBRATED FLOWMETER AT OUTPUT.
- PROVIDE A STEADY 10 L/MIN FLOW THROUGH
SPIROMED SENSOR.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- TOUCH "STORE SPAN" KEY TO ENTER THE
CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION SPAN.
STORED ZERO: 78
STORED SPAN: 161
STORE
SPAN
STORE
ZERO
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 5-10: RESPIRATORY VOLUME MONITOR CALIBRATION SETUP AND
SCREEN
Rev. A
5-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.11
NM4
SpO2 Monitor Calibration Check - Nellcor®
5.11.1
Set the system Power switch to STANDBY.
5.11.2
Disconnect the SpO2 sensor cable from the Nellcor module, and
plug the Nellcor model PT-2500 Pocket Tester into the module.
5.11.3
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.11.4
Enter the main service screen by simultaneously pressing the
MONITOR key, SYSTEM CONFIG key, and the Selection DIAL.
5.11.5
Touch the MONITORS key on the screen to bring up the second
column of touch keys.
5.11.6
Touch the SpO2 key on the screen.
5.11.7
The red indicator lamp on the PT-2500 should be lighted,
indicating that the tester is working properly.
5.11.8
The screen should display an SpO2 value of 81 ± 1, and a Pulse
value of 61 ± 1 if the machine is equipped with a Nellcor MP-202
pulse oximeter module.
If the machine is equipped with a Nellcor MP-203 pulse oximeter,
the Pulse value displayed should be 40 ± 1.
5.11.9
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.11.10 Disconnect the PT-2500 from the Nellcor module, and connect the
SpO2 sensor cable to the module.
5-28
Rev. U
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NELLCOR
MODULE
LEFT SIDE OF
MONITOR BOX
NELLCOR®PT-2500
POCKET TESTER
SpO2 VALUE :
98
PULSE VALUE :
75
PLETH VALUE :
125
BARGRAPH VALUE : 12
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 5-11: SpO2 CALIBRATION CONNECTIONS AND SCREEN (NELLCOR)
Rev. A
5-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
5.11A SpO2 Monitor Calibration Check - Novametrix
5.11A.1 Plug the SpO2 sensor extension cable into the machine interface.
5.11A.2 Disconnect the finger probe from the extension cable and attach a
Novametrix TB500B sensor simulator to the extension cable.
5.11A.3 Turn the System Power switch to ON. press and hold the Selection
Dial, and simultaneously press the MONITOR and SYSTEM
CONFIG keys to enter the main service screen. Touch the
MONITORS key to bring up a second column of touch keys.
5.11A.4 Touch the SpO2 key on the screen.
5.11A.5 Set the simulator’s Sensor Type switch to 87XX. Set the output
signal to 3 and the saturation to 82%. Turn the simulator ON and
verify that the monitor’s displayed Pulse reading is 60 ±1 BPM and
the SaO2 reading is 82 ±2.
NOTE: Do not rely on the simulator’s low battery LED as an indicator of
sufficient battery power. Replace the battery with a fresh 9 volt
transistor battery if proper measured values are not obtained and
the battery measures ≤8.5 VDC.
5.11A.6 Adjust the simulator’s saturation setting to 100 and verify that the
monitor indicates 99 ±1. Adjust the saturation to 62 and verify
that the monitor indicates 62 ±2.
5.11A.7 Depress the Open Test RED key and verify that the PULSE LO
LED activates, a continuous audible alarm is heard, and a NO OXI
PULSE warning alarm is shown on the central alarm display.
Release the test key. Depress the Open Test INFRARED key and
verify the same alarm results occur as in the previous test.
5.11A.8 Depress both Open Test keys together and verify that the monitors
SaO2 and OXI ALARMS DISABLE indicators activate, a single
audible tone is heard, and OXI SEN DISC advisory alarm is shown
on the central alarm display. Release the Open Test keys.
5.11A.9 Disconnect the simulator and re-connect the finger probe. Attach
the sensor to the operator’s finger and obtain pulse, and oxygen
saturation readings. Disconnect the sensor from the finger. Afther
ten (10) seconds, the Warning message NO OXI PULSE shall
appear on the central alarm display and a continuous audible
alarm shall sound.
5.11A.10
Return the monitor to Standby.
5-29A
Rev. U
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
S V 0 0 4 5 1
L E F T S ID E O F
M O N IT O R B O X
E X T E N S IO N C A B L E
S E N S O R T Y P E
8 6 X X
8 7 X X
O U T P U T
S IG N A L A T T E N U A T IO N
3
O P E N T E S T
R E D
5
6
4
N O V A M E T R IX
7
2
T B 5 0 0 B
S E N S O R
S IM U L A T O R
8
M E D IC A L S Y S T E M S IN C .
9
1
L O W
B A T .
IN F A R E D
S A T U R A T IO N
9 2
E X T E R N A L P O W E R
1 0 0
0
8 2
7 2
6 2
P O W E R
O F F
S V D C 2 5 m A
T B 5 0 0 B S IM U L A T O R
Figure 5-11: (continued) SpO2 CALIBRATION CONNECTIONS (NOVAMETRIX)
Rev. U
5-29B
O N
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.12
NM4
NIBP Inflation Pressure Calibration Check
5.12.1
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.12.2
Enter the main service screen by simultaneously pressing the
MONITOR key, SYSTEM CONFIG key, and the Selection DIAL.
5.12.3
Touch the MONITORS key on the screen to bring up the second
column of touch keys.
5.12.4
Touch the NIBP key on the screen.
5.12.5
Disconnect the BP cuff tubing at the interface panel, and insert a
test fixture TEE assembly with an external pressure gauge.
5.12.6
Wrap the cuff loosely around a cylindrical object and fasten its
closure.
5.12.7
Touch the INFLATE key on the screen.
5.12.8
When the cuff is inflated, the external pressure gauge should read
180 mm Hg.
5.12.9
Touch the STOP key to end the test.
5.12.10 Disconnect the test fixture and connect the BP cuff tubing to the
interface panel.
See Section 6 for inflation time, deflation time, and leakage tests.
5-30
Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
BP CUFF
LUER
FITTING
LEFT SIDE OF
MONITOR BOX
TEST FIXTURE
PRESSURE
GAUGE
REAL TIME PRESSURE : 0
SYSTOLIC
:
130
DIASTOLIC :
78
MEAN
:
98
PULSE
:
75
NIBP
NIBP
-
TAKE
READING
PRESSURE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION:
PLACE A "T" IN LINE WITH THE BP CUFF.
ATTACH A PRESSURE GAUGE AT "T".
TOUCH THE "INFLATE" KEY.
NIBP MODULE WILL INFLATE CUFF TO
180 MM Hg.
VERIFY WITH PRESSURE GAUGE.
TOUCH THE "STOP" KEY TO END THE TEST.
INFLATION, DEFLATION, AND LEAK CHECKS:
REFER TO SERVICE MANUAL FOR PROCEDURES.
INFLATION
CHECK
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
DEFLATION
CHECK
LEAKAGE
CHECK
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
STOP
INFLATE
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 5-12: NIBP INFLATION PRESSURE TEST SETUP AND SCREEN
Rev. A
5-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.13
NM4
Multispec Span and Line Block Calibration
NOTE: Perform the pump flow rate adjustment and the oxygen sensor
ambient air calibration before proceeding with the multispec
calibration.
5.13.1
Multispec Pump Flow Rate Adjustment
5.13.1.1
CAUTION:
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
Do not plug or unplug remote display with power
applied.
5.13.1.2
Disconnect the following items from the patient
interface panel on the left side of the monitor box:
-Remote Display cable
-BP Cuff and BP Gauge lines
-Pulse Oximeter Sensor cable
5.13.1.3
Disconnect the patient sample line.
5.13.1.4
Remove the six screws holding the monitor box cover,
and carefully lift the cover from the monitor box.
5.13.1.5
Connect a test flowmeter to the exhaust port on the
sensor interface panel, and connect the patient sample
line to the disposable reservoir.
5.13.1.6
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.13.1.7
Adjust the flow restrictor (see Figure 5-13) for a
reading of 200 ml/min. on the test flowmeter.
5.13.1.8
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY, and
disconnect the test flowmeter.
5.13.1.9
Replace the monitor box cover.
5-32
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
MO D E L 4 60 0
SA M PL E FL O W
A DJ US T M E NT
( TURN CO UNT ERCL O CKW I S E
TO I NCREASE FLO W)
MODEL 4610
SA MPL E F LO W ADJUS TME NT
( TURN CO UNT ERCL O CKW I S E
TO INCREASE FLO W)
SV 40 031
Figure 5-13: MULTISPEC PUMP FLOW RATE ADJUSTMENT
Rev. A
5-33
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.13.2
NM4
Oxygen Sensor Ambient Air Calibration:
5.13.2.1
Remove the sensor assembly from the inspiratory valve
dome and close off the dome with the inspiratory valve
dome plug. (Do not disassemble the sensor assembly
further.)
5.13.2.2
Expose the sensor to ambient air only (away from any
open part of the breathing system) and allow it to
stabilize for several minutes.
5.13.2.3
When the sensor is exposed only to room air, press the
"MONITOR SETUP" key on the main key panel, then
the "O2 CAL" soft key on the CO2 & O2 display area.
The length of time that the sensor takes to calibrate
depends on the gas mixture to which the sensor had
been exposed prior to calibration. If the sensor had
been exposed to 21% oxygen for greater than one
minute, calibration can take as little as 10 seconds. If
the sensor had been exposed to higher concentrations
of oxygen, calibration may last up to 50 seconds.
Typically, calibration will last less than 30 seconds.
5.13.2.4
When the NARKOMED 4 has completed calibration,
pull the inspiratory valve dome plug and re-insert the
sensor assembly.
5-34
Rev. E
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NOTE: Before attempting a span calibration, perform the following
accuracy test to determine whether calibration is necessary.
5.13.3
Rev. M
Multispec Accuracy Test:
5.13.3.1
Attach a CO2 cylinder adapter (NAD P/N 4110216) to
the CO2 verification gas cylinder (NAD P/N 4107979).
NOTE:
Do not use the calibration gas cylinder, NAD Part No.
4110599 or 4110599-001, to perform the accuracy test.
5.13.3.2
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.13.3.3
Remove the oxygen sensor from the inspiratory valve to
expose the sensor capsule to ambient air.
5.13.3.4
Touch the PAT key on the monitor setup screen.
5.13.3.5
Enter the main service screen by simultaneously
pressing the MONITOR key, SYSTEM CONFIG key, and
the Selection DIAL.
5.13.3.6
Touch the MONITORS key on the screen to bring up
the second column of touch keys.
5.13.3.7
Touch the GAS ANALYZER key on the screen.
5.13.3.8
Wait for a Mode message of "READY".
5.13.3.9
Connect the output of the cylinder adapter to the
sample line on the disposable reservoir on the left side
of the monitor box. Make sure that the Luer-lock
connections are tight.
5.13.3.10
Open the calibration gas cylinder valve so that an
audible flow of gas can be heard.
5-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
LEFT SIDE VIEW
OF MONITOR BOX
LUER-LOCK
CONNECTION
(LOCATED ON BACK
OF CALIBRATION
GAS ADAPTER)
CALIBRATION GAS
ADAPTER VALVE
CALIBRATION
GAS ADAPTER
CALIBRATION
GAS CYLINDER
FLOWMETER
CONTROL
KNOB
Figure 5-14: MULTISPEC CALIBRATION CONNECTIONS
5-36
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.13.3.11
Observe the current values of CO2, N2O, and Agent
displayed on the screen.
When checking the multispec accuracy against a
known standard, the maximum possible error range
must be considered. The total allowable error range is
the summation of the multispec accuracy tolerance, the
noise specification, and the error percentage of the
calibration gas.
For example, if a calibration gas that contains 2 vol %
Enflurane has a stated maximum error percentage of
±2%, one must first calculate the error percentage of
Enflurane in the calibration gas, which is ±2% of 2%,
or 0.04% absolute. Adding this figure to those obtained
from Table 5-1, the maximum possible error range
would be (±0.2) + (±0.1) + (±0.04), or ±0.34 vol %. Since
the known standard contains 2% Enflurane, a
multispec reading for Enflurane that is between 1.66%
and 2.34% is within specifications.
Table 5-1:
5-1 MULTISPEC ACCURACY AND NOISE SPECIFICATIONS
Gas Measurement
Accuracy (full accuracy mode)
Noise
Carbon Dioxide
±2.0 mm Hg (0 to 40 mm Hg)
±2.5 mm Hg (41 to 60 mm Hg)
±4.0 mm Hg (61 to 80 mm Hg)
0.5 mm Hg
2.0 mm Hg
3.0 mm Hg
Nitrous Oxide
±7.5 vol % N2O
3 vol % N2O
Halothane
±0.2 vol % Hal, or 10% of reading*
0.2 vol % Hal
Enflurane
±0.2 vol % Enf, or 10% of reading*
0.1 vol % Enf
Isoflurane
±0.2 vol % Iso, or 10% of reading*
0.1 vol % Iso
* Whichever is greater
Rev. A
5-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
5.13.3.12
Disconnect the sample line from the cylinder adapter
and close the cylinder valve.
5.13.3.13
If the accuracy test produces readings that have
greater than the maximum permissible error range,
proceed to Step 5.13.4. and perform a span calibration.
5.13.3.14
If the readings are within specifications, a span
calibration is not necessary. Proceed to Step 5.13.5.
5-38
Rev. M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.13.4
Span calibration procedure:
5.13.4.1
Mount the calibration gas adapter (NAD P/N 4110716)
on the calibration gas cylinder, (NAD Part No. 4110599
or 4110599-001). See Figure 5-14.
5.13.4.2
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.13.4.3
Remove the oxygen sensor from the inspiratory valve to
expose the sensor capsule to ambient air.
5.13.4.4
Enter the main service screen by simultaneously
pressing the MONITOR key, SYSTEM CONFIG key, and
the Selection DIAL.
5.13.4.5
Touch the MONITORS key on the screen to bring up
the second column of touch keys.
5.13.4.6
Touch the GAS ANALYZER key on the screen.
5.13.4.7
Wait for a Mode message of "READY".
5.13.4.8
Touch the START key. A Status message of "ZERO IN
PROGRESS" will be displayed.
5.13.4.9
Wait for a Status message of "ZERO COMPLETE".
5.13.4.10
Connect the output of the calibration gas adapter to
the sample line on the disposable reservoir on the left
side of the monitor box. Make sure that the Luer-lock
connections are tight.
5.13.4.11
Set the calibration gas flow to 250 ml/min.
5.13.4.12
After the current values stabilize, disconnect the
sample line from the calibration gas adapter and close
the cylinder valve.
5.13.4.13
Touch the CONTINUE key. A Status message "SPAN IN
PROGRESS" will be displayed during the calibration
procedure.
When the span calibration is complete, the message
"PASSED" will be displayed on the screen.
If a "FAILED" message appears, the multispec unit
must be replaced.
Rev. M
5-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
The MODE window on the gas analyzer screen displays the following messages:
INHIBIT during warm-up
READY after 30 minute warm-up
The STATUS window on the gas analyzer screen displays the following messages:
ZERO IN PROGRESS, ZERO COMPLETE, SPAN IN PROGRESS
during calibration
PASSED or FAILED after calibration
NOTE:
CURRENT CO2
CURRENT N2O
CURRENT AGENT
The scrubber bottle replacement instruction is not displayed on
machines having a Model 4610 gas analyzer.
: *INV*
: 10
: *INV*
MODE:
STATUS:
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- WAIT FOR MODE = "READY".
- PERFORM GAS ANALYZER ACCURACY TEST.
- IF TEST FAILS, PERFORM SPAN CAL:
- WITH PATIENT CIRCUIT ENABLED:
- TOUCH "START" KEY,
- WAIT FOR STATUS = "ZERO COMPLETE"
- ATTACH SAMPLE LINE TO CALIBRATION BOTTLE.
- TURN FLOW ON BOTTLE TO 250 ML/MIN
- LET THE CURRENT CELL VALUES STABILIZE
- REMOVE THE SAMPLE LINE FROM THE BOTTLE
- TOUCH "CONTINUE" KEY.
- WAIT FOR STATUS = "PASSED" OR "FAILED"
- REPLACE SCRUBBER BOTTLE ANNUALY.
CONTINUE
START
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 5-15: MULTISPEC SPAN CALIBRATION SCREEN
5-40
Rev. C
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
5.13.5
Rev. A
Line Block Calibration Procedure
5.13.5.1
Ensure that the full length of the patient sample line is
connected to the disposable reservoir on the left side of
the monitor box and is unoccluded.
5.13.5.2
Connect a flowmeter to the exhaust port on the sensor
interface panel.
5.13.5.3
Connect a variable flow restrictor to the patient sample
line.
5.13.5.4
Set the System Power switch to ON.
5.13.5.5
Enter the main service screen by simultaneously
pressing the MONITOR key, SYSTEM CONFIG key, and
the Selection DIAL.
5.13.5.6
Touch the MONITORS key on the screen to bring up
the second column of touch keys.
5.13.5.7
Touch the LINE BLOCK CALIBRATION key on the
screen.
5.13.5.8
Wait for the current sample pressure to stabilize, and a
Mode messasge of "READY".
5.13.5.9
Adjust the restrictor on the patient sample line to
obtain a flowmeter reading of 100 ml per minute.
5.13.5.10
Touch the STORE REFERENCE key.
5.13.5.11
Fully occlude the patient sample line and observe that
the line block alarm becomes active after at least 15
seconds.
5.13.5.12
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, then
return it to the ON position to retain the new value.
5-41
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
CURRENT SAMPLE PRESSURE:
200
LINE BLOCK CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- WITH PATIENT CIRCUIT ENABLED:
- ENSURE THAT SAMPLE LINE IS
CONNECTED AND UNOCCLUDED.
- PLACE A FLOWMETER AT THE SAMPLE
EXHAUST.
- ATTACH FLOW RESTRICTOR, FIX 0336, TO
PATIENT SAMPLE LINE.
- WAIT FOR VALID CURRENT SAMPLE PRESSURE
- ADJUST RESTRICTION IN ORDER TO
OBTAIN A FLOW OF 100 ML/MIN.
- TOUCH "STORE REFERENCE" KEY.
- FULLY OCCLUDE SAMPLE LINE AND OBSERVE
THAT LINE BLOCK ALARM BECOMES
ACTIVE AFTER AT LEAST 15 SECONDS.
- REMOVE FLOW RESTRICTOR FROM SAMPLE LINE.
STORED REFERENCE :
200
STORE
REFERENCE
NM4
OXYGEN
MAIN
PRESSURE
SERVICE
LOG
RESPIRATORY
FLOW
SpO2
NIBP
PMS
CRITERIA
GAS
ANALYZER
MONITORS
LINE BLOCK
CALIBRATION
PERIPHERALS
Figure 5-16: MULTISPEC LINE BLOCK CALIBRATION SCREEN
5-42
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
5.14
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
Vaporizer Interlock Adjustment
5.14.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.14.2
Turn the center vaporizer handwheel ON. The left and the right
vaporizer handwheels should be locked in their Zero position. If the
left or right vaporizer does not lock, tighten the corresponding
center set screw until the handwheel locks properly.
5.14.3
Turn the center vaporizer OFF and turn the left vaporizer ON.
The center and the right vaporizer handwheels should be locked in
their Zero position. If the right vaporizer does not lock, loosen the
locking nut on the right set screw and adjust the set screw until
the handwheel locks properly. Tighten the locking nut while
holding the set screw to maintain the correct adjustment.
NOTE:
5.14.4
Do not over-tighten the set screws. Each vaporizer
handwheel must turn easily while the other vaporizers
are locked .
Turn the left vaporizer OFF and turn the right vaporizer ON. The
center and the left vaporizer handwheels should be locked in their
Zero position. If the left vaporizer does not lock, loosen the locking
nut on the left set screw and adjust the set screw until the
handwheel locks properly. Tighten the locking nut while holding
the set screw to maintain the correct adjustment.
NOTE: When the interlock adjustment procedure is completed, ensure that
all vaporizer handwheels are set to their zero or OFF position.
5.14.5
Rev. A
Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
5-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
NM4
VAPORIZER
INTERLOCK
MECHANISM
REAR VIEW
LEFT
SETSCREW
VAPORIZER
MOUNTING SCREW
LOCATIONS (2 EA)
RIGHT
SETSCREW
CENTER
SETSCREWS
(RECESSED)
VIADJ
Figure 5-17: VAPORIZER INTERLOCK ADJUSTMENT
5-44
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
5.15
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
Vaporizer Select Switch Adjustment
5.15.1
Set the System Power switch to STANDBY.
5.15.2
Remove the four screws holding the rear panel of the vapor box,
and remove the panel.
5.15.3
If applicable, remove the two screws holding the oxygen ratio
monitor/controller to the bottom panel of the vapor box. Remove
the four screws holding the bottom panel of the vapor box, and
remove the panel.
5.15.4
Remove the four screws holding the front cover. Carefully lower
the cover so that it is supported by the wire harnesses joined to its
circuit board.
5.15.5
At the circuit board, disconnect the wire harness for the switch
that is being adjusted, and connect an ohmmeter to the wire
harness.
5.15.6
With the corresponding vaporizer handwheel at zero, the switch
should be open. When the vaporizer is turned on, the switch
contacts should close.
Loosen the adjusting screw locknut and turn the adjusting screw to
raise or lower the switch bracket until the correct action is
achieved. Tighten the locknut when the adjustment is completed.
NOTE: When the switch adjustment procedure is completed, ensure that
the vaporizer handwheel is returned to its zero or OFF position.
5.15.7
Disconnect the ohmmeter and connect the wiring harness to the
circuit board.
5.15.8
Replace the front cover, carefully guiding the gas selector switch
cam into its spring, and secure the cover with its four mounting
screws.
5.15.9
Replace the bottom panel of the vapor box and secure it with the
four screws. If applicable, replace the two screws that hold the
oxygen ratio monitor/controller to the bottom panel.
5.15.10 Replace the rear panel of the vapor box and secure it with the four
screws.
5.15.11 Perform the PMS Procedure given in Section 6.
Rev. A
5-45
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES (continued)
SWITCH
BRACKET
VAPORIZER
SELECT SWITCH
NM4
ADJUSTING
SCREW
LOCK NUT
SWITCH BRACKET
MOUNTING SCREW
WIRING
HARNESS
ADJUSTING
SCREW
OXYGEN RATIO
MONITOR / CONTROLLER
FRONT
COVER
REAR PANEL
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
VAPOR BOX
REAR PANEL
FRONT COVER
MOUNTING
SCREWS (4X)
VAPOR BOX
BOTTOM PANEL
CIRCUIT
BOARD
ORMC MOUNTING
SCREWS (2X)
BOTTOM PANEL
MOUNTING SCREWS (4X)
NARKOMED 4 RIGHT SIDE VIEW CUT-AWAY
SHOWING TYPICAL VAPORIZER SELECT
SWITCH MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
Figure 5-18: VAPORIZER SELECT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
5-46
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE
6.0 PMC PROCEDURE, NARKOMED 4
The procedures in this section shall be performed in their entirety each time a
component is removed, replaced, calibrated, adjusted and during all scheduled
Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification (PMC) visits. A PMC Checklist form, P/N
S010052, available from the Draeger Medical, Inc. Technical Service Department,
shall be completed by the TSR each time a PMC is performed. Steps in the procedure
marked with ( ) require a response at the corresponding line on the checklist form.
Space is also provided on the PMC checklist form to record the results of a vapor
concentration test.
Test equipment listed below with an asterisk (*) require calibration at a maximum
interval of one year.
NOTE: Verify the dates on test equipment calibration labels. DO NOT USE any test
equipment having an expired calibration date. Notify your supervisor immediately if
any equipment is found to be out of calibration.
In the space provided at the bottom of the PMC checklist form, record the Model and
ID number of all calibrated test equipment used. Also record the calibration due
dates.
Test Equipment Required:
-- Nellcor PT2500 pocket tester (for SpO2 cal check)
*-- Novametrix TB500B sensor simulator (for SpO2 cal check)
*-- Multi-Meter (Fluke or equivalent)
*-- Electrical Safety Analyzer (Biotek 501 Pro or equivalent)
*-- Regulator Test Pressure Gauge, P/N S000063 or equivalent
-- Fresh Gas Outlet Volume Test Device, P/N S010158 or equivalent
-- Fresh Gas Leak Test Device, P/N 4113119 or equivalent
-- Adapter Assembly, Test Terminal, P/N 4104389 or equivalent: two are required
*-- Flowmeter Test Stand (Capnomed), P/N S000081 or equivalent
-- Breathing System Leak Test Device, P/N S010159 or equivalent
-- Baromed Pressure Test Fixture or equivalent
*-- Test Minute Volume Meter, P/N 2212300 or equivalent
*-- Digital Pressure Manometer (SenSym PDM 200CD or Equivalent)
*-- Riken Gas Indicator, Model 18H, or 1802D or equivalent
-- Stop Watch
-- Service Test Lung, P/N 4115128
Materials Required:
-- Dow Corning High Vacuum Grease, P/N S4105908
-- Spiromed Sensor Lubrication Kit, P/N 2218180
-- Breathing Bag, 3 liter, P/N 9995330
-- Tube, Corrugated, 22 mm x 12 in. long, P/N 9995112
Test equipment illustrations are shown on following pages.
Rev. AB
6-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NOTE:
NM4
The following calibrations must be performed before beginning the PMC
Procedure (refer to Section 5 in the Narkomed 4 Service Manual,
Adjustment and Calibration Procedures):
Oxygen Sensor Zero Calibration
Breathing Pressure Monitor Calibration
Respiratory Flow Monitor Calibration
SpO2 Monitor Calibration Check
NIBP Inflation Pressure Calibration Check
6-1A
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
4 1 1 3 1 1 9
F R E S H G A S L E A K T E S T D E V IC E
C O N N E C T T O
T E S T P R E S S U R E G A U G E
S V O O O 2 2
Rev. AB
6-1B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
4 1 1 5 1 2 8
S IE M E N S T E S T L U N G
S V O O O 2 5
6-1C
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
T E S T T E R M IN A L
NM4
S 0 1 0 1 5 9
S Y S T E M L E A K T E S T D E V IC E
T E S T T E R M IN A L
B R E A T H IN G
S V O O O 2 3
S 0 1 0 1 5 8
F R E S H G A S O U T L E T V O L U M E T E S T D E V IC E
Rev. AB
6-1D
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
S V O O O 2 7
0
S 0 0 0 0 8 1
F L O W M E T E R
T E S T S T A N D
1 0 0
S 0 0 0 0 6 3
R E G U L A T O R T E S T
P R E S S U R E G A U G E
6-1E
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
1 5
L ite r
9 0 0
8 0 0
1 0
1 0 0
5
2 0 0
v o l/m in
7 0 0
m l
2 2 1 2 3 0 0
M IN U T E
V O L U M E T E R
3 0 0
,
6 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
T E S T T E R M IN A L
S V O O O 2 4
Rev. AB
4 1 0 4 3 8 9
T E S T T E R M IN A L
A D A P T E R
6-1F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
CONNECT GAS
SAMPLE LINE
4110216
CO2
CALIBRATION
ADAPTER
4107979
CAPNOMED
CALIBRATION
GAS
SV00369
TEST EQUIPMENT FOR AGENT
ANALYZER ACCURACY TEST
6-1G
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
4 1 1 0 7 1 6
M U L T IS P E C C A L IB R A T IO N A D A P T E R
4 1 1 0 5 9 9 O R 4 1 1 0 5 9 9 -0 0 1
M U L T IS P E C C A L IB R A T IO N
G A S C Y L IN D E R
S V O O O 2 6
4 1 1 0 6 8 3
M U L T IS P E C C A L IB R A T IO N K IT
Rev. AB
6-1H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
This page intentionally left blank
6-1J
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification General Instructions
The purpose of these procedures is to provide detailed instructions for performing a Periodic
Manufacturer’s Certification (PMC) inspection on the Narkomed 4 anesthesia machine.
A PMC consists of a complete Periodic Manufacturer’s Service procedure and a new certification
level inspection based on Draeger Medical, Inc. Recommendations and equipment performance.
Additional inspections are also performed to insure proper product labeling.
Several additional documents have been created to ensure the success of this new program.
Following is a brief description of the purpose of each document.
Field Service Procedure:
Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification Forms - Part Number SP00175.
This procedure illustrates sample checklists with typical periodic maintenance items filled in,
including vapor concentrations verification tests, parts replaced, general comments and
certification levels. Also included are sample PMC labels marked to show several levels of
certifications. An excerpt from Draeger Medical, Inc.’s Anesthesia System Risk Analysis and Risk
Reduction is included, and also a sample of an Executive Summary to be furnished to the
hospital’s Risk Manager or Chief of Anesthesia.
Field Service Procedure:
DMI Recommendations Guidelines Index Anesthesia Systems - Part Number S010250.
This Guideline was created to provide an assessment of each machine’s certification. It contains
various comprehensive overviews of possible equipment conditions and their associated certification
levels.
The first list in the Recommendation Guidelines is a reference chart for machine certification
based on equipment status. The second is an abbreviated summary of all DMI Recommendations
and Failure Codes including the Condition Number, Equipment Condition, Recommended
Corrections, Certification Code, and Tests Affected when applicable.
There is also a matrix classified as "Failure Codes" which identifies the correct manner in which to
document equipment tests that fail, or were unable to be performed due to circumstances beyond
the control of the service technician performing the inspection. (Ex: Air cylinder supply is
unavailable to perform Air High Pressure Leak test.) The Failure Codes section also indicates
suggested resolution of the situation. Failure Code numbers begin at 34 and use the same
certification levels strategy, and carry the same weight as DMI Recommendation equipment
condition codes.
The final matrix is the most comprehensive index sorted by machine model and includes
Equipment Condition, Certification Code, and DMI Recommendations. It also specifies any
suggested upgrade path including ordering information that should be taken such as installing a
Bellows with Pressure Limit Control 4109664-S01 Kit, after market modification kit to a machine
not equipped with pressure limit control.
Rev. AB
6-1K
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
The letters A, B, C, D and the Roman Numerals I, II are used as codes in the individual matrix for
each model of anesthesia machine. The letters A, B, C, and D are used in descending order to
indicate the certification level of the equipment. They are as follows:
A = Certified
B = Certified with Recommendations
C = Conditionally Certified
D = No Certification
Roman Numerals I and II do not affect the certification level but rather are provided to give
further instructions to the end user as follows:
I = The system in its present configuration shall only be used with a CO2 monitor
incorporating an apnea warning. The operator of the system is advised to frequently
scan the CO2 readings and alarm thresholds.
II = The present configuration of equipment requires that the unit operate at all times with
an oxygen analyzer that includes a low oxygen warning. The operator of the system is
advised to frequently scan the oxygen readings and alarm limits.
Following is an explanation of machine certification levels:
Certified- No recommendations apply to machine being inspected. (Only item number 33 - "No
Recommendations" shall apply for this certification level.)
Certified with Recommendations- A numbered recommendation with a code of B applies to the
machine being examined.
Conditionally Certified- A numbered recommendation with a code of BCI or BCII applies to the
machine being examined.
No Certification- A numbered recommendation with a code of D applies to the machine being
examined.
When multiple recommendations apply, "No Certification" would take precedence over
"Conditionally Certified" and "Certified with Recommendations". "Conditionally Certified" would
take precedence over "Certified with Recommendations".
6-1L
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
For example:
A Narkomed 3 could have recommendation number 21 and failure code 61.1 apply.
21 - No ventilator pressure limit control. Code is B.
61.1 - Enflurane agent is unavailable to test. Code is BC.
Correct certification for this machine is BC, which means CONDITIONALLY CERTIFIED WITH
RECOMMENDATIONS.
A Narkomed 4 could have recommendation numbers 14 and 21 apply.
14 - CO2/Agent monitor exhaust port is not properly connected to the waste gas scavenger.
Code B.
21 - No ventilator pressure limit control. Code B.
The correct certification for this machine is B, which means CERTIFIED
RECOMMENDATIONS.
WITH
A Narkomed 2B, 2C or GS could have recommendation 30 apply.
30 - Anesthesia machine is equipped with inhalation anesthesia vaporizers without an agent
analyzer in the breathing system. Code B.
The correct certification for this machine is B, which means CERTIFIED WITH
RECOMMENDATIONS.
A Narkomed 6000 could have no DMI recommendations or failure codes apply. The correct
certificaiton level for this machine is Code A, CERTIFIED.
Code D, which means NO CERTIFICATION, also means the machine shall not receive a
Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification label. The machine shall also receive a ’WARNING
- This System is Not Certified’ label, P/N 4114857. This label shall be placed at a
prominent location on the right side of the machine after all other previous PM and
’Vigilance Audit® Validation’ labels have been removed.
Rev. AB
6-1M
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
PM Certification Procedure for Narkomed 4 Anesthesia System
1.
Use the PM Certification form for Narkomed 4 Anesthesia Systems (P/N S010052).
2.
Completely fill in the header information.
3.
Determine if the ventilator has an MJV-2 square Clippard valve. If ventilator has an MJV-2, perform the
lubrication procedure in accordance with SP00062. Write in the date of lubrication next to the "MJV-2
LUBRICATION" line on the Periodic Manufacturer’s Certification form. If the ventilator has a Humphrey
valve, indicate so with a (H) next to the "MJV-2 LUBRICATION" line on the Periodic Manufacturer’s
Certification form.
4.
Replace the VENTILATOR RELIEF VALVE DIAPHRAGM in accordance with SP00075. Place a check
mark and the replacement date at "VENT RELIEF VALVE REPLACEMENT" line on the Periodic
Manufacturer’s Certification form.
5.
If a TEC 6 DESFLURANE vaporizer is mounted to the machine, a label stating: "WARNING THE
ADMINISTRATION OF DESFLURANE ANESTHESIA MAY REQUIRE FRESH GAS CONCENTRATIONS
HIGHER THAN COMMONLY USED WITH OTHER VOLATILE ANESTHETIC AGENTS. O2 FRESH GAS
CONCENTRATION OF LESS THAN 21% MAY BE OBTAINED WITH HIGH VAPORIZER SETTINGS.
CONTINUOUS MONITORING OF THE O2 CONCENTRATION IN THE BREATHING SYSTEM IS
THEREFORE REQUIRED. DRAEGER MEDICAL, INC. RECOMMENDS THE CONTINUOUS
MONITORING OF THE CONCENTRATION OF ANESTHETIC VAPORS IN THE BREATHING SYSTEM
DURING THE ADMINISTRATION OF INHALATION ANESTHESIA."(part # 4112737-001) Shall be
attached to the vapor box immediately above the TEC 6 vaporizer.
6.
Check all vapor 19 and 19.1 vaporizers for correct labeling. All vaporizers must have a label stating "THE
CONCENTRATION OUTPUT OF THIS VAPORIZER SHALL BE VERIFIED AFTER IT HAS BEEN
ATTACHED TO THE ANESTHESIA MACHINE" (part # S010015). This label shall be attached to the rear
of the vaporizer directly below the mount.
7.
All Key Index Safety Systems vaporizers, (K.I.S.S.) must have a label stating "CAUTION: AFTER FILLING
HAS BEEN COMPLETED, REINSERT PLUG INTO UPPER FILLER PORT AND TIGHTEN LOCKING
SCREW" (part # 4112520-001). This label shall be attached to the vaporizer directly above the keyed filler.
Place a check mark at "K.I.S.S. LABEL" on the PM Certification form.
8.
If machine is equipped with a HALOTHANE Dräger Vapor 19 or 19.1 vaporizer, determine if vaporizer
must be inspected for soil condition one. Check the serial number plate located on the rear of the vaporizer
for a plus (+) preceding the serial number. A HALOTHANE vaporizer serial number not preceded with a (+)
must be tested for soil in accordance with SP00073. If vaporizer does not need to be inspected, indicate so
with a plus (+) next to the "Vapor Inspection (H)" line on the Vigilance Audit form. If vaporizer is soil
condition 0, indicate so with "SOIL 0" written next to the "Vapor Inspection (H)" line on the Vigilance Audit
form. If vaporizer is soil one, indicate so with "SOIL 1" written next to the "Vapor Inspection (H)" line on
the Vigilance Audit form. Place a "CAUTION DO NOT USE" label (part # 4114327) on the vaporizer, and
issue a departmental alert. The TSR shall also seek permission from the equipment operator to remove the
failed vaporizer from the machine and apply a replacement vaporizer or an adapter block onto the mount.
All "SOIL 1" vaporizers must be removed from service for machine to receive certification.
9.
Perform the vapor concentration test on all Dräger vapor vaporizers in accordance with SP00073 at a six
month maximum interval. Perform the vaporizer concentration test on all Desflurane vaporizers in
accordance with SP00091 for fixed mount vaporizers and SP00189 for user removable D-tec vaporizers at a
six month maximum interval. For every vaporizer tested, fill out a "VAPOR VAPORIZER CALIBRATION
CHECK" label (part # S010016). Information on this label shall include your signature, type of agent, date
tested, test results @ 1%, 2.5%, 4% for H, E, I, or S vaporizers, or @ 4%, 10%, 12%, 16% for Desflurane
vaporizers, and a PASS or FAIL indication. This label shall be attached to the upper right side of the
vaporizer. If vaporizer fails the concentration verification, internal leak, or exclusion system tests, check
"NO" in the "RECOMMENDED FOR USE" section on the PM Certification form.
6-1N
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
PM Certification Procedure for Narkomed 4 Anesthesia System
Place a "CAUTION DO NOT USE" label (part # 4114327) on the vaporizer, and issue a
departmental alert. The TSR shall also seek permission from the equipment operator to
remove the failed vaporizer from the machine and install a replacement vaporizer or an
adapter block onto the mount. All nonfunctional Dräger vapor vaporizers must be removed
from service for machine to receive certification.
10.
Proceed with PM Certification procedure. If any tests fail refer to the "Failure Codes" listing
in DMI Recommendations Guidelines Index (P/N S010250) to determine correct certification
level starting point. Failure codes shall be documented on the "RECOMMENDATIONS /
GENERAL COMMENTS" section of the PM Certification form and on the Executive
Summary. If a test fails that has not been identified by the "Failure Codes" list, consult with
Draeger Medical, Inc. to assess the proper certification level.
11.
Based on the "EQUIPMENT CONDITION" inspect the machine for any "DMI
RECOMMENDATIONS" that would apply. Use the Narkomed 4 section of the
"RECOMMENDATION GUIDELINES INDEX" (P/N S010250). Note all applicable DMI
recommendations on the Executive Summary. NOTE: If using a carbon form, indicate the
Equipment Condition number and to see reverse side under the "RECOMMENDATIONS /
GENERAL COMMENTS" section of the form.
12.
Determine the correct certification level of the machine based on the combined lowest
common denominator of "Equipment Conditions" and "Failure Codes". If the machine is at
least conditionally certified fill out the ""PM CERTIFICATION" label. Check the box(s) on the
validation label where appropriate. Write the month and year, (three months from date of PM
Certification) next to "NEXT VISIT DUE:" If certification level is "D", machine shall not
receive a "PM CERTIFICATION" label. Any machine not receiving a PM Certification label
shall receive a "WARNING NOT CERTIFIED" label. This label shall be placed at a prominent
location on the left side of the machine after all other previous PMC and Vigilance Audit
Validation labels have been removed.
13.
In the "CERTIFICATION LEVEL" section of the PM Certification form, record the last visit
certification level, the current certification level and the next visit due month and year, (three
months from date of PM Certification) in the spaces provided.
14.
If applicable, remove the previous PM CERTIFICATION VALIDATION label and attach the
new label (P/N S010006 w/phone #, or P/N S010007 w/o phone #) in a prominent location on
the rear of the anesthesia machine.
15.
Check the appropriate boxes on the "PM CERTIFICATION NOTICE" label, (part # S010011).
If the machine is not certified, the last box of this notice label shall be marked. Attach this
notice to the flow shield of the anesthesia machine.
16.
Have the customer sign each PM Certification form or the Executive Summary, and review
the equipment conditions and the recommendations with the customer.
17.
Return top copy to Draeger Medical, Inc. Service Department, keep middle copy for service
organization records, give bottom copy to customer.
Rev. AB
6-1P
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.1 Safety Testing
6.1.1
Protective Ground Continuity Test
6.1.1.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
CAUTION:
Do not plug or unplug the remote display cable with power
applied.
Disconnect the remote display cable, NIBP hose, gas sample
line, and SpO2 cable.
Remove the monitor box cover and re-connect the remote
display cable, NIBP hose, gas sample line, and SpO2 cable.
NOTE: Do not plug the safety analyzer power cord into a line isolation
monitor, as inaccurate readings may occur.
Plug the unit into the safety analyzer, and plug the power
cord of the safety analyzer into a 115 V receptacle.
6.1.1.2
Set the safety analyzer function switch to the "GROUND WIRE
RESISTANCE" position. Attach the test lead to the "SINGLE
LEAD" connector.
6.1.1.3
Set the safety analyzer "GROUND" switch to the "NORMAL"
position. Set the "POLARITY" switch to the "OFF" position.
6.1.1.4
The safety analyzer shall indicate 0.1 ohms or less with its test
lead applied to the following points:
--Cylinder yoke
--Blood pressure
monitor chassis)
6.1.2
pump
mounting
bracket
(inside
Circuit Isolation Test
6.1.2.1
Apply the safety analyzer and check for continuity between the
monitor box chassis and the circuit common at backplane connector
J29, Pin 13. There shall be no continuity between these points.
6-2
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.1.3
Chassis Leakage Current Test
6.1.3.1
Turn the NM4 System Power switch to ON and set the safety
analyzer to the "CHASSIS LEAKAGE CURRENT" position.
6.1.3.2
Attach the safety analyzer test lead to a yoke assembly.
6.1.3.3
Record the total leakage current with the polarity and ground
switches set to the following positions:
Ground
Open
Normal
Open
Normal
Polarity
Normal
Normal
Reversed
Reversed
Verify that the leakage current is 75 microamps* or less in
each of the positions (110 microamps or less for 220/240 volt
power supply option).
*
100 microamps if external monitors are plugged into
convenience outlets.
6.2 Battery Circuit Test
Rev. AB
6.2.1
Is "ON" LED lighted? __ (Y)
6.2.2
With the System Power switch ON, unplug the AC power cord.
6.2.3
Is yellow "AC PWR FAIL" LED lighted as long as the power cord is
unplugged? __ (Y)
6.2.4
Does the "AC PWR FAIL" message appear in the Advisory display? __
(Y)
6.2.5
Press and hold the "BATTERY TEST" button.
6.2.6
Is green Battery Test LED lighted as long as "BATTERY TEST" button
is depressed? __ (Y)
6.2.7
Release the "BATTERY TEST" button.
6.2.8
Restore AC power to the machine.
6-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.3 Manual Sphygmomanometer
6.3.1
Insert the male Luer fitting of the Sphygmomanometer squeeze bulbhose assembly into the female Luer fitting adjacent to the BLOOD
PRESSURE label on the machine.
6.3.2
Wrap the blood pressure cuff around an "E" cylinder.
6.3.3
Hand pump the squeeze bulb until pressure of 200 mm Hg is indicated
on the Sphygmomanometer gauge on the machine. Pinch the hose
adjacent to the Luer fitting to assure that the hose-bulb is not the
source of any leak.
6.3.4
After thirty (30) seconds, what is the
Sphygmomanometer gauge? ___ mm Hg (190-200)
6.3.5
Bleed the pressure.
6.3.6
The Sphygmomanometer should indicate within the band.
6.3.7
Attach a test Sphygmomanometer in series with the gauge being
tested.
6.3.8
Hand pump the squeeze bulb until the machine gauge indicates
100mm Hg.
6.3.9
What does the test gauge indicate? ___ mm Hg (90-110).
6.3.10
Hand pump the squeeze bulb until the machine gauge indicates
200mm Hg.
6.3.11
What does the test gauge indicate? ___ mm Hg (180-220).
6.3.12
Hand pump the squeeze bulb until the machine gauge indicates
300mm Hg.
6.3.13
What does the test gauge indicate? ___ mm Hg (> 290).
6.3.14
Remove the test gauge.
6.3.15
Remove the blood pressure cuff from the "E" cylinder.
6.3.16
Record the Sphygmomanometer serial number on the check list.
6-4
pressure
on
the
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.4 Vapor Exclusion System and Agent Indicator Lamp Test
Rev. AB
6.4.1
Set all vapors to zero (0).
6.4.2
Adjust the handwheel on the left position vapor to any concentration
above zero (0).
6.4.3
Verify that only the correctly labeled indicator lamp above the left
vaporizer illuminates during full rotation of the hand wheel.
6.4.4
Allow the "CO2 CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS" to complete on the
remote display.
6.4.5
Verify that the correct abbreviation for the agent selected appears on
the display.
6.4.6
Is it possible to turn on the center position vapor?___(N)
6.4.7
Is it possible to turn on the right position vapor?___(N)
6.4.8
Set the handwheel on the left position vapor to zero (0).
6.4.9
Adjust the handwheel on the center position vapor to any concentration
above zero (0).
6.4.10
Verify that only the correctly labeled indicator lamp above the center
vaporizer illuminates during full rotation of the hand wheel.
6.4.11
Allow the "CO2 CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS" to complete on the
remote display.
6.4.12
Verify that the correct abbreviation for the agent selected appears on
the display.
6.4.13
Is it possible to adjust the left position vapor? ___ (N)
6.4.14
Is it possible to adjust the right position vapor? ___ (N)
6.4.15
Set the handwheel on the center position vapor to zero (0).
6.4.16
Adjust the handwheel on the right position vapor to any concentration
above zero (0).
6.4.17
Verify that only the correctly labeled indicator lamp above the right
vaporizer illuminates during full rotation of the hand wheel.
6-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.4.18
Allow the "CO2 CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS" to complete on the
remote display.
6.4.19
Verify that the correct abbreviation for the agent selected appears on
the display.
6.4.20
Is it possible to adjust the left position vapor? ___ (N)
6.4.21
Is it possible to adjust the center position vapor? ___ (N)
6.4.22
Set the handwheel on the right position vapor to zero (0).
6.4.23
Verify that all vaporizer indicator lamps are off.
6.5 High Pressure Leak Test
Before performing this test, ensure that cylinder pressures are: N2O & CO2: 600 psi; O2, Air, He, He/O2, N2: 1000
psi.
Set cylinder regulators at: N2O: 40 - 49 psi; O2 and Air: 43 - 49 psi.
6.5.1
Yoke Verification
6.5.1.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, and close all cylinder
valves.
6.5.1.2
Disconnect the pipeline supply hoses at the wall outlets.
6.5.1.3
Remove the closed cylinder or yoke plug from each yoke assembly.
6.5.1.4
Do all the yoke handles adjust smoothly? ___ (Y)
6.5.1.5
Are the two (2) yoke pins installed securely in each yoke? ___ (Y)
6.5.1.6
Is there only one (1) cylinder washer on each yoke assembly? ___
(Y)
6.5.1.7
Is there a yoke plug attach to each yoke assembly? ___ (Y)
6.5.1.8
Is the proper gas identification label affixed to each yoke assembly?
___ (Y)
6.5.1.9
Attach a cylinder to each yoke assembly, open the cylinder valve,
let the pressure stabilize, close the cylinder valve, remove the
cylinder from the yoke assembly.
6.5.1.10 Does the yoke check valve assembly prevent the escape of excessive
pressure? ___ (Y)
6.5.1.11 Attach the cylinders to the yokes.
6-6
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve and one (1) nitrous oxide
cylinder valve.
6.5.2.2
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.5.2.3
Close the nitrous oxide cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.5.2.4
Observe the nitrous oxide cylinder pressure gauge.
6.5.2.5
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.5.2.6
Attach the cylinder.
6.5.3
Oxygen High Pressure Leak Test
6.5.3.1
Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve.
6.5.3.2
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.5.3.3
Close the oxygen cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.5.3.4
Observe the oxygen cylinder pressure gauge.
6.5.3.5
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.5.3.6
Attach the cylinder.
6.5.4
Rev. AB
Nitrous Oxide High Pressure Leak Test
Air High Pressure Leak Test - If Applicable
6.5.4.1
Open the air cylinder valve.
6.5.4.2
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.5.4.3
Close the air cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.5.4.4
Observe the air cylinder pressure gauge.
6.5.4.5
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.5.4.6
Attach the air cylinder.
6-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.5.5
NM4
Oxygen-Helium High Pressure Leak Test - If Applicable
6.5.5.1
Open the oxygen-helium cylinder valve.
6.5.5.2
Let the pressure stabilize.
6.5.5.3
Close the oxygen-helium cylinder valve and remove the cylinder.
6.5.5.4
Observe the oxygen-helium cylinder pressure gauge.
6.5.5.5
After two (2) minutes, what is the pressure loss? ___ PSI (<50)
6.5.5.6
Attach the oxygen-helium cylinder.
6.6 Oxygen Supply Failure Protection
6.6.1
Nitrous Oxide O.F.P. Device
6.6.1.1
Turn the System Power switch to "ON".
6.6.1.2
Open and close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.6.1.3
Open the nitrous oxide cylinder valve.
6.6.1.4
Adjust the O2 and N2O flow to 4 l/min.
6.6.1.5
Does the flow of nitrous oxide cease when the oxygen pressure is
depleted? ___ (Y)
6.6.1.6
Close the N2O cylinder valve and bleed the pressure from the
circuit.
6.6.1.7
Connect the N2O pipeline hose to the wall outlet.
6.6.1.8
Close the O2 pipeline supply.
6.6.1.9
Does the flow of nitrous oxide cease when the oxygen pressure is
depleted? ___ (Y)
6.6.1.10 Close the nitrous oxide flow control valve.
6.6.2
*
Air O.F.P. Device - If Applicable
6.6.2.1
Set the LOCK OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.6.2.2
Open the oxygen cylinder valve.
* These items do not apply to machines with later design (P/N 4113229) ORC.
6-8
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
*
6.6.2.3
Open the air cylinder valve.
6.6.2.4
Set the air flow to 4 l/min; set the oxygen flow to 4 l/min.
6.6.2.5
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.6.2.6
Does the flow of air cease when the O2 pressure is depleted? ___
(Y)
6.6.2.7
Close the air flow control valve.
6.6.2.8
Set the LOCK OUT device to "O2+N2O".
6.6.3
*
Oxygen-Helium O.F.P. Device - If Applicable
6.6.3.1
Set the LOCK OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.6.3.2
Open the oxygen-helium cylinder valve.
6.6.3.3
Open one (1) oxygen cylinder valve.
6.6.3.4
Set the oxygen-helium flow to 4 l/min; set the oxygen flow to 4
l/min.
6.6.3.5
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.6.3.6
Does the flow of oxygen-helium cease when the oxygen pressure is
depleted? ___ (Y)
6.6.3.7
Close the oxygen-helium flow control valve.
6.6.4
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm
6.6.4.1
Remove the table top.
6.6.4.2
Remove the plug from the tee fitting on the O2 regulator output
line and connect a test gauge.
6.6.4.3
Open and close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.6.4.4
Set the oxygen flow to 2 l/min.
6.6.4.5
What is the pressure on the test gauge when the "O2 SUPPLY
PRESSURE" LED turns on? ___ PSI (34-40)
6.6.4.6
Does the "LO O2 SUPPLY" message appear in the CAUTION
column? ___ (Y)
* These items do not apply to machines with later design (P/N 4113229) ORC.
Rev. AB
6-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.7 Flowmeter Test
6.7.1
Oxygen Flowmeter Test
6.7.1.1
Open the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.7.1.2
Is it possible to adjust the flow of oxygen over the full range of the
flowmeters? ___ (Y)
6.7.1.3
Close the O2 cylinder valve and bleed the pressure from the
system.
6.7.1.4
Connect the O2 pipeline hose.
6.7.1.5
Is it possible to adjust the flow of oxygen over the full range of the
flowmeters? ___ (Y)
6.7.1.6
Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the oxygen
flow control valve? ___ (Y)
6.7.1.7
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.7.1.8
What is the minimum flow of oxygen? ___ ml (125-175) ml/min
(150-200 for machines with later design (P/N 4113229) ORC). *(0
ml for 4107615A (Minimum O2 Flow Elimination))
6.7.2
Nitrous Oxide Flowmeter Test
6.7.2.1
Set the oxygen flow to 4 l/min.
6.7.2.2
Open the nitrous oxide cylinder valve.
6.7.2.3
Is it possible to adjust the flow of nitrous oxide over the full range
of the flowmeter? ___ (Y)
6.7.2.4
Close the nitrous oxide cylinder valve and bleed the pressure from
the system.
6.7.2.5
Connect the N2O pipeline hose.
6.7.2.6
Is it possible to adjust the flow of nitrous oxide over the full range
of the flowmeters? ___ (Y)
* These items do not apply to machines with later design (P/N 4113229) ORC.
6-10
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.7.2.7
Is the correct flow control knob and label attach to the N2O flow
control valve? ___ (Y)
6.7.2.8
Close the oxygen and nitrous oxide flow control valves.
6.7.3
*
Air Flowmeter Test - If Applicable
6.7.3.1
Set the LOCK OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.7.3.2
Open the air cylinder valve.
6.7.3.3
Is it possible to adjust the flow of the air over the full range of the
flowmeter? ___ (Y)
6.7.3.4
Close the air flow control valve.
6.7.3.5
Is the correct flow control knob and label attached to the air flow
control valve? ___ (Y)
*
6.7.3.6
What is the minimum flow of oxygen? ___ ml (0)
*
6.7.3.7
Set the LOCK OUT device to "O2+N2O".
6.7.4
*
*
Oxygen-Helium Flowmeter Test - If Applicable
6.7.4.1
Set the LOCK OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.7.4.2
Open the oxygen-helium gas cylinder valve.
6.7.4.3
Is it possible to adjust the flow of the oxygen-helium over the full
range of the flowmeter? ___ (Y)
6.7.4.4
Close the oxygen-helium flow control valve.
6.7.4.5
Is the correct flow control knob and label attach to the oxygenhelium flow control valve? ___ (Y)
6.7.4.6
Set the LOCK OUT device to "O2+N2O".
* These items do not apply to machines with later design (P/N 4113229) ORC.
Rev. AB
6-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.7.5
NM4
Auxiliary Oxygen Flowmeter Test
6.7.5.1
Connect a test cm H2O gauge to the outlet.
6.7.5.2
Bleed any pressure from the system.
6.7.5.3
Is there an increase in pressure? ___ (N)
6.7.5.4
Increase the pressure to 50 cm H2O.
6.7.5.5
After 30 seconds, what is the pressure ___ cm H2O (30-50)
6.7.5.6
Remove the test gauge.
6.7.5.7
Is it possible to adjust the flow over the full range of the
flowmeter? ___ (Y)
6.7.5.8
Set the flow rate to 5 l/min.
6.7.5.9
Hold the sensor from a calibrated O2Med at the flowmeter outlet.
6.7.5.10 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (97-100)
6.7.5.11 Remove the O2Med sensor.
6.7.5.12 Close the flowmeter flow control valve.
6.8 NAD O2 Monitor
6.8.1
Disconnect the O2 sensor cord at the VPO panel. The Advisory
messages "O2 SENSOR DISC" and "O2 NOT CAL" shall appear on the
central alarm display, and a single-tone audible alarm shall sound.
6.8.2
Reconnect the O2 Med sensor.
6.8.3
Touch "O2 CAL" box. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is exposed to
only 21% O2 (room air).
6.8.4
After the calibration is completed, what is the displayed oxygen
concentration? ___% (21)
NOTE:
Set system alarms to factory defauts.
6-12
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
Rev. AB
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.8.5
The Warning message "INSP O2 LOW" shall appear on the central
alarm display, and a continuous audible alarm shall sound.
6.8.6
What is the oxygen LO alarm default? ___ (30)
6.8.7
Touch the oxygen LO alarm box. Does the box illuminate? ___ (Y)
6.8.8
Verify that the oxygen LO alarm limit has a range from 18 to 99%.
6.8.9
Set the LO limit to 18.
6.8.10
Touch the oxygen HI alarm box. Does the box illuminate? ___ (Y)
6.8.11
What is the HI oxygen alarm default? ___ (100)
6.8.12
Verify that the oxygen HI alarm limit has a range from 100 to 19%.
6.8.13
Set the HI limit to 19.
6.8.14
Expose the O2 Med sensor to room air (21% O2).
6.8.15
The Advisory message "INSP O2 HIGH" shall appear on the central
alarm display, and a single-tone audible alarm shall sound.
6.8.16
Adjust the HI limit to 51%.
6.8.17
The "INSP O2 HIGH message shall be extinguished.
6.8.18
Return the HI limit to 100.
6.8.19
Place the sensor into the valve dome, set the oxygen flow to 10 l/min.,
set the Man/Auto to BAG, close the APL valve, attach a 12 inch hose to
the inspiratory valve and occlude the bag mount.
6.8.20
After 3 minutes, what is the oxygen concentration? ___%(97-100)
6.8.21
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.9 Oxygen Concentration Tests
6.9.1
Oxygen + Nitrous Oxide Concentration Test
6.9.1.1
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.9.1.2
Connect a 12 inch hose to the inspiratory valve.
6.9.1.3
Set the Manual/Automatic to BAG.
6.9.1.4
Close the APL valve.
6.9.1.5
Occlude the bag mount.
6.9.1.6
Insert the sensor from a calibrated O2 Med into the valve dome
adapter on the inspiratory valve.
6.9.1.7
Close all the flow control valves.
6.9.1.8
Open one (1) cylinder valve for each gas.
6.9.1.9
Depress the "O2 FLUSH" for 15 seconds.
6.9.1.10 Set the oxygen flow to 4 l/min.
6.9.1.11 Does the O2 Med read 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___ (Y)
6.9.1.12 Set the nitrous oxide flow to 2 l/min.
6.9.1.13 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (64-70)
6.9.1.14 Set the nitrous oxide flow to 4 l/min.
6.9.1.15 What is the oxygen concentration? ___% (47-53)
6.9.1.16 Close all flow control valves.
6.9.2
*
Oxygen + Air Concentration Test - If Applicable
6.9.2.1
Depress the "O2 FLUSH" for 15 seconds.
6.9.2.2
Does the O2 Med read 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___ (Y)
6.9.2.3
Set the LOCK OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.9.2.4
Set the oxygen flow to 4 l/min.
* These items do not apply to machines with later design (P/N 4113229) ORC.
6-14
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
*
6.9.2.5
Set the air flow to 2 l/min.
6.9.2.6
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (71-77)
6.9.2.7
Close the air flow valve.
6.9.2.8
Set the LOCK OUT device to "O2+N2O".
6.9.3
*
*
6.9.3.1
Depress the "O2 FLUSH" for 15 seconds.
6.9.3.2
Does the O2 Med read 97-100% within 3 minutes? ___ (Y)
6.9.3.3
Set the LOCK OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.9.3.4
Set the oxygen flow to 4 l/min.
6.9.3.5
Set the oxygen-helium flow to 2 l/min.
6.9.3.6
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (72-78)
6.9.3.7
Close the oxygen-helium flow control valve.
6.9.3.8
Set the LOCK OUT device to "O2+N2O".
6.9.4
*
*
Oxygen + Helium and Oxygen Concentration Test - If Applicable
Oxygen + Carbon Dioxide Concentration Test - If Applicable
6.9.4.1
Set the gas selector switch to ALL GASES.
6.9.4.2
Depress the O2FLUSH button for 15 seconds.
6.9.4.3
Does the O2MED read 97-100% within 3 minutes?___ (Y)
6.9.4.4
Set the oxygen flow to 1000 ml/min.
6.9.4.5
Set the carbon dioxide flow to 500 ml/min.
6.9.4.6
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (64-70)
6.9.4.7
Close the carbon dioxide flow control valve.
6.9.4.8
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.9.4.9
Set the gas selector switch to O2+N2O.
* These items do not apply to machines with later design (P/N 4113229) ORC.
Rev. AB
6-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.10
NM4
Gauges
6.10.1
Cylinder Gauges
6.10.1.1 Are the pressure gauges correct for the gases indicated by the
flowmeters and yoke assemblies? ___ (Y)
6.10.1.2 Are the gauges closest to the table top for cylinder supply
pressure? ___ (Y)
6.10.1.3 Bleed all the pressure from the cylinder circuit.
6.10.1.4 Are the cylinder gauges at zero "0" PSI? ___ (Y)
6.10.1.5 Open the cylinder valves.
6.10.1.6 Do the cylinder pressure gauges respond properly? ___ (Y)
6.10.1.7 Close the cylinder valves.
6.10.1.8 Bleed all pressure from the cylinder circuits.
6.10.2
Pipeline Gauges
6.10.2.1 Are the pipeline gauges right below the flowmeters for pipeline
supply pressure? ___ (Y)
6.10.2.2 Are the pipeline pressure gauges at "0" PSI? ___ (Y)
6.10.2.3 Connect the pipeline supply.
6.10.2.4 Do the pipeline pressure gauges respond properly? ___ (Y)
6.10.2.5 Are the correct gas identification labels affixed at each of the
pipeline inlets? ___ (Y)
6.10.2.6 Does the back panel identify each of the pipeline inlets properly?
___ (Y)
6-16
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
6.11
Rev. AB
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Freshgas Leak Test
6.11.1
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.11.2
Remove the 15 mm connector from the FRESHGAS OUTLET.
6.11.3
Is the common gas outlet assembly in good condition? ___ (Y)
6.11.4
Connect a digital pressure manometer and Fresh Gas Leak Test Device
to the freshgas outlet.
6.11.5
Apply 50 cm H2O of pressure to the system.
6.11.6
After thirty (30) seconds, what is the pressure on the manometer? ___
(>40 cm H2O)
6.11.7
Turn on the left mounted vaporizer to the first graduated marking.
6.11.8
Apply 50 cm H2O of pressure to the system.
6.11.9
After thirty (30) seconds, what is the pressure on the manometer? ___
(>40 cm H2O)
6.11.10
Turn off the vaporizer.
6.11.11
Remove the test equipment from the Fresh Gas Outlet.
6.11.12
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.11.13
Open the O2 flow control valve to 5 l/min., purge the system for 5
seconds, then close the O2 flow control valve.
6.11.14
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.11.15
Turn on the center mounted vaporizer to the first graduated marking,
repeat Steps 6.11.4 and 6.11.8 thru 6.11.14. ___ (>40 cm H2O)
6.11.16
Turn on the right mounted vaporizer to the first graduated marking,
repeat Steps 6.11.4 and 6.11.8 thru 6.11.14. ___ (>40 cm H2O)
6.11.17
Remove the manometer and Fresh Gas Leak Test Device.
6.11.18
Reconnect the 15 mm connector from the absorber system to the
FRESHGAS OUTLET.
6.11.19
Is the FRESHGAS OUTLET label on the freshgas outlet? ___ (Y)
6-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.12
NM4
Absorber System
6.12.1
Repack MAN/AUTO Selector Valve S/N _________________
[Does not apply to machines with later design selector valve.]
6.12.1.1 Remove the four screws securing the stick shift block to the
selector valve body and remove the block.
6.12.1.2 Remove the spring and valve channel from the valve body.
6.12.1.3 Remove all residual lubricant from the valve channel.
6.12.1.4 Remove all residual lubricant from the valve body.
6.12.1.5 Apply a minimal amount of "stop cock" lubricant to the tapered
surface of the valve channel, and ensure complete coverage of
lubricant.
6.12.1.6 Insert the valve channel into the valve body.
6.12.1.7 Insert the spring into the stick shift block.
6.12.1.8 Align the index pins on the stick shift block to the holes in the
valve channel.
6.12.1.9 Secure the stick shift block to the selector valve body with the four
screws that were previously removed.
6-18
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.12.2
Lubrication, Spiromed Sensor S/N ______________________
6.12.2.1 Remove the expiratory valve.
6.12.2.2 Remove the Spiromed Sensor.
6.12.2.3 Locate the four lateral holes at the sides of the Spiromed sensor
marked by printed arrows.
CAUTION:
Use only Sensor Lubrication Kit P/N 2218180 or sensor
lubricant P/N S010104 for the following procedure.
6.12.2.4 Remove the protective cover from the pipette and open the
lubricant bottle.
6.12.2.5 Dip the tip of the pipette into the lubricant and draw one drop of
lubricant into the pipette by pulling the pin upwards.
6.12.2.6 Insert the pipette into one of the four holes as far as it will go.
Push the pin forward to its stop to inject lubricant into the hole.
6.12.2.7 Repeat the procedure on the three remaining holes.
6.12.2.8 Wipe any lubricant residue from the exterior of the sensor.
6.12.2.9 Reattach the sensor to the absorber top dome.
6.12.2.10
Rev. AB
Reattach the expiratory valve to the sensor.
6-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.12.3
NM4
Absorber System Inspection S/N _________________
6.12.3.1 Remove the inspiratory and the expiratory valve domes.
6.12.3.2 Is there a broken or bent pin on the valve assembly
Inspiratory? ___ (N)
Expiratory? ___ (N)
6.12.3.3 Is there a broken pin on the valve domes
Inspiratory? ___ (N)
Expiratory? ___ (N)
6.12.3.4 Is the valve disc in good condition
Inspiratory? ___ (Y)
Expiratory? ___ (Y)
6.12.3.5 Are the valve dome washers in good condition? ___ (Y)
6.12.3.6 Reinstall the inspiratory and expiratory valve domes.
6.12.3.6A
Remove the ultrasonic flow sensor connector hose - if
applicable.
6.12.3.6B
Is the connector hose, connector, and O-ring in good condition?
___(Y) - if applicable.
6.12.3.6C
Remove the ultrasonic flow sensor from the mounting bracket
- if applicable.
6.12.3.6D
Remove the flow housing/transducer assembly from the
electronics housing - if applicable.
6.12.3.6E
Remove both transducers from the flow housing; examine each
O-ring and condition of all components, then reassemble - if
applicable.
6.12.3.7 Remove the inspiratory and expiratory valve assemblies.
6.12.3.8 Remove the Spiromed sensor.
6.12.3.9 Are all three washers in good condition? ___ (Y)
6.12.3.10
Reinstall the Spiromed sensor - if applicable, and the
inspiratory valve.
6.12.3.11
Reinstall the expiratory valve and the connector hose between
the expiratory valve and the ultrasonic flow sensor - if
applicable.
6.12.3.12
Are there two (2) spring clips on the absorber rods?___ (Y)
6.12.3.13
Inspect the following: Canisters and Gaskets, Dust Cup and
O-ring, condition of soda lime
6-20
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.12.3.14
Is the cm H2O gauge at zero (0)? ___ (Y)
6.12.3.15
Check for proper seating of the O-ring at the gauge mount.
6.12.3.16
Remove the O2Med sensor plug from the inspiratory valve
dome adapter and examine the two O-rings at the bottom of
the plug.
6.12.3.17
Uncap the O2Med sensor and examine the two O-rings at the
bottom of the sensor.
6.12.3.18
Reinstall the O2Med sensor into the inspiratory valve dome
adapter.
6.12.4
Breathing System Leak Test
6.12.4.1 Short circuit the inspiratory and expiratory valves with a 12 inch
hose.
6.12.4.2 Attach a test terminal with a cuff inflation bulb to the bag mount.
6.12.4.3 Set the Man/Auto selector valve to BAG.
6.12.4.4 Close the APL valve.
6.12.4.5 Presssurize the absorber system to 50 cm H2O.
6.12.4.6 After 30 seconds, what is the pressure in the absorber system? ___
cm H2O (>30)
6.12.5
APL Valve Test
6.12.5.1 Open the APL valve to its stop.
6.12.5.2 Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.12.5.3 Set the oxygen flow to 8 l/min.
6.12.5.4 What is the pressure on the absorber pressure gauge? ___ cm H2O
(<3)
6.12.5.5 Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.12.5.6 Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.12.5.7 Remove the test terminal and cuff inflation bulb from the bag
connector.
Rev. AB
6-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.12.6
NM4
Absorber Flow Direction and Leak Test
6.12.6.1 Expiration Valve Leak Test
6.12.6.1.1
Close the APL valve.
6.12.6.1.2
Connect a 22mm hose between the inspiration valve and
the bag mount.
6.12.6.1.3
Connect a test terminal to the expiration valve or the
expiratory hose terminal on the ultrasonic flow sensor, if
applicable.
6.12.6.1.4
Connect a Capnomed flowmeter to the test terminal.
6.12.6.1.5
Turn the System Power switch to ON, turn up the oxgen
flow until the system pressurizes to 30 cmH2O.
6.12.6.1.6
Verify that the value indicated on the flowmeter is
≤60ml/min.
6.12.6.1.7
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY and remove
all test equipment.
6.12.6.2 Inspiratory valve leak test
6.12.6.2.1
Connect a test terminal to the inspiratory valve.
6.12.6.2.2
Connect a tee adapter and calibrated pressure meter to
the test terminal.
6.12.6.2.3
Connect a pressure bulb to the open port of the tee
adapter.
6.12.6.2.4
Connect another test terminal to the bag connector.
6.12.6.2.5
Connect a Capnomed flowmeter to the test terminal on
the bag mount.
6.12.6.2.6
Pressurize the system to 30 cmH2O.
6.12.6.2.7
Verify that the flow meter indicates ≤60 ml/min.
6.12.6.2.8
Remove all test equipment.
6.12.6.2.9
Open the APL valve.
6-22
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.12.6.3 Flow Direction Test
6.12.7
6.12.6.3.1
Attach a breathing circuit with a 3-liter bag at the Ypiece to the inspiration and expiration valve or the
expiratory hose terminal on the ultrasonic flow sensor, if
applicable.
6.12.6.3.2
Attach a 3-liter bag to the swivel bag mount.
6.12.6.3.3
Turn the System Power switch to ON and set the O2 flow
to 4 l/min.
6.12.6.3.4
Inflate the simulated lung by briefly using the O2 Flush.
6.12.6.3.5
Partially close the APL valve.
6.12.6.3.6
Squeeze the breathing bag attached to the bag mount at
a rate of approximately 10 BPM. Readjust the APL valve
if required to properly ventilate the simulated lung.
6.12.6.3.7
Observe the operation of each unidirectional valve disc at
eye level and make sure the inspiratory valve disc raises
only during the inspiration phase, and the expiratory
valve raises only during the exhalation phase. Watch the
valves until satisfied that both valves operate correctly,
and move freely without sticking.
6.12.6.3.8
Open the APL valve.
PEEP Bypass Valve - If applicable. S/N _______________________
6.12.7.1 Set the O2 flow to 5 l/min.
6.12.7.2 Adjust the PEEP valve clockwise to the maximum position.
6.12.7.3 Raise the bypass valve to the "PEEP ON" position.
6.12.7.4 What is the maximum PEEP? ___ cm H2O (15-22 cm H2O).
6.12.7.5 Does the PEEP valve adjust smoothly? ___ (Y)
6.12.7.6 Adjust the PEEP valve counter-clockwise to its minimum position.
6.12.7.7 What is the minimum PEEP? ___ cm H2O (2-3 cm H2O).
6.12.7.8 Adjust the PEEP valve clockwise to its maximum position.
6.12.7.9 Lower the bypass valve to the "PEEP OFF" position.
6.12.7.10
Rev. AB
What is the maximum PEEP? ___ cm H2O (2-3 cm H2O)
6-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.13
NM4
6.12.7.11
Adjust the PEEP valve counter-clockwise to its minimum
position.
6.12.7.12
Close the O2 flow control valve.
Ventilator Test
6.13.1
Ventilator
NOTE: Set the Pressure Limit control to MAX, and the PEEP valve to the
minimum position, if applicable. Readjustment of INSPIRATORY FLOW to limit
the inspiritory plateau may be required to reduce erratic tidal volumes and
breath rates caused by artifact volume.
**
6.13.1.1 Set the Man/Auto selector to BAG.
6.13.1.2 Set the FREQUENCY to 10 BPM.
6.13.1.3 Set the I:E Ratio to 1:2.
6.13.1.4 Set the Tidal Volume to 1000 ml.
6.13.1.5 Attach a patient circuit to the absorber system.
6.13.1.6 Adjust the O2 flow to 3 l/min.
6.13.1.7 Is the APNEA-P OFF message displayed in the Advisory column?
(Y) (if no, touch "APNEA ALARM ON")
6.13.1.8 Is the VOL-ALARMS OFF message displayed in the Advisory
column? (Y) (if no, touch "VOLUME ALARM ON")
6.13.1.9 Turn the ventilator on.
**
**
6.13.1.10
Verify the FAULT indicator turns on (Y)
6.13.1.11
Set the Man/Auto selector switch to AUTO.
6.13.1.12
Verify the FAULT indicator turns off (Y)
6.13.1.13
Do the APNEA-P ALARM OFF and VOL-ALARMS OFF
messages disappear from the Advisory column? (Y)
6.13.1.14
Adjust the INSPIRATORY FLOW to the maximum of the
LOW zone.
6.13.1.15
Occlude the Y-piece with your thumb.
** These items only apply to machines with an AV2+ ventilator.
6-24
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.13.1.16
Inflate the bellows by momentarily pressing the O2 Flush.
6.13.1.17
What is the peak inspiratory pressure? ___ cm H2O (>30 cm
H2O)
6.13.2
I:E Ratio and Frequency Test
6.13.2.1 Attach a test 3-liter bag to the Y-piece.
6.13.2.2 Using a stopwatch, time the inspiratory phase.
6.13.2.3 What is the inspiratory time? ___ seconds (1.8 - 2.2)
6.13.2.4 Using a stopwatch, time the expiratory phase.
6.13.2.5 What is the expiratory time? ___ seconds (3.6 - 4.4)
**
6.13.2.6 Press and hold the EXTENDED RANGE switch and scroll the I:E
ratio dial counter clockwise and verify the extended I:E ratio
values increment (2:1, 3:1 and 4:1); return the I:E ratio to 2:1.
**
6.13.2.7 Using a stopwatch time the inspiratory phase.
**
6.13.2.8 What is the inspiratory time? ___ seconds (3.6 - 4.4)
**
6.13.2.9 Using a stopwatch, time the expiratory phase.
**
6.13.2.10
What is the expiratory time? ___ seconds (1.8 - 2.2)
6.13.2.11
Adjust the frequency and I:E Ratio through the following
settings and verify that the ventilator cycles properly:
FREQ.
11
22
33
44
55
I:E RATIO
1:1
1:1.5
1:2
1:2.5
1:3
FREQ.
66
77
88
99
** These items apply to machines with an AV2+ ventilator.
Rev. AB
6-25
I:E RATIO
1:3.5
1:4
1:4.5
1:4.5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.14
6.15
NM4
Bellows Drive Gas Leak Test
6.14.1
Remove the ventilator hose from the bellows assembly.
6.14.2
Attach a test terminal to the bellows assembly.
6.14.3
Attach a Capnomed flowmeter test stand to the test terminal.
6.14.4
Set the BPM to 1.
6.14.5
Set the I:E Ratio to 1:1.
6.14.6
Set the flow to the maximum.
6.14.7
What is the volume that is registered during the inspiratory plateau
phase? ___(<50 ml)
6.14.8
Remove the test terminal and flowmeter test stand. Connect the
ventilator hose to the VENTILATOR HOSE terminal.
"F" Bellows Test S/N ____________________________
6.15.1
Insert a calibrated volumeter between the absorber dome and the
expiratory valve, and set the BPM to 10.
6.15.2
Set the I:E Ratio to 1:2.
6.15.3
Adjust the O2 flow to 300 ml.
6.15.4
Adjust the inspiratory flow to "MED".
6.15.5
Adjust the Tidal Volume to 200 ml.
6.15.6
What is the Tidal Volume on the test volumeter? ___ ml (125-250 ml
6.15.7
Adjust the Tidal Volume to 1000 ml.
6.15.8
What is the Tidal Volume on the test volumeter? ___ ml (900-1100 ml)
6.15.9
Adjust the inspiratory flow to "HIGH".
6-26
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.15.10
Adjust the O2 flow to 5 l/min.
6.15.11
this step intentionally left blank.
6.15.12
Adjust the Tidal Volume to maximum.
6.15.12A Remove the test lung and attach a 3 liter breathing bag.
6.15.12B Adjust the Inspiratory Flow to fully compress the bellows.
6.16
Rev. AB
NOTE:
The bag should be placed on a flat horizontal surface to reduce artifact
volume.
6.15.13
What is the Tidal Volume on the test volumeter? ___ ml (≥1400)
Pressure Limit Control Test - If Applicable
6.16.1
Set the Inspiratory Flow to the bottom of the LOW range.
6.16.2
Set the oxygen flow rate to 4 l/min.
6.16.3
Set the pressure limit control to the MAX position.
6.16.4
Occlude the Y-piece with your thumb.
6.16.5
Slowly increase the Inspiratory Flow setting until a peak pressure of
80 cm H2O is achieved.
6.16.6
Set the pressure limit control to 30.
6.16.7
What is the peak pressure? ___ cm H2O (27-33)
6.16.8
Set the pressure limit control to the MIN position.
6.16.9
What is the peak pressure? cm H2O (9-15)
6.16.10
Remove your thumb from the Y-piece.
6.16.11
Set the inspiratory flow to the maximum of the LOW zone.
6.16.12
Turn the ventilator OFF.
NOTE:
The inspiratory flow gauge will not return to the stop position when
the ventilator is turned off.
6-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.17
NM4
Ventilator Relief Valve Test
6.17.1
Adjust the O2 flow to 10 l/min.
6.17.1A Adjust the inspiratory flow to fully compress the bellows.
6.18
6.17.2
Adjust the inspiratory flow to "MED".
6.17.3
Adjust the I:E Ratio to 1:3.
6.17.4
Adjust the Tidal Volume to 1200 ml.
6.17.5
What is the PEEP? ___ cm H2O (≤3 cm H2O)
6.17.6
Adjust the O2 flow to 500 ml.
6.17.7
What is the Tidal Volume on the test volumeter? ___ml (1080-1320)
6.17.8
Does the bellows stop adjust smoothly? ___ (Y)
SPIROMED or Ultrasonic Flow Sensor Test
6.18.1
Touch the MONITOR SET UP key. Does the box illuminate the "MIN
VOL" alarm limit? ___ (Y)
6.18.2
What is the "LO" MIN VOL alarm default? ___ (1.0)
6.18.3
Verify that the MIN VOL has a "LO" alarm limit range from 0.5 to
10.0 by increments of 0.1.
6.18.4
Adjust the "LO" MIN VOL alarm to 2.0 liters.
6.18.5
Touch the volume "ALARMS ON" to enable the volume alarms and
start a stopwatch.
6.18.6
What is the time when the "APNEA-VOLUME" is activated under the
CAUTION column? ___ sec (13-17)
6.18.7
What is the time when the "APNEA-VOLUME" is activated under the
WARNING column? ___ sec (26-34)
6.18.8
Insert a calibrated volumeter in between the Spiromed sensor (or
absorber, if the system is equipped with an ultrasonic flow sensor) and
the exhalation valve.
6.18.9
Attach a patient circuit to the absorber system.
6.18.10
Turn the ventilator ON.
6-28
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
Rev. AB
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.18.11
Adjust the frequency to 6.
6.18.12
Adjust the I:E Ratio to 1:2.
6.18.13
Adjust the flow to the maximum of the LOW zone.
6.18.14
Adjust the oxygen flow to 2 l/min.
6.18.15
Adjust the Tidal Volume to 200 ml.
6.18.16
After the first breath is detected, does the "APNEA-VOL" in the
WARNING column and the "MIN VOL LOW" in the CAUTION column
deactivate? ___ (Y)
6.18.17
After one (1) minute, does the "MIN VOL LOW" message appear in the
CAUTION column? ___ (Y)
6.18.18
Adjust the "LO" alarm limit 0.1 liter below the indicated minute
volume.
6.18.19
Does the "MIN VOL LOW" in the CAUTION column deactivate? ___
(Y)
6.18.20
Increase the tidal volume to 1000 ml and the frequency to 10 BPM.
Readjust the inspiratory flow as necessary to fully collapse the bellows.
6.18.21
Is the "TID VOL" on the Spiromed (or ultrasonic flow sensor) and the
volumeter within 20% of each other? ___ (Y)
6.18.22
Is the "MIN VOL" on the Spiromed (or ultrasonic flow sensor) and the
volumeter within 20% of each other? ___ (Y)
6.18.23
Create a reverse flow by loosening the expiratory valve dome. If
equipped with an ultrasonic flow sensor, remove the breathing hose
from the flow sensor. Connect a test terminal and a Riken aspirator
(negative pressure squeeze bulb) to the 22 mm male port of the flow
sensor. Disconnect the hose from the expiratory valve. Compress and
release the aspirator.
6.18.24
Each time a reverse flow of greater than 20 ml is detected, does the
"REVERSE FLOW" message appear in the ADVISORY column? ___ (Y)
6.18.25
Tighten the expiratory valve dome. If equipped with an ultrasonic flow
sensor, remove the test terminal and aspirator from the flow sensor
and reconnect the patient circuit hose. Reconnect the hose terminal
from the flow sensor to the expiratory valve.
6.18.26
Disconnect the volume sensor cord from the "VOLUME SENSOR"
interface.
6-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.19
6.20
NM4
6.18.27
Does the "VOL SEN DISC" and "VOL ALRM OFF" messages appear in
the ADVISORY column? ___ (Y)
6.18.28
Reconnect the volume sensor cord to the "VOLUME SENSOR"
interface.
6.18.29
Turn OFF the ventilator.
6.18.30
Disable the APNEA-PRESSURE and APNEA-VOLUME alarms.
6.18.31
Remove the test volumeter and set the System Power switch to
STANDBY.
Alarm Circuit Delay Test
6.19.1
Create any "Warning Alarm" condition.
6.19.2
Press the alarm circuit delay button located on the remote display.
6.19.3
Verify that the audio portion of the alarm is silenced.
6.19.4
Verify a "60" appears at the bottom located on the remote display.
6.19.5
Press the Alarm Circuit Delay twice.
6.19.6
Verify that a "120" appears at the bottom of the remote display.
Apnea Pressure Test
6.20.1
Disconnect the pressure pilot line from the absorber.
6.20.2
Zero a calibrated pressure meter to ambient air pressure.
6.20.3
Connect the pilot line to the tee adapter of a calibrated pressure meter
and syringe.
6.20.4
Adjust the frequency to "00".
6.20.5
Adjust the threshold to 8 cm (using the monitor set-up screen and
rotating the dial selector).
6.20.6
Simultaneously, turn the ventilator ON and start the stopwatch.
6.20.7
After 15 +/-3 seconds, an APNEA PRESSURE ALARM will appear in
the CAUTION section on the remote display.
6.20.8
After another 15 +/-3 seconds have passed, the APNEA ALARM shall
upgrade to a WARNING.
6-30
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.20.9
Slowly increase the test pressure. The alarm shall deactivate at 8cm
+/-1 cm H2O.
6.20.10
Repeat steps using 12.0 cm H2O.
6.20.11
Repeat steps using 26.0 cm H2O.
6.20.12
Turn the ventilator OFF. Turn all alarms OFF.
6.21
High Pressure Alarm Test
6.21.1
Verify that the HIGH alarm is set at 50 cm H2O.
6.21.2
Increase the test pressure to 50 cm H2O. A VENT PRESSURE HIGH
alarm shall activate as a warning.
6.22
Sub-Atmospheric Pressure Alarm Test
6.22.1
Apply a negative test pressure of -10 cm H2O.
6.22.2
A "SUB-ATMOS" warning alarm shall activate.
6.23
Continuing Pressure Alarm Test
6.23.1
Increase the test pressure above the threshold value shown on the
display, and begin timing with a stopwatch.
6.23.2
After 15 seconds, a continuous "WARNING" pressure alarm shall
activate.
6.23.3
Decrease the pressure to a value below the threshold, and the alarm
shall cease.
6.24
Oxygen Ratio Monitor Control (ORMC) Test
NOTE:
Refer to 6.24A if machine is equipped with an ORC.
Rev. AB
6.24.1
Open the oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinder valves.
6.24.2
Depress the "O2 FLUSH" for 15 seconds.
6.24.3
Turn the N2O flow control valve counter-clockwise to its stop position.
6.24.4
Slowly increase the oxygen flow until nitrous oxide begins to flow.
6.24.5
What is the oxygen flow rate? ___(200-300 ml/min.)
6.24.6
Slowly increase the oxygen flow until the "O2/N2O FLOW RATIO" LED
on the alarm panel is lighted.
6-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.24.7
What is the nitrous oxide flow rate? ___(150-300 ml/min.)
6.24.8
Set the oxygen flow to 1000 ml/min.
6.24.9
Adjust the nitrous oxide flow until the ORMc controls the nitrous
oxide.
6.24.10
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)
6.24.11
Does the "O2/N2O FLOW RATIO" LED turn "ON" on the ALARM
PANEL? ___ (Y)
6.24.12
Does the "O2/N2O LOW" message appear in the ADVISORY column?
___ (Y)
6.24.13
Open the nitrous oxide flow control valve to the stop position.
6.24.14
Adjust the oxygen flow to 1.5 l/min.
6.24.15
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)
6.24.16
Adjust the oxygen flow to 2 l/min.
6.24.17
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)
6.24.18
Adjust the oxygen flow to 3 l/min.
6.24.19
What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (21-29)
6.24.20
Set the LOCK OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.24.21
Is the "O2/N2O FLOW RATIO" alarm activated? ___ (N)
6.24.22
Set the LOCK OUT device to "O2+N2O".
6.24.23
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.24.24
What is the flow of nitrous oxide? ___ ml/min. (0)
6.24.25
Is the "O2/N2O FLOW RATIO" alarm activated? ___ (N)
6.24.26
Close the nitrous oxide flow control valve.
6.24.27
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6-32
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.24A
*
Oxygen Ratio Control (ORC) Test
6.24A.1 Set the Gas Selector switch to O2 + N2O.
6.24A.2 Open the oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinder valves.
6.24A.3 Depress the O2FLUSH for 15 seconds.
6.24A.4 Set the oxygen flow to 1000 ml.
6.24A.5 Open the nitrous oxide flow control valve to the stop position.
6.24A.6 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (22-28)
6.24A.7 Adjust the oxygen flow to 1.5 l/min.
6.24A.8 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (22-28)
6.24A.9 Adjust the oxygen flow to 2 l/min.
6.24A.10 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (22-28)
6.24A.11 Adjust the oxygen flow to 3 l/min.
6.24A.12 What is the oxygen concentration? ___ % (22-28)
6.24A.13 Reduce the O2 flow to 500 ml/min. Verify that the N2O flow is greater
than or equal to 600 ml/min.
6.24A.14 Slowly close the oxygen flow control valve.
*
6.24A.15 What is the flow of nitrous oxide? ___ ml/min. (0)
**
6.24A.16 What is the oxygen concentration with the O2 flow control valve
closed?___% (22-28)
6.24A.17 Close the nitrous oxide flow control valve.
* These items do not apply to machines with later design (P/N 4113329-001) ORC.
** This item does not apply to machines with early design (P/N 4111800) ORC.
Rev. AB
6-33
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.25
NM4
SPO2/Pulse - Nellcor
6.25.1
Plug the SpO2 sensor pre amp cable into the machine interface.
6.25.2
Disconnect the Durasensor from the interface cable and pre-amp and
attach a Nellcor® pocket simulator Model 2500.
6.25.3
The monitor should display a value between 80 and 82 for oxygen
saturation and a value between 60 and 62 for a pulse rate if the
machine is equipped with a Nellcor MP-202 pulse oximeter module.
Record the values on the report.
If the machine is equipped with a Nellcor MP-203 pulse oximeter module,
the pulse rate displayed should be between 39 and 41.
6.25.4
Disconnect the pocket sensor and re-connect the finger probe.
6.25.5
Attach the sensor to the operator’s finger and obtain a pulse and
oxygen saturation.
6.25.6
Disconnect the sensor from the finger.
6.25.7
After ten (10) seconds, the Warning message "NO SpO2 PULSE" shall
appear on the central alarm display and a continuous audible alarm
shall sound.
6.25.8
Re-connect the sensor to the finger.
6.25.9
Note the pulse high and low alarm limit settings. After pulse and
oxygen saturation readings stabilize, raise the pulse low alarm limit
above the actual pulse rate.
6.25.10
The Warning message "SpO2 PULSE LOW" shall appear on the central
alarm display and a continuous audible alarm shall sound.
6.25.11
Return the pulse low alarm limit to its previous setting.
6.25.12
Decrease the pulse high alarm limit below the actual pulse rate.
6.25.13
The Caution message "OXI PULSE HIGH" shall appear on the central
alarm display and an intermittent audible alarm shall sound.
6.25.14
Return the pulse high alarm limit to its previous setting.
6.25.15
Note the SpO2 SAT high and low alarm settings. Raise the SAT low
alarm limit above the actual SpO2 level.
6-34
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.25.16
The Warning message "SpO2 SAT LOW" shall appear on the central
alarm display and a continuous audible alarm shall sound.
6.25.17
Return the SAT low alarm to its previous setting.
6.25.18
Decrease the SAT high alarm limit below the actual SpO2 level.
6.25.19
The caution message "SPO2 SAT HIGH" shall appear on the central
alarm display and an intermittent audible alarm shall sound.
6.25.20
Return the SAT high alarm to its previous setting.
6.25.21
Remove sensor from finger and set SpO2 monitor to Standby.
6.25A
SpO2 Monitor Calibration Check - Novametrix
6.25A.1 Plug the SpO2 sensor extension cable into the machine interface.
6.25A.2 Disconnect the finger probe from the extension cable and attach a
Novametrix TB500B sensor simulator to the extension cable.
6.25A.3 Turn the System Power switch to ON. press and hold the Selection
Dial, and simultaneously press the MONITOR and SYSTEM CONFIG
keys to enter the main service screen. Touch the MONITORS key to
bring up a second column of touch keys.
6.25A.4 Touch the SpO2 key on the screen.
6.25A.5 Set the simulator’s Sensor Type switch to 87XX. Set the output signal
to 3 and the saturation to 82%. Turn the simulator ON and verify that
the monitor’s displayed Pulse reading is 60 ±1 BPM and the SaO2
reading is 82 ±2.
NOTE:
Do not rely on the simulator’s low battery LED as an indicator of
sufficient battery power. Replace the battery with a fresh 9 volt
transistor battery if proper measured values are not obtained and the
battery measures ≤8.5 VDC.
6.25A.6 Adjust the simulator’s saturation setting to 100 and verify that the
monitor indicates 99 ±1. Adjust the saturation to 62 and verify that the
monitor indicates 62 ±2.
6.25A.7 Depress the Open Test RED key and verify that the PULSE LO LED
activates, a continuous audible alarm is heard, and a NO OXI PULSE
warning alarm is shown on the central alarm display.
Rev. AB
6-34A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.25A.8 Depress both Open Test keys together and verify that the monitors
SaO2 and OXI ALARMS DISABLE indicators activate, a single audible
tone is heard, and OXI SEN DISC advisory alarm is shown on the
central alarm display. Release the Open Test keys.
6.25A.9 Disconnect the simulator and re-connect the finger probe. Attach the
sensor to the operator’s finger and obtain pulse, and oxygen saturation
readings. Disconnect the sensor from the finger. Afther ten (10)
seconds, the Warning message NO OXI PULSE shall appear on the
central alarm display and a continuous audible alarm shall sound.
6.25A.10 Re-connect the sensor to the finger.
6.25A.11 Note the pulse high and low alarm settings. After pulse and oxygen
saturation readings stabilize, raise the pulse low alarm limit above the
actual pulse rate.
6.25A.12 The Warning message OXI PULSE LOW shall appear on the central
alarm display and a continuous audible alarm shall sound.
6.25A.13 Return the pulse low alarm to its previous settings.
6.25A.14 Decrease the pulse high alarm limit below the actual pulse rate.
6.25A.15 The caution message OXI PULSE HIGH shall appear on the central
alarm display and an intermittent audible alarm shall sound.
6.25A.16 Return the pulse high alarm limit to its previous setting.
6.25A.17 Note the SpO2 SAT high and low alarm settings. Raise the SAT low
alarm limit above the actual SpO2 level.
6.25A.18 The Warning message SpO2 SAT LOW shall appear on the central
alarm display and a continuous audible alarm shall sound.
6.25A.19 Return the SAT low alarm to its previous setting.
6.25A.20 Decrease the SAT high alarm limit below the actual SpO2 level.
6.25A.21 The caution message SpO2 SAT HIGH shall appear on the central
alarm display and an intermittent audible alarm shall sound.
6.25A.22 Return the SAT high alarm to its previous setting.
6.25A.23 Remove finger from sensor and set the SpO2 monitor to Standby.
6-34B
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
6.26
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NIBP Alarm and Pressure Tests
6.26.1
Install the BP cuff on left arm.
6.26.2
Touch the INTERVAL box. Using the selection dial, decrement to one
(1) minute.
6.26.3
Touch START.
6.26.4
When the cuff cycle is complete, touch SYSTOLIC LOW. Adjust to
above the actual value. NIBP systolic low appears as a caution.
Decrease to below the actual value and the alarm should cease.
6.26.5
Adjust the SYSTOLIC HIGH to below the actual value. NIBP systolic
high appears as a caution. Readjust to above the actual value. The
alarm should cease.
6.26.6
Touch STAT. The cuff should inflate. The time between deflation and
the next inflation should be three (3) seconds.
For the following tests, access the MONITORS and NIBP Service Screen as
outlined in Section 2.
6.26.7
NIBP Inflation Pressure Test
6.26.7.1 Wrap an adult BP cuff loosely around a cylindrical object. Attach,
in series, a tee fitting with a calibrated manometer between the
patient cuff and the hose assembly.
6.26.7.2 Bring up the MONITORS service screen and select NIBP.
6.26.7.3 Touch the INFLATE key. The cuff shall inflate to 180 to 190 mm
Hg. Touch the STOP key to end the test. Record the value on the
report.
6.26.8
NIBP Inflation Time Test
6.26.8.1 Touch the INFLATION CHECK key. The MEAN value displayed
shall not be greater than 73, indicating the time (in x.x seconds), to
reach a pressure of 250 mm Hg.
6.26.8.2 The PULSE value displayed shall not be greater than 73,
indicating the time (in x.x seconds), to reach a pressure of 300 mm
Hg.
NOTE: Test failure may be due to cuff wrapped too tightly, or cuff may be
too small. Use an adult cuff.
Rev. AB
6-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.26.9
NM4
NIBP Leak Test
6.26.9.1 Touch the LEAKAGE CHECK key. After one minute, the
SYSTOLIC value displayed shall be between 280 and 300.
6.26.9.2 After four minutes, the DIASTOLIC value displayed shall not be
greater than 8 (indicating the amount of pressure drop at the end
of the test period).
6.26.10
NIBP Cycle Test
6.26.10.1
Touch the TAKE READING key and begin timing with a
stopwatch. The cuff shall inflate, and then deflate within 29 to
31 seconds after the start of inflation.
6-36
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
6.27
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Agent Analyzer Accuracy Test
NOTE:
Before performing the accuracy test, the Multispec must be in the full
accuracy mode. The CO2 and Agent warm-up messages shall not
appear on the advisory display.
NOTE:
Before performing the accuracy test, the oxygen analyzer must display
21% FIO2. The sensor must be exposed to ambient air during the entire
Multispec accuracy testing.
6.27.1
Sample Flow Test
6.27.1.1 Verify that an oxygen supply is connected to the machine.
6.27.1.2 Examine the sample circuit consisting of the airway adapter/filter,
sample line, and auxiliary water trap. Replace any components as
needed.
6.27.1.3 Connect a capnomed flowmeter test stand to the patient sample
exhaust port.
6.27.1.4 Verify that the sample flow is within 175 to 225 ml/min.
Rev. AB
6-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.27.2
NM4
Line Block Test
6.27.2.1 Remove the calibration gas cylinder from the multispec calibration
adapter.
6.27.2.2 Set both flow control valves on the multispec calibration adapter
fully counter-clockwise.
6.27.2.3 Attach the patient sample line to the luer lock fitting on the
calibration adapter.
6.27.2.4 Turn the flow control valve clockwise until the capnomed
flowmeter indicates 75 ml/min.
6.27.2.5 Verify that a "Line Block" message illuminates on the remote
display in approximately 15 seconds.
6.27.2.6 Remove the test equipment.
NOTE:
Before performing the accuracy test, the vaporizers must be exposed to
a constant temperature (preferably 22° C) for at least one hour.
6.27.3
Accuracy Test
6.27.3.1 Press the "MONITOR SETUP" key. Touch the "CO2 CAL" soft key
on the left monitor display.
6.27.3.2 Touch the "SELECT" soft key on the right display, and configure
the display to indicate "HAL".
6.27.3.3 Press the "DATA" key. Touch the "GAS ANALYSIS" soft key if it is
not illuminated.
6.27.3.4 Attach the CO2 calibration adapter assembly (P/N 4110216 A) to
the CO2 calibration cylinder (P/N 4107979 P)
6.27.3.5 Turn the flow control valve on the calibration adapter slightly
counter-clockwise.
6.27.3.6 After the CO2 waveform peaks on the remote display, turn off the
flow and remove the sample line from the calibration adapter.
6.27.3.7 Verify that the "EXP" CO2 display indicates within 36.0 to 40.0
mm Hg.
6-38
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.27.3.8 Verify that the "EXP" halothane on the agent display indicates
within 0 to 0.4%
6.27.3.9 Verify that the "EXP" N2O indicates within 32.0 to 38.0%.
Rev. AB
6.27.3.10
Press the "MONITOR SETUP" key. Touch the "F GAS" soft
key on the agent monitor display.
6.27.3.11
Ensure that all vaporizer handwheels are set to the zero, or
OFF position.
6.27.3.12
Fill each vaporizer with the correct anesthetic agent until the
liquid level is within the correct range as indicated on the
sight glass. DO NOT OVER FILL.
6.27.3.13
Calibrate a Riken gas indicator as per manufacturer’s
instructions.
6.27.3.14
Insert the patient circuit elbow into the fresh gas outlet.
6.27.3.15
Connect a sampling "T" between the elbow and the fresh gas
hose.
6.27.3.16
Turn the APL valve knob fully counter-clockwise to its open
position.
6.27.3.17
Attach a short 22 mm hose between the inspiratory and
expiratory valves.
6.27.3.18
Attach a breathing bag to swivel bag mount connector.
6.27.3.19
Set the oxygen flow to 10 l/min. to flush the system of residual
gases.
6.27.3.20
Reduce the oxygen flow to 4.0 l/min.
6.27.3.21
Slowly adjust the Halothane vaporizer to 1.0% volume
concentration, and wait five minutes for the vaporizer to
stabilize.
6.27.3.22
Record the current value shown on the Riken gas analyzer.
6.27.3.23
Verify that the displayed "EXP HAL" value is within the sum
of the tolerances of the vaporizer and the Riken gas indicator.
6-39
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.27.3.24
Slowly adjust the vaporizer to 2.5% volume concentration, and
wait five minutes for the vaporizer to stabilize.
6.27.3.25
Repeat Steps 6.27.3.22 and 6.27.3.23.
6.27.3.26
Slowly adjust the vaporizer to 4.0% volume concentration, and
wait five minutes for the vaporizer to stabilize.
6.27.3.27
Repeat Steps 6.27.3.22 and 6.27.3.23.
6.27.3.28
Turn the vaporizer OFF.
6.27.3.29
Repeat Steps 6.27.3.19 thru 6.27.3.28 for the other two
vaporizers. When comparing displayed values with the Riken
gas analyzer readings, apply the following conversion factors
to the readings obtained with the Riken Model 18H gas
analyzer:
Enflurane x 1.08
Isoflurane x 1.05
Sevoflurane x 1.09
NOTE: If any reading is outside of the Multispec tolerance limits, the
Multispec analyzer must be recalibrated in accordance with the
procedure given in Section 5, and then Procedure 6.27 must be
repeated.
6-40
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
6.28
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Open Reservoir Scavenger
6.28.1
Remove all scavenger hoses one at a time and drain all accumulated
moisture. Inspect all scavenger hoses for deterioration and replace any
worn hoses.
6.28.2
Disconnect the hospital vacuum source from the scavenger.
6.28.3
Remove the scavenger flow control needle valve assembly. Inspect the
needle valve and seat for lint or dust acumulation. Clean with
compressed air if necessary, and reinstall the needle valve assembly.
6.28.4
Remove the scavenger mounting screws.
6.28.5
Remove the two screws securing the access panel at the bottom of the
scavenger canister.
6.28.6
Remove and inspect the silencer; replace if needed.
6.28.7
Remove the reservoir canister from the scavenger body by unscrewing
the four socket head cap screws located at the top of the canister.
6.28.8
Remove the flowmeter from its housing by turning it counter-clockwise.
Inspect the tube and clean with compressed air if needed.
6.28.9
Reassemble the scavenger assembly, and reactivate the vacuum source.
6.28.10
Perform the following negative pressure relief test:
6.28.10.1
Rev. AB
Connect a 19 mm scavenger hose between the bottom of the
absorber pole and the right-hand port on the scavenger.
Connect a 19 mm scavenger hose between the APL valve and
the rear port on the absorber pole. The left-hand scavenger
port may be capped for this test, or may be connected to the
ventilator relief valve. Connect a DISS vacuum hose to the
threaded terminal on the left side of the scavenger.
Alternatively, an adapter can be used to attach a wall suction
hose to the hose barb fitting on the adapter.
6-41
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.28.10.2
Connect a short 22 mm breathing hose from the inspiratory
valve to the expiratory valve on the absorber, or the
expiratory hose terminal on the ultrasonic flow sensor, if
applicable. Set the Man/Auto selector valve to the BAG
position. Turn the APL valve control knob fully counterclockwise.
6.28.10.3
Verify that the suction waste gas disposal system is active.
6.28.10.4
Adjust the scavenger needle valve until the flowmeter
indicates between the white lines. Close all flow control valves
on the anesthesia machine. Occlude the absorber breathing
bag terminal.
6.28.10.5
Install a scavenger adapter (P/N 4108114) with a hose barb
between the 19 mm hose terminal of the scavenger, and the
scavenger hose. Connect a test pressure monitor to the hose
barb on the adapter and observe the pressure reading on the
test gauge. The gauge shall indicate a pressure of 0 to -0.5 cm
H2O.
6.28.11
Perform the following positive pressure relief test:
6.28.11.1
Perform Steps 6.28.10.1 thru 6.28.10.3.
6.28.11.2
If the absorber system or ventilator bellows are equipped with
a PEEP valve, turn the PEEP valve control knob fully
counter-clockwise.
6.28.11.3
Turn the scavenger needle valve fully clockwise (closed).
6.28.11.4
Open the oxygen flow control valve on the anesthesia machine
to a flow of 10 l/min. and occlude the absorber breathing bag
terminal.
6.28.11.5
The flow of oxygen shall now exit the system through the
relief ports around the top of the canister. The test pressure
gauge shall indicate a pressure less than 1.0 cm H2O.
6.28.11.6
After the test, adjust the scavenger needle valve for a
flowmeter indication halfway between the two white lines.
6-42
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.28A
Scavenger Interface, A/C
6.28A.1 Remove all scavenger hoses one at a time, and drain all accumulated
moisture. Inspect all scavenger hoses for deterioration and replace any
worn hoses.
6.28A.2 Remove the safety relief valve housing by unscrewing it in a counterclockwise direction.
6.28A.3 Inspect the rubber O-ring and replace if worn.
6.28A.4 Remove the safety relief valve from its housing by twisting it out in a
counter-clockwise direction. The tips of needle-nose pliers can be used
to turn the valve. Be careful not to damage the valve disk.
6.28A.5 Remove any accumulated lint or dust from the valve with a soft brush.
The valve may be further cleaned with a low flow of clean air or
oxygen. The scavenger body can be cleaned with a moist cloth.
6.28A.6 Reinstall the valve into the housing, making sure that it is threaded
all the way into the housing and that the plastic washer is properly
seated on its upper surface.
6.28A.7 Make sure that the interior of the valve body is completely dry.
Reinstall the valve housing onto the scavenger body, making sure that
the O-ring is properly seated.
6.28A.8 Perform the following Pre-Use Checkout procedure:
Rev. AB
6.28A.8.1
Connect a 19 mm scavenger hose between the bottom of the
absorber pole and the right-hand port on the scavenger.
Connect a short 19 mm scavenger hose between the APL valve
and the port on the rear of the absorber pole. Connect a 19
mm scavenger hose between the ventilator relief valve and the
left-hand port on the scavenger.
6.28A.8.2
Connect a short 22 mm breathing hose from the inspiratory
valve to the expiratory valve on the absorber, or the
expiratory hose terminal on the ultrasonic flow sensor, if
applicable.
6.28A.8.3
Set the Man/Auto valve to the AUTO position.
6.28A.8.4
If the absorber system or ventilator bellows are equipped with
a PEEP valve, turn the PEEP valve control knob fully
counter-clockwise.
6-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.28B
NM4
6.28A.8.5
Set the oxygen flow to 10 l/min. and occlude the 19 mm
scavenger terminal labeled EXHAUST.
6.28A.8.6
After the ventilator bellows inflates, the flow of oxygen will
exit the system through the positive pressure safety relief
valve. At this point, the absorber system breathing pressure
gauge shall indicate a pressure of 10.0 cm H2O or less.
Scavenger Interface
6.28B.1 Check all scavenger hoses and reservoir bag for deterioration. Replace
all worn components.
6.28B.2 Negative Relief Valve Cleaning:
6.28B.2.1
Remove the plastic valve cover on the front surface of the
scavenger body by turning it in a counter-clockwise direction.
6.28B.2.2
Remove the valve and washer from the scavenger body by
turning it counter-clockwise. A needle-nose pliers may be used
to turn the valve, but use care not to damage the valve’s
fragile disk.
6.28B.2.3
Brush any accumulated lint or dust off the valve with a soft
brush. The valve may be further cleaned with a low flow of
clean air or oxygen.
6.28B.2.4
Reinstall the plastic washer and valve into the scavenger
body. Replace the valve cover.
6.28B.3 Negative Relief Safety Valve Cleaning:
6.28B.3.1
Unscrew the chrome plated valve housing on the left side of
the scavenger body by turning its fitting counter-clockwise
with a wrench.
6.28B.3.2
Unscrew the valve from the housing by turning it in a
counter-clockwise direction.
6.28B.3.3
Brush any accumulated lint or dust off the valve with a soft
brush. The valve may be further cleaned with a low flow of
clean air or oxygen.
6.28B.3.4
Reinstall the valve in the housing, and then reinstall the
housing into the scavenger body. Note: This valve does not
require washers or O-rings.
6-44
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.28B.4 Positive Relief Valve Cleaning:
6.28B.4.1
Remove the valve housing on the right side of the scavenger
body by turning it counter-clockwise.
6.28B.4.2
Inspect the rubber O-ring and replace if worn.
6.28B.4.3
Remove the valve from the housing by turning it counterclockwise. A needle-nose pliers may be used to turn the valve,
but use care not to damage the valve’s fragile disk.
6.28B.4.4
Brush any accumulated lint or dust off the valve with a soft
brush. The valve may be further cleaned with a low flow of
clean air or oxygen.
6.28B.4.5
Reinstall the valve and plastic washer into the housing.
6.28B.4.6
Reinstall the valve housing onto the scavenger body, making
sure that the O-ring is properly seated.
6.28B.5 Negative Pressure Test:
Rev. AB
6.28B.5.1
Connect a 22mm breathing hose from the inspiratory valve to
the expiratory valve on the absorber, or the expiratory hose
terminal on the ultrasonic flow sensor, if applicable. Set the
Man/Auto valve to the BAG position. Turn the APL valve fully
counter-clockwise. Occlude the bag mount connector.
6.28B.5.2
Verify that the suction waste gas disposal system is active.
6.28B.5.3
Close all flow control valves on the machine. Adjust the
scavenger needle valve to allow typical suction through the
scavenger.
6.28B.5.4
Install a scavenger adapter (P/N 4108114) with a hose barb
between the 19mm hose terminal of the scavenger and the
scavenger hose. Connect a test monitor to the hose barb
adapter and observe the pressure reading on the test gauge.
The gauge shall indicate a pressure of <-1.0 cmH2O.
6-45
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
6.28B.6 Positive Pressure Test:
6.28B.6.1
Close the scavenger needle valve by turning it fully clockwise.
6.28B.6.2
Push the O2 Flush button to inflate the scavenger reservoir
bag. Open the oxygen flow control valve to 10 l/min.
6.28B.6.3
Observe the pressure reading on the test gauge. The gauge
shall indicate a pressure of <10.0 cmH2O.
6.28B.6.4
Remove the test equipment. Readjust the scavenger needle
valve to allow typical suction through the scavenger.
6-46
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
6.29
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
Service Screens
6.29.1
Main Service Screen
6.29.1.1 Power the machine up.
6.29.1.2 To access the main service screen, press the MONITOR key,
SYSTEM CONFIG key and SELECTION dial simultaneously.
6.29.1.3 Record the information given in the appropriate box.
6.29.1.4 Enter the I.D. number and a service code on the main screen.
6.29.1.5 Touch the first window of the Technical Service Rep. I.D. area on
the screen, scroll to the correct number with the selection dial,
press DIAL to enter the first digit of the I.D. number. Enter each
digit in the same manner, and record at the bottom of the test
report.
6.29.1.6 Touch the SERVICE CODE area on the screen, scroll through the
list of codes with the selection dial, press DIAL to enter the
appropriate code.
6.29.1.7 Touching the RESET area on the screen resets the last service date
to the current date and resets the hours running since last service
to zero (0).
6.29.2
Set P.M.S. criteria.
6.29.2.1 Touch the PMS CRITERIA key.
6.29.2.2 Touch the Month key to advance the display to the next service
due date. The internal clock of the machine limits the amount of
date advance to a maximum of six (6) months from the current
service date.
Rev. AB
6-47
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.30
*
*
NM4
Oxygen Flush and 100% O2 Final Test
6.30.1
Close the nitrous oxide pipeline shut off valve and cylinder valve.
6.30.2
Set the oxygen flow rate to 5 l/min.
6.30.3
Open the nitrous oxide flow control valve to its counter-clockwise stop.
6.30.4
After the nitrous oxide flow stops, close the nitrous oxide flow control
valve.
6.30.5
Close the oxygen flow control valve.
6.30.6
Set the LOCK-OUT device to "ALL GASES".
6.30.7
Close the additional gas cylinder and pipeline valves.
6.30.8
Bleed the gas from the additional gas circuits.
6.30.9
Set the LOCK-OUT device to "O2 + N2O".
6.30.10
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY.
6.30.11
Press and release the O2 FLUSH button.
6.30.12
Does the flow of oxygen stop immediately? __ (Y)
6.30.13
Connect a test minute volumeter to the common gas outlet.
6.30.14
Press the O2 FLUSH button for 15 seconds; multiply the value by 4.
6.30.15
What is the oxygen flush flow rate? ___ l/min. (45-65)
6.30.16
Remove the test minute volumeter.
6.30.17
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
6.30.18
Insert the sensor from a calibrated O2 Med into the inspiratory valve
dome.
6.30.19
Press the O2 FLUSH button.
6.30.20
What is the O2 concentration? ___ % O2 (97-100)
* These items do not apply to machines with later design (P/N 4113229) ORC.
6-48
Rev. AB
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
6.31
Rev. AB
PMC PROCEDURE (continued)
6.30.21
Remove the O2 Med sensor from the valve dome.
6.30.22
Close the oxygen cylinder valve.
6.30.23
Bleed the oxygen circuit by pressing the O2 FLUSH button.
Final Check
6.31.1
Reinstall the monitor box cover and restore all connections to the
patient interface panel.
6.31.2
Verify that the pipeline hoses are connected to the hospital pipeline
outlets.
6.31.3
Verify that the APL valve knob is turned completely counter clockwise,
fully open.
6.31.4
Verify that the O2 Med sensor is removed from the valve dome adapter.
6.31.5
Verify that the valve dome is plugged.
6.31.6
Verify that the machine is plugged into a live outlet.
6.31.7
Verify the correct date and time on the service log screen.
6.31.8
Return all machine controls and settings to their original state.
6-49
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
7.0
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
This section outlines several software installation methods, and also describes the
operation of the Service Software Toolkit (SST).
The Service Software Toolkit (SST) allows all service constants, configurations, logs
and templates to be saved to a disk for later viewing or adding to a service report.
These same constants can be reloaded after a processor has been replaced. The SST
can also be used to install Narkomed 4 software. Actual servicing of the machine is
performed manually without the use of SST.
Software updates to the Narkomed 4 anesthesia system, including communication
protocols for external monitors are done through a serial port connection to an
external PC or through the O.R. Data Manager (ORDM). The software can be
downloaded to the PC via modem, or furnished on a floppy disk.
Following is a summary of the software installation methods described in this
section:
--
From an external PC using the batch file LOADNM4.BAT. Initial installation
will install the SpaceLabs Datalogger, Marquette Tram Net, Datex AS3, and
Criticare POET IQ protocols.
--
From the ORDM. Initial installation will install the SpaceLabs Datalogger,
Marquette Tram Net, Datex AS3, and Criticare POET IQ protocols.
--
From an external PC using the SST. Any desired protocols may be selected.
--
From the ORDM using the SST. Any desired protocols may be selected.
Rev. H
7-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
7.1 SOFTWARE TRANSFER TO PC VIA MODEM
Equipment required:
--Interface Cable, NAD Part No. 4109882 P (9-pin to 25-pin)
or 4110328 A (9-pin to 9-pin)
--IBM® PC or IBM PC Compatible configured with:
•PC-DOS or MS-DOS V3.3 or higher
•RS-232C Serial Port connected to COM 1
•Hard Drive or Floppy Drive
•Modem (or external modem)
7.1.1
Call the NAD Technical Service Department and obtain the following
information for downloading NARKOMED 4 software:
•System configuration
•Communications protocol
7.1.2
Download the software to the hard disk or to Drive A on the PC.
7.2 INSTALLING NM4 SOFTWARE FROM A PC
7.2.1
Set the System Power switch on the NARKOMED 4 to STANDBY, and
the power switch on the PC to OFF.
7.2.2
Connect the appropriate interface cable (9-pin or 25-pin) to COM 1 on
the PC, and connect the other end of the cable to the NM4 serial
interface Port A or Port C as shown in Figure 7-1.
7.2.3
Press and hold the MONITOR SETUP and TREND keys, and turn the
System Power switch to ON. Release the MONITOR SETUP and
TREND keys when the load mode screen shown in Figure 7-2 appears.
7.2.4
Power up the PC and wait for the DOS prompt to appear on the screen.
7.2.5
Set the PC to read the drive holding the software. For example: if the
software was downloaded to drive A, type A: and press ENTER.
7.2.6
Type LOAD_NM4 and press ENTER. Note that the character between
LOAD and NM4 is an underline.
Software installation is complete when the machine resets.
7-2
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.2.7
Set the System Power switch on the NM4 to STANDBY, and the power
switch on the PC to OFF. Disconnect the interface cable.
SV70103
SERIAL INTERFACE
ASSEMBLY
A
PORT A
B
PRINTER
C
D
NARKOMED 4
REAR VIEW
PORT C
Figure 7-1: NARKOMED 4 EXTERNAL SOFTWARE LOAD INTERFACE CONNECTION
Rev. H
7-3
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
FIRMWARE TESTS
BOOT PROGRAM
INC.
PASS
NM4
NAD NM4 PROCESSOR BOOT ROM
(C) COPYRIGHT 1988-1990, NAD
VERSION: 1.2
NM4 SOFTWARE LOADER
MAIN
WAITING FOR INPUT
FIGURE 7-2: NARKOMED 4 LOAD MODE SCREEN
7.3 INSTALLING NM4 SOFTWARE FROM THE ORDM
To install NM4 software from an ORDM, a 3½ in. floppy disk with the
Narkomed 4 software is needed.
7.3.1
Insert the floppy disk into the ORDM.
7.3.2
Set the System Power switch on the Narkomed 4 to STANDBY.
7.3.3
Press and hold the MONITOR SETUP and TREND keys, and turn the
System Power switch to ON. Release the MONITOR SETUP and
TREND keys when the load mode screen shown in Figure 7-2 appears.
Software installation is complete when the machine resets.
7-4
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.4 INSTALLING NM4 SOFTWARE FROM A PC USING THE SST
Running the SST from an external computer requires an IBM® PC or IBM
PC compatible configured with:
PC-DOS or MS-DOS V3.3 or higher
RS-232C Serial Port connected to COM 1
Hard Drive or 3½ in. Floppy Drive
The COM 1 port on the PC must be configured as follows:
Baud Rate:
Parity:
9600
None
Stop Bits:
Data Bits:
1
8
The download port (A or C) on the NM4 must be set to Vitalink and be
configured as follows:
Baud Rate:
Parity:
9600
None
Stop Bits:
Data Bits:
1
8
7.4.1
Verify that the System Power switch on the machine is set to
STANDBY, and that the power switch on the PC is OFF.
7.4.2
Connect a 30 in. long Vitalink cable (P/N 4110328) to COM 1 on the PC,
and connect the other end of the cable to Port A or Port C on the
Narkomed 4 serial port interface (ref. Figure 7-1).
7.4.3
At the DOS prompt, type SST; the SST Main Menu appears (Figure 73).
7.4.4
Select ENTER PRIMARY SERVICE from the SST main menu.
7.4.5
Select Load System Software from the Primary Service menu (Figure 78); The software load screen shown in Figure 7-9 appears.
7.4.6
Select the desired protocols, and press ESC or F10; follow the on-screen
instructions to download the software.
Software installation is complete when the machine resets.
7.4.7
Rev. H
Set the System Power switch on the NM4 to STANDBY, and the power
switch on the PC to OFF. Disconnect the interface cable.
7-5
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
7.5 INSTALLING NM4 SOFTWARE FROM THE ORDM USING THE SST
In order to run the SST from an ORDM, a 3½ in. floppy disk with
Narkomed 4 SST software is needed.
7.5.1
For NM4 software version 1.30:
--
Turn the System Power switch to ON.
--
Press the CONFIG key on the ORDM keyboard, then select Service
Functions.
--
Enter the password, and go to DOS by selecting YES from the DOS
selection menu. The c:\> prompt will then appear on the remote
display.
--
Insert the NM4 SST disk into the ORDM floppy disk drive. On the
ORDM:
- on a 286 ORDM, type c:
- on a 386 ORDM, type a:
--
At the ORDM keyboard, type SST and press ENTER; the SST Main
Menu appears (Figure 7-3).
7.5.1A For NM4 software version 1.40:
--
Insert the NM4 SST disk into the ORDM floppy disk drive.
--
Turn the System Power switch to STANDBY, then return the switch to
ON.
--
Wait for several minutes until the remote display screen displays the
SST Main menu (Figure 7-3).
7.5.2
Select ENTER PRIMARY SERVICE from the SST main menu.
7.5.3
Select Load System Software from the Primary Service menu (Figure 78); The software load screen shown in Figure 7-9 appears.
7.5.4
Select the desired protocols, and press ESC on the ORDM keyboard;
follow the on-screen instructions to download the software.
Software installation is complete when the machine resets.
7-6
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6 SST Operation
The SST Main Menu shown in Figure 7-3 appears on the remote display (or
external PC).
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Serial Port Configuration
Time and Date
Display UUT Configuration
Save/Restore Settings
Enter Primary Service
Exit SST
SV40101
Figure 7-3: SST MAIN MENU
In the upper left corner of the screen, MACHINE ID indicates the
Narkomed 4 is under test (NM4), and the SERIAL NUMBER of the machine
is displayed. The system software version number, and a system features ID
number are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
The service functions that are available through the SST main menu are
described on the following pages.
To terminate the SST program, use the down arrow key to move the cursor
to EXIT SST, and press ENTER.
Rev. H
7-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.1
NM4
Serial Port Configuration
The screen shown in Figure 7-4 indicates the current configuration
parameters for each of the Narkomed 4 serial ports, and also allows
changing of these settings.
--
At the SST Main Menu, move the cursor to SERIAL PORT
CONFIGURATION and press ENTER to display the Serial Port
Configuration screen.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
PT A
PT B
PT C
PT D
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
PROTOCOL
VITALINK
OR/LINK
NONE
DATEX
BAUD
9600
9600
9600
19200
PARITY
NONE
EVEN
EVEN
EVEN
STOP
1
2
1
1
DATA
8
8
8
8
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40102
Figure 7-4: SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION SCREEN
--
Move the flashing cursor in the PROTOCOL column to the line
corresponding to the port for which you want to change the settings.
Only the installed protocols can be selected.
Press ENTER, then use the up or down arrow key to make the selection,
and press ENTER again. The cursor will start flashing.
--
Move the flashing cursor to the BAUD column and press ENTER. Use
the up or down arrow key to select the desired baud rate, and press
ENTER again. The cursor will start flashing.
--
Move the flashing cursor to the PARITY column and press ENTER. Use
the up or down arrow key to select the desired parity, and press
ENTER again. The cursor will start flashing.
7-8
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
--
Move the flashing cursor to the STOP column and press ENTER. Use
the up or down arrow key to select the desired stop bit, and press
ENTER again. The cursor will start flashing.
--
Move the flashing cursor to the DATA column and press ENTER. Use
the up or down arrow key to select the desired data bits, and press
ENTER again. The cursor will start flashing.
--
On the ORDM keyboard, press ESC to return to the SST Main Menu.
(Use F10 on the external PC.)
7.6.2
Set Time and Date
The Set Time and Date screen shown in Figure 7-5 allows verification and
setting of the machine’s clock.
--
At the SST Main Menu, move the cursor to SET TIME AND DATE and
press ENTER.
--
Follow the on-screen instructions for setting the month, day, year, hour
and minute.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
SST Date & Time: 07-MAR-1996 11:42
UUT Date & Time: 07-MAR-96
11:42:27
CHANGE UUT DATE & TIME:
MONTH DAY YEAR HOUR MINUTE
APR
13
1996
11
42
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40103
Figure 7-5: SET TIME AND DATE SCREEN
Rev. H
7-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
--
7.6.3
NM4
On the ORDM, press ESC to return to the SST Main Menu. (Use F10
on the external PC.)
Display UUT Configuration
--
The Display Unit Under Test (UUT) Configuration screen (Figure 7-6)
shows the last service date, hours running since last service,total
machine run hours, system up time, serial number, and the software
version number for each of the machine items listed.
--
At the SST Main Menu, move the cursor to DISPLAY UUT
CONFIGURATION and press ENTER.
--
On the ORDM, press ESC to return to the SST Main Menu. (Use F10
on the external PC.)
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
LAST SERVICE DATE
HOURS RUNNING SINCE LAST SERVICE
TOTAL MACHINE RUN HOURS
SYSTEM UP TIME
SERIAL NUMBER
SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION
TOUCH PANEL SOFTWARE VERSION
DATAGRIP SOFTWARE VERSION
MULTISPEC SOFTWARE VERSION
VPO SOFTWARE VERSION
POWER SUPPLY SOFTWARE VERSION
: 17:SEP:95
: 0470.3
: 0485.7
: 0000:15:16
: 00011066
: 1.40
: 1.02
: 1.01
: 1.04
: 1.02
: 1.01
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40104
Figure 7-6: DISPLAY UUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN
7-10
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.4
Save/Restore Settings
This screen allows serial port configuration and templates to be copied
to the ORDM disk drive, or to the external PC disk drive. These
settings can then be restored from the disk to the machine following
any hardware replacement.
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) set the cursor to
SAVE/RESTORE SETTINGS and press ENTER.
--
Move the cursor with the up or down keys to the desired function and
press ENTER.
Press arrow keys to change menu items, return to activate sub-screen
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Save Serial Ports
Save Templates
Restore Serial Ports
Restore Templates
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40121
Figure 7-7: SAVE/RESTORE SETTINGS SCREEN
--
Rev. H
Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Primary Service Menu. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to return to
the SST Main Menu.
7-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.5
NM4
Primary Service Menu
At the SST Main Menu, move the cursor to ENTER PRIMARY SERVICE
and press ENTER. Software installation and other service functions are
entered through this screen, shown in Figure 7-8.
Press arrow keys to change menu items, return to activate sub-screen
MACHINE ID: NM4
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
ACCESS LEVEL: VIEW SERVICE ID:
Load System Software
Service Log
Service Criteria
Service/Test Hardware
Save/Restore Constants
Service Dump
Template Manager
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40105
Figure 7-8: PRIMARY SERVICE MENU
--
With the flashing cursor at ACCESS LEVEL, press ENTER.
--
Use the up or down arrow key to select the desired mode and press
ENTER. The following service modes are available:
VIEW:
SERV:
PMS:
INST:
For
For
For
For
verifying machine configuration and status
unscheduled service
scheduled Periodic Manufacturer’s Service
initial installation
--
Type in your ID on the ORDM or (external PC) keyboard and press
ENTER again.
--
Move the cursor with the up or down keys to select the desired
functions. These are described in the following paragraphs.
7-12
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.6
Load System Software
This screen displays the list of protocols available for communication
with external monitors.
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) set the cursor at Load
System Software and press ENTER.
Maximum protocols selected
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
OHMEDA RASCAL 1.00
OHMEDA RGM 1.00
NELLCOR N1000 1.00
CRITIKON DINAMAP 1.00
PURITAN BENNETT 1.00
DATASCOP MULTINEX 1.00
DATASCOP DIAP 1.01
* COLIN BP - 508 1.00
* SIEMENS SIRECUST 1.00
* CRITICAR 1100 1.01
* CRITICAR POET IQ 1.00
TRAM NET 1.01
* DATEX CARDCAP 1.00
DATEX AS3 1.00
SPACELAB LOGGER 1.00
* indicates selected protocol
MAXIMUM PROTOCOLS SELECTED
ESC or F10 to download code
SV40125
Figure 7-9: SOFTWARE LOAD SCREEN
-- Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list; press
ENTER to select the desired protocol(s), and press ESC to initiate the
downloading process. (Ref. Paragraphs 7.4 and 7.5)
Rev. H
7-13
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.7
NM4
Service Log
This screen displays the service log of the machine showing a list of normal
and failed events, error events, service and calibration events. See Figure 710.
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) set the cursor at
SERVICE LOG and press ENTER.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Service Log - 21 entries
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
03-07-95
03-07-95
03-07-95
03-07-95
03-07-95
03-07-95
03-07-95
03-07-95
09:17
09:16
09:13
09:11
09:09
09:08
09:07
09:06
00000005
ORDM
ORDM
ORDM
ORDM
06000400
ORDM
06000400
F1 SAVE
TEO1
V001
V003
V002
V001
0000
V001
0000
ENTERING
VTLK COM
VTLK COM
VTLK COM
VTLK COM
SOFTWARE
VTLK COM
SOFTWARE
TESTMODE
ERROR
REGAINED
LOST
ERROR
STARTUP
ERROR
STARTUP
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40106
Figure 7-10: SERVICE LOG SCREEN
--
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log; PGUP and
PGDN keys to move from page to page in the log.
--
To copy the service log to the disk drive in the ORDM or the external
PC, press the F1 key on the PC (MONITOR key on the ORDM).
--
Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Primary Service Menu. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to return to
the SST Main Menu.
7-14
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.8
Service Criteria
The screen shown in Figure 7-11 indicates the current settings for the due
date for periodic machine maintenance, and also allows changing of these
settings (except in VIEW mode).
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) move the cursor at
SERVICE CRITERIA and press ENTER.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Service Criteria
PMS Due Date: DEC: 1996
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
JAN
1996
1996
1996
1996
1996
1996
1997
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40107
Figure 7-11: SERVICE CRITERIA SCREEN
Rev. H
--
Use the up and down keys to scroll to the desired month/year, and press
ENTER to make the selection.
--
Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Primary Service Menu. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to return to
the SST Main Menu.
7-15
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9
NM4
Service/Test Hardware
The Service/Test Hardware screen (Figure 7-12) displays a menu that allows
access to the service functions listed.
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) move the cursor to
SERVICE/TEST HARDWARE and press ENTER.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Diagnostics
Serial Ports
Oxygen Monitor
Pressure Monitor
Flow Monitor
SpO2 Monitor
NIBP Monitor
Gas Analyzer Monitor
Line Block
ORDM Status
Machine Status
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40108
Figure 7-12: SERVICE/TEST HARDWARE SCREEN
--
Use the up and down arrows to select the desired sub-screen, and press
ENTER.
These screens indicate power-up diagnostic and machine status, provide for
serial port loopback tests, and also verification and calibration of monitors.
These tests and their associated screens are described on the following
pages.
7-16
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9.1
Diagnostics
The Diagnostics screen shown in Figure 7-13 displays the results of a
series of tests performed when the machine is powered up.
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
FIRMWARE TESTS:
MEMORY TEST BANK1:
MEMORY TEST BANK2:
TIMER/INTERRUPT:
ANALOG TEST:
AUDIO PRIMARY:
AUDIO BACKUP:
AUDIO SpO2:
SERIAL I/O TEST:
CLOCK TEST:
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY:
ALTERNATE PROCESSOR:
A/D CONVERTER:
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40109
Figure 7-13: DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Primary Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10)
again to return to the Primary Service Menu.
Rev. H
7-17
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9.2
NM4
Serial Ports
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to SERIAL PORTS and press ENTER.
-- Use the up and down arrows to select Port A, and press ENTER. See
Figure 7-14.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Move loop back cable to the test port,
then press ENTER to run the test.
PTA
PTB
PTC
PTD
LOOP BACK
CURRENT TEST
Note: If the SST is connected to Port A or C,
do not run the test on the SST port.
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40110
Figure 7-14: SERIAL PORTS TEST SCREEN
-- Remove any cable connected to Port A and insert the loopback test plug
(P/N 4112871) into Port A. [Skip Port A test if SST is not running
through the ORDM.]
NOTE: One end of the test plug is marked RS232, and the other end is
marked RS422. Be sure to insert the end of the test plug that
corresponds to the Port A communication interface configuration.
-- Follow the on-screen instructions to perform the Loop Back test on Port
A. If the test is successful, the CURRENT TEST message changes to
PASSED.
-- Move the test plug to the next port, follow the on-screen instructions
and test each port in the same manner.
7-18
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
7.6.9.3
Oxygen Monitor
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) set the cursor
to OXYGEN MONITOR and press ENTER.
The Oxygen Monitor screen shown in Figure 7-15 displays current
oxygen cell readings and provides a zero calibration procedure for
the machine’s oxygen monitor.
Oxygen Monitor
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Current Oxygen Cell A: 132
Percent O2: 22
Stored Cell A Zero: 2
Current Oxygen Cell B: 135
Stored Cell B Zero: 4
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE FUEL CELL FROM SENSOR HOUSING.
- LET CURRENT CELL VALUES STABILIZE.
- SELECT "Zero Oxygen Monitor" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER
TO ENTER CURRENT VALUES AS CALIBRATED VALUES.
- DISCONNECT O2 SENSOR HOUSING CABLE
BEFORE RE-INSTALLING FUEL CELL.
- RE-INSTALL FUEL CELL.
- RE-CONNECT CABLE.
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- EXPOSE O2 CELL TO ROOM AIR.
- LET CURRENT CELL VALUES STABILIZE.
- SELECT "Span Oxygen Monitor" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER.
- VERIFY THAT CURRENT O2 VALUE IS 21%.
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40111
Figure 7-15: OXYGEN MONITOR SERVICE SCREEN
-- Calibration can be performed while in the Service mode by following the
on-screen instructions.
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
Rev. H
7-19
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9.4
NM4
Pressure Monitor
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) set the cursor
to PRESSURE MONITOR and press ENTER.
The Pressure Monitor screen shown in Figure 7-16 displays the
current pressure value and provides zero and span calibration
procedures for the machine’s pressure monitor.
Pressure Monitor
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Stored Zero : 235
Stored Span: 546
Current Pressure Value: 235
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE PRESSURE SAMPLE LINE FROM ABSORBER; EXPOSE TO AIR.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- SELECT "Zero Pressure Monitor" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER
TO ENTER THE CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION ZERO.
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE PRESSURE SAMPLE LINE FROM ABSORBER.
- APPLY 50cm H2O CONSTANT PRESSURE AT SAMPLE LINE, VERIFIED
BY A KNOWN, CALIBRATED METER.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- SELECT "Span Pressure Monitor" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER
TO ENTER THE CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION SPAN.
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40112
Figure 7-16: PRESSURE MONITOR SERVICE SCREEN
-- Calibration can be performed while in the Service mode by following the
on-screen instructions.
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
7-20
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9.5
Flow Monitor
The Flow Monitor screen shown in Figure 7-17 displays the current
respiratory flow value and provides zero and span calibration procedure
for the machine’s respiratory flow monitor.
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to FLOW MONITOR and press ENTER.
Respiratory Flow Monitor
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Stored Zero : 106
Stored Span: 179
Current Flow Value: 107
ZERO CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE SPIROMED SENSOR FROM ABSORBER.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- SELECT "Zero Flow Monitor" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER
TO ENTER THE CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION ZERO.
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- REMOVE SPIROMED SENSOR FROM ABSORBER.
- ATTACH A GAS SUPPLY AT INPUT OF SENSOR
AND A CALIBRATED FLOWMETER AT OUTPUT.
- PROVIDE A STEADY 10 L/MIN FLOW THROUGH SPIROMED SENSOR.
- LET CURRENT VALUE STABILIZE.
- SELECT "Span Flow Monitor" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER
TO ENTER THE CURRENT VALUE AS THE CALIBRATION SPAN.
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40113
Figure 7-17: RESPIRATORY FLOW MONITOR SERVICE SCREEN
-- Calibration can be performed while in the Service mode by following the
on-screen instructions.
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
Rev. H
7-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9.6
NM4
SpO2 Monitor
The SpO2 Monitor screen shown in Figure 7-18 displays current SpO2
and current Pulse values reported by the machine’s SpO2 monitor.
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to SPO2 MONITOR and press ENTER.
SpO2 Monitor
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
SpO2 Value: ****
PULSE Value: ****
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40114
Figure 7-18: SpO2 MONITOR SERVICE SCREEN
-- Refer to Section 5 of this manual for calibration verification procedures.
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
7-22
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9.7
NIBP Monitor
The NIBP Monitor screen shown in Figure 7-19 displays current
pressure readings and provides a verification procedure for cuff inflation
pressure.
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to NIBP MONITOR and press ENTER.
NIBP Monitor
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Real Time Pressure: ****
SYS: ****
MEAN: ****
DIAS: ****
PULSE: ****
NIBP PRESSURE CALIBRATION VERIFICATION:
- PLACE A "T" IN LINE WITH THE BP CUFF.
- ATTACH A PRESSURE GAUGE AT "T".
- SELECT "Inflate NIBP Cuff" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER.
- NIBP MODULE WILL INFLATE CUFF TO 180MM HG.
- VERIFY WITH PRESSURE GAUGE.
- SELECT "Stop NIBP" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER TO END THE TEST.
NIBP INFLATION, DEFLATION, AND LEAK CHECKS:
- REFER TO SERVICE MANUAL FOR PROCEDURES.
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40115
Figure 7-19: NIBP MONITOR SERVICE SCREEN
-- Calibration verification can be performed while in the Service mode by
following the on-screen instructions.
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
Rev. H
7-23
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9.8
NM4
Gas Analyzer Monitor
The Gas Analyzer Monitor screen shown in Figure 7-20 displays current
gas analysis and provides a span calibration procedure for the
machine’s multispec monitor.
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to GAS ANALYZER MONITOR and press ENTER.
Gas Analyzer Monitor
MACHINE ID: NM4
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
CURRENT N2O: 0.0
CURRENT AGENT: ****
CURRENT CO2: 0.4
STATUS: IDLE
MODE: VIEW
SPAN CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- WAIT FOR MODE = "READY".
- PERFORM GAS ANALYZER ACCURACY TEST.
- IF TEST FAILS PERFORM SPAN CAL:
- WITH PATIENT CIRCUIT ENABLED:
- SELECT "Span Gas Analyzer" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER.
- WAIT FOR STATUS = "ZERO COMPLETE"
- ATTACH SAMPLE LINE TO CALIBRATION BOTTLE.
- TURN FLOW ON BOTTLE TO 250ML/MIN.
- LET THE CURRENT CELL VALUES STABILIZE.
- REMOVE THE SAMPLE LINE FROM THE BOTTLE.
- HIT ENTER AND WAIT FOR STATUS = "PASSED OR FAILED"
SCRUBBER INSPECTION/ REPLACEMENT:
- REPLACE SCRUBBER BOTTLE ANNUALLY.
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40116
Figure 7-20: GAS ANALYZER MONITOR SERVICE SCREEN
-- Calibration can be performed while in the Service mode by following the
on-screen instructions. A more detailed description of calibration
connections is provided in Section 5 of this manual.
NOTE:
The scrubber inspection message does not appear on machines
equipped with an model 4610 gas analyzer.
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
7-24
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.9.9
Line Block
The Line Block screen shown in Figure 7-21 displays current sample
line pressure and provides a calibration procedure for the machine’s
oxygen monitor.
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to LINE BLOCK and press ENTER.
Line block calibration monitor
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
CURRENT SAMPLE PRESSURE: 717
STORED REFERENCE: 94
LINE BLOCK CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:
- WITH PATIENT CIRCUIT ENABLED:
- ENSURE THAT SAMPLE LINE IS CONNECTED AND UNOCCLUDED.
- PLACE A FLOWMETER AT THE SAMPLE EXHAUST.
- ATTACH A FLOW RESTRICTOR, FIX 0336, TO PATIENT SAMPLE LINE.
- WAIT FOR VALID CURRENT SAMPLE PRESSURE.
- ADJUST RESTRICTION IN ORDER TO OBTAIN A FLOW OF 100ML/MIN.
- SELECT "Store Reference" MENU ITEM AND HIT ENTER.
- FULLY OCCLUDE SAMPLE LINE AND OBSERVE THAT THE LINE BLOCK
ALARM BECOMES ACTIVE AFTER AT LEAST 15 SECONDS.
- REMOVE FLOW RESTRICTOR FROM SAMPLE LINE.
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40117
Figure 7-21: LINE BLOCK SERVICE SCREEN
-- Calibration and alarm test can be performed while in the Service mode
by following the on-screen instructions.
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
Rev. H
7-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
7.6.9.10 ORDM Status
The ORDM Status screen shown in Figure 7-22 displays the current
status of the machine’s remote display and printer relays.
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to ORDM STATUS and press ENTER.
Press arrow keys to change fields, return to perform action
MACHINE ID: NM4
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Video Mode: ORDM
Printer Mode: MACHINE
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40118
Figure 7-22: ORDM STATUS SCREEN
-- The relays can be switched while in the Service mode as follows:
Use the up or down keys to select Video Mode or Printer Mode,
and press ENTER. Select ORDM or MACHINE and press ENTER
again.
For the Video Mode, when ORDM is selected, the remote display
will show ORDM functions. When MACHINE is selected, the
remote display shows NM4 data and alarms.
For the Printer Mode, when ORDM is selected, the machine’s
external printer port is connected to the ORDM.
7-26
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
7.6.9.11 Machine Status
The Machine Status screen shown in Figure 7-23 displays the current
status of those machine functions listed.
-- At the Service/Test Hardware screen (described earlier) move the cursor
to MACHINE STATUS and press ENTER.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
O2 SUPPLY STATUS:
VENTILATOR STATUS:
BATTERY LOW:
AC POWER FAIL:
NORMAL
OFF
NO
NO
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40119
Figure 7-23: MACHINE STATUS SCREEN
-- Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Service/Test Hardware screen. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to
return to the Primary Service Menu.
Rev. H
7-27
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
7.6.10 Save/Restore Calibration Constants
This screen allows all monitor calibration settings to be copied to the
ORDM disk drive, or to the external PC disk drive. These settings can
then be restored from the disk to the machine following any hardware
replacement.
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) move the cursor to
SAVE/RESTORE CONSTANTS and press ENTER.
--
Move the cursor with the up or down keys to the desired function, and
press ENTER.
Press arrow keys to change fields, return to perform action
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
Save
Restore
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Cal Constants
Cal Constants
F1 SAVE
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40120
Figure 7-24: SAVE/RESTORE CALIBRATION CONSTANTS SCREEN
--
Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Primary Service Menu. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to return to
the SST Main Menu.
7-28
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.11 Service Dump
This screen displays processor address and register debug information.
This screen should be checked whenever the machine is serviced, and
any non-zero codes that appear should be recorded and reported to the
NAD Engineering Department.
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) move the cursor to
SERVICE DUMP and press ENTER.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SERVICE DUMP
D0-D1: 0000000 0000000
D2-D3: 0000000 0000000
D4-D5: 0000000 0000000
D6-D7: 0000000 0000000
A0-A1: 0000000 0000000
A2-A3: 0000000 0000000
A4-A5: 0000000 0000000
A6-A7: 0000000 0000000
SR/F0: 0000000
P6: 0000000
USP: 0000000
MSP: 0000000
ISP: 0000000
ORVEC: 0000000
COUNT: 0000000
PSOS: 0000000 0000000
PSOS: 0000000 0000000
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
PSOS: 0000000
PSOS: 0000000
PSOS: 0000000
PSOS: 0000000
PSOS: 0000000
STACK: 0000000
STACK: 0000000
STACK: 0000000
STACK: 0000000
STACK: 0000000
COLIN: 1.00
SRCT: 1.00
C1100: 1.01
POET: 1.00
CARD: 1.00
0000000
0000000
0000000
0000000
0000000
0000000
0000000
0000000
0000000
0000000
0016FF00
00172200
00173700
00175B00
00177C00
F1 SAVE
SV40124
Figure 7-25: SERVICE DUMP SCREEN
--
Rev. H
Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Primary Service Menu. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to return to
the SST Main Menu.
7-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
NM4
7.6.12 Template Manager
This screen allows access to templates for viewing or deleting them
while in a service mode.
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) move the cursor to
TEMPLATE MANAGER and press ENTER.
--
Move the cursor with the up or down keys to the desired template and
press ENTER.
Press arrow up/down and Pg Up/Pg Dn keys to browse.
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Number of Templates present - 29
001 FACTORY DEFAULTS
002 SITE DEFAULTS
003 LAX LIN
004 MAX MIN
005 AAAAAA
006 BBBBBB
007 CCCCCC
008 DDDDDD
009 EEEEEE
010 FFFFFF
011 HHHHHH
012 JJJJJJ
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40122
Figure 7-26: TEMPLATE MANAGER SCREEN
--
Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Primary Service Menu. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to return to
the SST Main Menu.
7-30
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE (continued)
7.6.13 Secondary Service Screen
This screen allows access to the functions shown in Figure 7-27.
WARNING:
These functions should only be accessed by an
authorized Draeger Medical, Inc. Technical Service
Representative. Improper access to certain functions
may cause important service data to be lost.
--
At the Primary Service Menu (described earlier) select the SERV access
level and enter your ID.
--
Press ALT H on the ORDM keyboard, then type in 2 5 6, and press
ENTER to display the secondary service screen.
Press arrow keys to change fields, return to perform action
MACHINE ID: NM4
SERIAL NUMBER: 00011066
SOFTWARE VERSION: 1.40
SYSTEM FEATURES: 0003
Clear Service Hours and Reset Date
Display Product Features
Configure Vaporizers
Machine Options
Clear Service Log
F10 PREVIOUS MENU
SV40123
Figure 7-27: SECONDARY SERVICE SCREEN
--
Rev. H
Press ESC on the ORDM (F10 on the external PC) to return to the
Primary Service Menu. If desired, press ESC (or F10) again to return to
the SST Main Menu.
7-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS
8.0 Spare and Replacement Parts
Part numbers for field-replaceable items on the NARKOMED 4 anesthesia system are
listed on the following pages, along with part numbers for related hardware and cables.
The item numbers are keyed to the accompanying illustrations to aid in identifying the
item and its location.
ASSEMBLY/PART
PAGE
Monitor Chassis and related assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2, 8-3
Front Bezel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4, 8-5
Serial Interface Assembly, Pulse Oximeter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6, 8-7
Multispec Analyzer Assembly, Model 4600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9
Multispec Analyzer Assembly, Model 4610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11
AV-E Ventilator Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-13
AV-2 Ventilator Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14, 8-15
AV-E Ventilator Bellows, Valve Case Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16, 8-17
AV-2 Ventilator Bellows, Valve Case Assembly and Pressure Limit Control . . . 8-18, 8-19
Boom Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20, 8-21
Remote Display, Datagrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22, 8-23
Display Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24, 8-25
Pipeline Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26, 8-27
Failsafe Assemblies, Minimum O2 Flow Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28, 8-29
Exclusion System, 3-vapor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29A, 8-29B
Vapor Select Switches, Vapor Ind. Circuit Board, Gas Selector Switch Assembly 8-30, 8-31
ORMC (Earlier Config.) O2 Alarm Switch, Alarm Channel, Alarm Whistle . . . . 8-32, 8-33
ORC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34, 8-35
Alarm Channel Assembly with O2 Alarm Switch (Later Configurations) . . . . . . 8-36, 8-37
Flowmeter Shields, Knobs, Labels, Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 8-39
Flow Tubes, Flow Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40, 8-41
Cylinder Pressure Regulators, O2 Flush Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42, 8-43
Fresh Gas Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43A, 8-43B
Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44, 8-45
Canada Fresh Gas Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45A, 8-45B
Cylinder Yokes and Related Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46, 8-47
VPO, AC Power, Batteries, Power Supply, Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48, 8-49
O.R. Data Manager, 386 and earlier, Incl. Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50, 8-51
Absorber Assembly, Breathing Pressure Hoses, Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52, 8-53
Ultrasonic Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53A, 8-53B
Ultrasonic Flow Sensor Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53C, 8-53D
Man/Auto Selector Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54, 8-55
Man/Auto Selector Valve (Later Design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56, 8-57
Auxiliary O2 Flowmeter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58, 8-59
Open Reservoir Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60, 8-61
Open Reservoir Scavenger, old style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62, 8-63
A/C Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64, 8-65
Suction Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66, 8-67
Rev. AA
8-1
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
19
NM4
6
7
5
8
2
18
13
4
D. T
D. T
14
3
15
10
11
1
11
12
9
17
J6
E1
16
SV40029
8-2
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Monitor Chassis, Complete Assembly (supersedes 4111327) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112114
Screw, Monitor Chassis Cover (8x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09003
NIBP Assembly (Supersedes 4111101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112249
BP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109794
Cable, NIBP to Backplane (Supersedes 4111322) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112222
NIBP Upgrade Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S010160
Pulse Oximeter Asm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Related parts listed on a subsequent page)
Front Bezel Assembly (Compatible w/ all Processor Boards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111338
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4111338
Front Bezel Assembly (Compatible w/ Processor Boards Rev. M and later) . . . . . . 4111728
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4111728
(Field replaceable sub-assemblies are listed on a subsequent page.)
Panel Assembly, Remote Display Connector (Incl. Cable to Backplane) . . . . . . . . 4111319
Panel Assembly, Datagrip Connector (Incl. Cable to Backplane) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112171
Card Cage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111328
Later design including SpO2 speaker & amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4113100
Backplane Circuit Board Assembly (not interchangeable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110699
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4110699
Backplane Circuit Board Assembly (Later Models)(interchangeable w/4112303) . . . 4111881
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4111881
Superseded by (interchangeable w/4111881) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112303
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4112303
Processor Board (2x) old #: 4110331, new #: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4113552
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4110331
NOTE: Boards below Rev. M are compatible with Bezel Asm 4111338 only.
Boards Rev. M & later are compatible with Bezel Asms 4111338 & 4111728.
Datagrip PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112027
Datagrip PCB to Backplane Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112170
Fan Assembly (2x) (Compatible with Backplane Asm 4111881 & later) . . . . 4111732
Fan (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111105
Connector Shell, Fan (Compatible with Backplane Asm 4110699) . . . . . . . . 4108991
Terminal (4x), Fan Wire Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108819
Speaker (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106335
Wire Harness, Speaker to Backplane (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111094
Serial Interface Port Assembly (parts breakdown listed on a subsequent page) 4111317
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4111317
Cable, Serial Interface to Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111326
M’spec Analyzer Model 4600 (Upgrade to 4112181: use P/N S010217)
Model 4610 (Parts breakdown listed on a subsequent page) . . . . . . 4112181
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4112181
Printer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer (Early Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer (Later Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable, Printer to Backplane (Compatible with Backplane Asm 4110699)
Cable, Printer to Backplane (Compatible with Backplane Asm 4111881)
Roller for Model 4111129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roller for Model 4112048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chart Paper, Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . 4111422
. . . . . . . . . . 4111129
. . . . . . . . SE4111129
. . . . . . . . . . 4112048
. . . . . . . . SE4112048
. . . . . . . . . . 4111132
. . . . . . . . . . 4111418
. . . . . . . . . . 4111874
. . vendor # 620-21098
vendor # 600-06012-82
. . . . . . . . . . . 4110335
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
7
24
25
(REF)
23
SV00564
REAR VIEW OF BEZEL ASSEMBLY WITH COVER REMOVED
8-4
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
7 (Ref.) Front Bezel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later Replaced by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Deleted
21
Deleted
22
Deleted
23
Cable, Display Panel to Backplane (2x) . . .
24
Cable, 26 Cond., Touch Panel to Backplane
25
Cable, 10 Cond., Touch Panel to Backplane
26
Deleted
27
Deleted
28
Deleted
29
Deleted
30
Deleted
Rev. AA
8-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111338
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111728
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111323
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111347
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111348
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
41A
5A
xxxxx
40
39
41B
38A
36
5
38
41
SV00565
8-6
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
31
32
33
34
35
PART NUMBER
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
5(Ref.) Pulse Oximeter Assembly (early design) . . . .
(interim design) . . . . . . . . . .
5A
Pulse Oximeter Assembly (later design with
speaker & amp. as part of card cage asm)
36
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Deleted
38
38A
39
40
41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111098
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112240
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4113098
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106335
Power PCB Assembly (interim design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112156
Speaker Amp. (Later Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112475
Speaker Wire Harness (Early Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111094
(Later Models (incl. power cable)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112509
SpO2 Interface Panel and Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109118
Cable, Oximeter Module to Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111325
Cable for use with Item 5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109131
41A Cable, Oximeter Module to Backplane (Novametrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114885
41B Oximeter Module (Novametrix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114877
Rev. AA
8-7
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
18
(REF)
SV00566
8-8
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
18 (Ref.) Multispec Analyzer Assembly (Model 4600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111411
Upgrade Kit: Multispec Analyzer Assembly (Model 4610) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S010217
42
43
44
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
45
46
Deleted
Deleted
47
48
49
50
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
51
Deleted
Rev. AA
8-9
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
SV40027
OPTICAL HEAD
ASSEMBLY DETAILS
58
57
61
18
REF
J4
U4
56
55
54
53
52
8-10
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
18 (Ref.) Multispec Analyzer Assembly (Model 4610) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
Pump, Air, 12 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Pump Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer, Pump Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, Pump Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grommet, Pump Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Disposable Reservoir (Water Trap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
PVC Sample Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later design w/Luer fitting gender change to prevent connection
to water trap housing without air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
Restrictor, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Fan Mounting (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4112181
SE4112181
. . 4110895
. HW09027
. HW66006
. HW55003
. . 4110883
. . 4110616
. . 4111751
. . 4112264
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4113334
. 4107995
. 4111370
HW09000
58
Sample Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S010194
59
60
Deleted
Deleted
Input Restrictors
S18 (in line connected to top of water trap housing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111758-002
*S34 (in line connected to solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111758-004
61
Cable, Multispec HC11 J4 to Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111349
*Previously located in line connected to right top of water trap housing.
Rev. AA
8-11
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
MACHINES WITH AV-E VENTILATOR
66
67
66
65
64
63
62
76
75
XXX
XXX.
XXX
69
70
68
71
72
73
74
77
86
85
84
79
83
78
80
82
81
SV45002
8-12
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Machines with AV-E Ventilator:
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
Ventilator Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Ventilator Solenoid Mounting (2x) . . . . . . .
AC Power Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer, AC Power Filter Mounting (2x) . . . . . . . .
AC Receptacle (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Receptacle, later design (not interchangeable)
Cover, AC Power Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later replaced by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, AC Power Filter Cover (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Harness, AVE Switch and Solenoid . . . . . . .
Wire Harness, Alarm Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspiratory Flow Gauge Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Part Number (Gauge Only) . . . . . .
Inspiratory Flow Regulator Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Norgren Repair Kit (square body) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulator Repair Kit (round body) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Assembly, Vapor Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Assembly, Ventilator Box to Monitor Box . .
Cable Assembly, Ventilator Box to Alarm Channel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4108918
. . HW02011
. . . 4107759
4110589-007
. . . 4106086
4112574-001
. . . 4109622
. . . 4112822
. . HW09016
. . . 4110906
. . . 4109771
. . . 4109236
. . . 4108948
. SE4108948
. . . 4108856
. . . 4111989
. . . 4108846
. SE4108846
. . . S010060
. . . 4105893
. . . 4111553
. . . 4109267
. . . 4109072
77
78
79
80
Nut, Knob Assembly Mounting . .
Knob Assembly, Incl. Knob, Bezel
Setscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........
and Shaft
........
........
........
Coupling
........
........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4107460
. 4107556
HW04007
. 4103396
81
82
83
84
85
86
Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setscrew . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Bezel Retainer
Switch Assembly . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109767
. 4107453
HW04007
. 4103394
HW03038
. 4109768
Rev. AA
....
....
....
....
(2x)
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
MACHINES WITH AV-2 VENTILATOR
88
90
92
87
94
91
SV00568
8-14
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Machines with AV-2 Ventilator:
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
AV-2 Ventilator Controller Assembly (Bezel Assembly) . . . . . .
Service Exchange part number is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspiratory Flow Regulator (no SE available) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Off Switch & Wire Harness (Incl. Solenoid Wire Harness)
Deleted
Knob (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new part number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob Cover (3x) (all except ON-OFF switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new part number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob Cover (ON-OFF switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new part number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 4112273
. . . . SE4112273-S01
. . . . . . . . . . 4102045
. . . . . . . . . . 4110906
. . . . . . . 4112251-001
. . . . . . . . . 4112253
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4112157
. . . 4113281
4112245-003
4113278-002
4112245-002
4113278-001
Regulator Repair Kits:
AV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4115151
AV2+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114252
Machines with AV-2+ Ventilator:
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
AV-2+ Ventilator Controller Assembly (Bezel Assembly)
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspiratory Flow Regulator (no SE available) . . . . . . .
Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-off switch & wire harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
Knob (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob Cover (3x) (all except ON-OFF switch) . . . . . . . .
Knob Cover (ON-OFF switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4113132-001
SE4113132-001
. . . . . . 4102045
. . . . . . 4111649
. . . . . . 4110906
. . . 4112251-001
. . . . . . 4113137
. . . . . . 4113136
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4113281
. . . . . . . . . . . . 4113278-002
. . . . . . . . . . . . 4113278-001
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
MACHINES WITH AV-E VENTILATOR
95
101
102
102
A
96
97
100
99
102
B
LATER ASSEMBLY
WITH
HUMPHREY VALVE
98
SV00569
8-16
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Machines with AV-E Ventilator:
95
96
Ventilator Bellows Valve & Guide Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110775
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4110775
Screw, Valve & Guide Assembly Mounting (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09013
97
Bellows Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106948
98
Bellows Assembly, Adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106935
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4106935
Deleted
99
Kit, Bellows, adult w/pressure limit control . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange, Bellows, adult w/pressure limit control
Urethane (non-latex) Bellows Sub-asm, Adult . . . . . . . . .
O-ring #217 (neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bellows asm, pediatric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . S4109664
. SE4109664
4106930-001
. . . 4101817
. . . 4109700
Relief Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108050
Diaphragm assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110960
101
102
Ventilator Box Front Panel, Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Box Front Panel, Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilator Box Front Panel, Right (with O.R. Data Manager Option)
102A
O-ring, #256, canister gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102B
Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
.
.
.
.
.
8-17
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4111420
4111421
4111475
4107018
4105849
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
MACHINES WITH AV-2 VENTILATOR
115
117
113
114
118
116
119
104
111
110
112
106
107
123
109
103
104
108
105
106
121
107
120
122
125
126
124
SV00570
126
A
8-18
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Machines with AV-2 Ventilator:
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
Screw, 6-32 x
in. Btn Hd Skt (4x) . . .
Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob, PLC Adj. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new part number) . . .
Flat Washer, #10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hex Nut, M5 x 0.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new part number)(+/-)
Knob Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new part number) . . .
Front Plate, Bellows Box . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spring Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Screw, 6-32 x 3/16 in. . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Screw, 6-32 x ¼ in. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, ¼-20 x 1 in. Btn Hd Skt (3x) . . .
Lock Washer, ¼ int-t (3x) . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . HW09000
. . . 4112167
. . . 4112502
. . . 4113279
. . HW66003
. . . 4112066
4112245-002
4113278-001
4113278-002
. . . 4112152
. . . 4113280
. . . 4112230
. . . 4107460
. . . 4107546
. . . 4110975
. . . 4112175
. . HW07002
. . . 4107544
. . . 4112467
. . HW04003
. . HW09057
. . HW67017
122
Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106948
Tidal Volume Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108276
Bellows Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110735
123
Bellows Valve Assembly (parts breakdown listed on a subsequent page) . . . 4112272
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4112272-S01
124
Bellows Assembly, Adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106935
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4106935
125
Urethane (non-latex) Bellows Sub-asm, Adult
O-ring #217 (neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
Relief Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diaphragm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126A
Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4106930-001
. . . 4101817
. . . 4108050
. . . 4110960
. . . 4105849
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
123
D
123
C
123
F
123
T
123
E
123
D
123
G
123
C
123
U
123
H
123
B
123
J
123
A
123
S
123
R
123
P
123
N
123
K
123
M
123
L
SV50542
8-19A
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
123(Ref) Bellows Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123A
Bellows Top Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123B
Adapter Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123C
Press-on Hose Clamp (2x) . . . . . . . . .
123D
Label, O2 Tubing (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123E
Hose, 0.075 I.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123F Restrictor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123G
Guide Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123H
O-ring #019 (Silicone) . . . . . . . . . . . .
123J O-ring #022 (Neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123K
Lockwasher, #8 Split (2x) . . . . . . . . .
123L Bellows Top Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123M
Volume Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123N
Set Screw, 6-32 x ¼ in. cup point (2x)
123P Screw, 8-32 x
in. btn hd skt (4x) . . . . . .
123R
Lock Washer, #8 int-t (2x) . . . . . . . . .
123S O-ring #256 (Neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123T Rod, Bellows Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123U
Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-19B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . 4112272
SE4112272-S01
. . . . . . 4111872
. . . . . . 4111979
. . . . . . 4104161
. . . . . . 4109871
. . . . . ML08003
. . . . . . 4107639
. . . . . . 1101294
. . . . . . 4107096
. . . . . . 4104595
. . . . . HW65011
. . . . . . 4110735
. . . . . . 4108276
. . . . . HW04003
. . . . . HW09008
. . . . . HW67000
. . . . . . 4107018
. . . . . . 4110727
. . . . . . 4106918
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
133
132
NM4
134
135
131
136
130
137
129
138
128
139
138
127
140
141
142
143
145
144
146
147
151
148
150
149
REMOTE DISPLAY
OR
DATA GRIP ASSEMBLY
SV45004
8-20
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Boom Arm (Complete Assembly) . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut with Captive Lockwasher (2x) . . . . . . . .
Spacer (Bushing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer (Washer) (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lockwasher (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Center Hinge (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cap, Center Hinge, Upper & Lower (4x) . . . .
Screw, Boom Arm Mounting (3x) . . . . . . . . .
Boom Arm Mounting Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Upper Boom Arm Clamp . . . . . . . . . .
Setscrew, Boom Arm Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer, Delrin (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer, Thrust (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing, Boom Arm Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer, Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Boom Arm Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cap, Gauge Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, Remote Display or Datagrip Mounting
Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lockwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer, Thrust (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer, Delrin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4111212
. . HW55004
4110792-053
4110792-052
. . HW68004
. . HW01040
. . . 4111183
. . HW01082
. . . 4111198
. . HW01041
. . HW15002
4110792-043
4110792-040
. . . 4111182
. . . 4111180
. . . 4111190
4111199-002
. . . 4111252
. . . 4111181
4111199-001
. . . 4111184
. . HW68004
4110792-045
4110792-044
Screw, Cable Clamp Retaining (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09000
Cable Clamp (with Remote Display only) (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111217
Cable Clamp (with Datagrip and Remote Display) (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112300
Rev. A
8-21
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
BOOM
ARM
152
BOOM
ARM
153
154
SV45023
8-22
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
152
Remote Display (W/O Datagrip) Assembly (Incl. Cable) . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable assembly, data/power (used on 4111210 and 4112314)
Strain relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
153
Datagrip Assembly (Incl. Cable)
Service Exchange . . . . . . . .
Knob, Datagrip . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Dot, Datagrip . . . . . . . .
O-ring #021 (Neoprene) . . . . .
Set screw, 6-32 x 1/2 in. cup pt
Spring, CPRSN . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger, Datagrip . . . . . . . . . .
Strain relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4111907
. SE4111907
. . . 4111782
. . . 4111882
. . . 4104576
. . HW04032
4110975-020
. . . 4111780
4113088-001
4112779-001
154
Remote Display Assembly (Incl. Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112314
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4112314
Rev. AA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4111210
SE4111210
. . 4111207
. . 4111187
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
155
163
162
156
157
158
159
160
159
165
161
SV49029
164
8-24
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
Display Arm Assembly . . . . .
Later Replaced by . . . . . . . .
Cap, Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Screw . . . . . . . . .
Lockwasher . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer, Delrin . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Clamp,
in. (3x) . . .
Screw, Cable Clamp, 6-32 x
PART NUMBER
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
(3x)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4112524
4112591-001
. . . 4111184
4111199-004
. . HW65010
4110792-045
. . . 4111181
4110792-044
. . . 4112300
. . HW09000
Screw, ¼-20 x
in. Btn Hd Skt (6x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09063
[If the machine is equipped with an optional manual sphygmomanometer,
the lower front corner mounting screw is a ¼-20 x 2 in. P/N HW09064]
Lock Washer, ¼ split (6x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW65010
164
Datagrip Assembly (Incl. Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111907
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4111907
165
Display Assembly (Incl. Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112314
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4112314
Rev. AA
8-25
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
MACHINES CONFIGURED WITH AN ORC
166
178
A
178
167
168
DISS BODY
PIPELINE
FITTINGS
169
173
170
172
171
NIST BODY
PIPELINE
FITTINGS
175
174
DISS NUT
PIPELINE
FITTINGS
177
176
8-26
SV49030
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
166
167
168
DISS Body Pipeline Fittings:
O2 DISS Fitting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102563
Air DISS Fitting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102886
N2O DISS Fitting* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111384
169
170
171
NIST Body Pipeline Fittings:
O2 Male NIST Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110388
Air Male NIST Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110386
N2O Male NIST Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111382
172
173
174
175
176
177
DISS Nut Pipeline Fittings:
O2 DISS Nipple* . . . . . . . . .
O2 DISS Nut* . . . . . . . . . . .
Air DISS Nipple* . . . . . . . .
Air DISS Nut* . . . . . . . . . .
N2O DISS Nipple* . . . . . . .
N2O DISS Nut* . . . . . . . . . .
178
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4103877
4102848
4111385
4103120
4111383
4102850
Pipeline Inlet Filter Asm (Typ., All Inlets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106198
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102532
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106897
O-ring for N2O DISS Nipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4113494
* These items were included as part of pipeline inlet assemblies on earlier machine
configurations with an ORMC. Assembly numbers are listed below for reference:
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109345
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, O2 (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109297
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, N2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109344
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, N2O (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109298
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109412
Pipeline Inlet Assembly, Air (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109861
NOTE: Positions of O2 and Air pipeline inlets are reversed on earlier machines.
178A
Rev. AA
Common Parts:
Pipeline Inlet Housing
(old No.)
(replaced by) . . . . . . .
(new no.) . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, -18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Washer,
int-t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4102559
. 4113363
. 4113974
HW52002
HW67001
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
MACHINES CONFIGURED WITH AN ORC
N2O FAILSAFE
ASSEMBLY
AIR OR THIRD GAS
FAILSAFE ASSEMBLY
179
183
182
182
186
186
180
184
181
185
182
187
MINIMUM FLOW O2
VALVE ASSEMBLY
192
188
190
189
191
193
194
SV49031
8-28
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
179
180
181
182
*N2O Failsafe Assembly:
Failsafe Block Asembly . . . . . . . .
Nipple,
NPT x ¾ in. . . . . . . . .
Check Valve, MJCV-1 . . . . . . . . .
Straight Fitting, ¼Tube x
MPT
....
....
....
(3x)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4112043
4102784
4105815
4109408
183
184
185
186
187
*Air or 3rd Gas Failsafe Assembly:
Failsafe Block Asembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nipple,
NPT x ¾ in. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Valve, MJCV-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Straight Fitting, ¼Tube x
MPT (2x)
Elbow Fitting, ¼Tube x
MPT . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4112043
4102784
4105815
4109408
4109410
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
*
Minimum O2 Flow Valve Assembly:
Pilot Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102055
Valve, 2-Way Poppet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103549
Lock Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Supplied with Valve)
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110792-013
Fitting, nylon 1/16 I.D. Hose x
MPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106366
Replaced by brass fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111771
(requires press-on hose clamp 4104161 instead of tie strap)
Washer (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102165
Fitting, 1/16 I.D. Hose x 10-32 (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103445
Later design fitting has integral seal (replaces previous two items) . . . . . 4112707
Tie Strap, 0.131W x 8.04L (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101732
On earlier machine configurations with an ORMC, the failsafe assemblies are threeport devices and were listed as complete assemblies with fittings installed. Assembly
numbers are listed below for reference:
N2O Failsafe Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108686
Air or 3rd gas Failsafe Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108687
Rev. C
8-29
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
10
7
8
6
NM4
11
9
5
4
3
2
8-29A
1
SV00581
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Pin assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-rings (2x per vaporizer) . . . . . . . . .
Cover assembly, vapor block (plastic)
Straight fitting, 1/4 tube . . . . . . . . . .
Set screw, 10-32 (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kep nut, 10-32 (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pivot arm, short (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pivot arm, long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set screw, 8-32 (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4110187
. . . 2121929
. . . 4112699
. . . 4109408
. . HW04012
. . HW55002
. . . 4104975
. . . 4108043
. . . 4111693
. . . 4104343
4110792-014
Not shown:
Support bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104976
Rev. AA
8-29B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
MACHINES CONFIGURED WITH AN ORC
207
208
206
197
196
209
210
J2
J3
J4
J1
211
195
202
204
198
200
199
203
205
211
A
SV00573
201
8-30
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
195
196
197
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Vapor Indicator PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Harness, Vapor Select Switch (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch, Vapor Select (Early Models) (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Later Models with longer actuator (used with shorter actuator rods))
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
202
203
Gas Selector Switch Assembly:
Label, O2 + N2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, ALL GASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set screw, locking, 8-32 x
in. cup pt. . . . . . . . .
(Later style knobs use non-locking set screw)
Camshaft, Gas Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block, Gas Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4108461
. 4108462
. 4103423
. 4103169
HW10004
HW04025
. 4109867
. 4109866
204
205
Switch Asm Mounting Screws, 8-32 x
in. skt hd (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01012
Lock Washer, #8 int-t (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW67000
206
207
208
Valve Assembly, Gas Selector:
Valve, Gas Selector (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting, 1/16 I.D. Hose x 10-32 (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later design fitting has integral seal (replaces previous two items)
209
210
211
Valve Asm Mounting Screws, 10-32 x 5/16 in. skt hd (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01022
Lock Washer, #10 int-t (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW67006
Flat Washer, #10 (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW66003
198
199
200
201
211A
Rev. AA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4110219
4110233
4103341
4111718
4103621
4103445
4102165
4112707
Label, arrow, vaporizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112055
8-31
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
EARLIER MACHINE CONFIGURATION (TYPICAL)
212
213
214
215
216
218
B
218
A
CSA
212
213
218
215
214
216
218
B
SV00574
218
A
8-32
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
212
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Vaporizer Mounting Screw, 4 x 30 Metric (2x Per Vaporizer) . . . . . . . . . . HW01072
Vaporizer Gasket, O-Ring (2x Per Vaporizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2121929
The following items apply to earlier machine configurations and are listed here for
reference:
213
Oxygen Ratio Monitor/Controller (ORMC) (Early models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109271
(Later models without electrical connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111765
214
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106037
215
Alarm Channel Assembly (Early models) . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later models without O2/N2O ratio lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Switch Valve & Fitting Assembly (Early models)
Deleted
216
217
218
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Oxygen Supply Low Pressure Alarm Whistle (Canada) . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Assembly, Alarm Whistle (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218A
Check valve (pipeline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218B
Restrictor, minimum flow:
(wht) 150 mL/min. (used on units with ORMC/ORC with 25% ratio
(brn) 175 mL/min. (used on units with ORC with bypass) . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-33
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4108592
SE4108592
. . 4111522
. SE10029
. . 4109285
. . . . . . 4109946
. . . . . . 4109947
. . . . . . 4105815
. . . 4110738-004
. . . 4110738-007
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
LATER MACHINES WITH ORC AS PART OF FLOWMETER SUB-ASSEMBLY
REAR VIEW OF FLOWMETER HOUSING
WITH REAR COVER REMOVED
219A
225
219
220
221
223
222
224
SV49033
8-34
Rev. F
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
219
ORC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219A
ORC Assembly, low flow design for later machines
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
O-ring, #105 (Neoprene) (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
222
O-ring, 0.066 x 0.042 (Buna-n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . 4111800
. . . . SE4111800
. . . 4113329-001
SE4113329-001
. . . . . . 4111893
. . . . . . 4111805
. . . . . . 4111894
223
224
Screw, 8-32 x 1½ in. skt hd (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01020
Lock Washer, #8 split (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW65001
225
Hose Clamp, Press-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104161
Rev. AA
8-35
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
LATER MODELS WITH OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH
REAR VIEW
SIDE VIEW
234
J2
J1
228
J3
229
J4
233
A
230
226
232
231
233
227
SV00575
8-36
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
226 Alarm Channel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
Oxygen Supply Pressure Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
Wire Harness, Alarm Switch & J3 to Ventilator Controller
229
Housing, Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
Cap, Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
231
Label, Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
Knob, Main Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
Housing, Main Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233A
Clippard valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4112125
4106037
4112146
4106046
4106047
4103423
4106044
4106045
4103588
Alarm Channel Service Replacement No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE10029
Alarm channel Service Exchange (old style w/O2/N2O ratio lamp) . . . . . SE4108592
234
Wire Harness, Flowmeter Lights to Alarm Channel J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108594
For earlier machine configurations, see Alarm Channel listing on a previous page.
Rev. AA
8-37
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
System Power
244
244
241
239
240
238
N2O
O2
PIPELINE
PIPELINE
242
During Operation
242
CYLINDER
N 2O
CYLINDER
O2
243
243
235
236
8-38
237
SV49035
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
The following Flowmeter Shield part numbers apply to later madel machines with flowmeter subassemblies having an ORC:
235
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
Gas N2O/O2, Domestic . .
Gas N2O/O2, Canada . . .
Gas, Export . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Air, Domestic . . . . .
Gas O2-He, Domestic . . .
Gas Air, Canada . . . . . .
Gas, Export, 6 Gauge . .
Gas, Export, 5 Gauge . .
Gas, Air/CO2, Domestic .
Gas, Air/O2-He, Domestic
Gas, Air/O2-He, Canada .
Gas, Export . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4111824-001
4111824-002
. . . 4111825
4111830-001
. . . 4111831
4111830-002
. . . 4111826
. . . 4111827
4111829-003
4111829-001
4111829-002
. . . 4111828
The following Flowmeter Shield part numbers apply to earlier machine configurations:
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
Shield,
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
The
244
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
Flowmeter,
2
3
2
3
4
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
............
(Air) . . . . . . . .
(Canada) . . . .
(Air) (Canada)
(Export) . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4110584-001
4110585-001
4110584-002
4110585-002
. . . 4111226
Knob Guard, 2 Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110621
Knob Guard, 3 Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110574
Screw, 6-32 x 7/16 btn hd (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09017
Knob, O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, O2 Flow Control Knob, Green (USA)
White (UK, Canada)
Blue (Germany) . . .
Knob, Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4103156
. . . 4103178
. . . 4105981
4111266-002
. . . 4103736
Label, N2O Flow Control Knob,
Blue (USA, UK, Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103904
Gray (Germany) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111266-004
Label, Air Flow Control Knob,
Yellow (USA, Germany) . . . . . .
Black/White (UK, Canada) . . . . . . . . . .
Label, CO2 Flow Control Knob,
Gray (USA,UK, Canada) . . . . .
Black (Germany) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, O2-He Flow Control Knob, Green/Brown (USA) . . . . . . . . .
White/Brown (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 100 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 7.0 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 3000 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 200 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
following gauge part numbers apply to earlier machine configurations:
Gauge, 100 psi O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 4000 psi O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 100 psi N2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge, 2000 psi N2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge Cover (old style screw-on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowmeter Light Circuit Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-39
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4103905
. . . 4105982
. . . 4103908
4111266-006
. . . 4110951
. . . 4110952
4110575-001
4110575-003
4110575-002
4110575-004
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4103076
4103074
4103100
4103075
4103624
4107370
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DETAIL OF FLOW
CONTROL VALVE
251
261
260
262
NM4
263
259
252
258
253
250
256A
249
247
248
4 GAS MACHINE
(CENTER CHANNEL)
246
245
258
255
254
256
253
257
SV49036
3 GAS MACHINE
8-40
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
245
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Flow Tube, O2, 1-10 l/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, O2, 0.6-10 l/min (Low Flow) . . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, O2, 100-1000 ml/min . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, O2, 20-500 ml/min (Low Flow) . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, N2O, 1-10 l/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, N2O, 0.6-10 l/min (Low Flow) . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, N2O, 100-1000 ml/min . . . . . . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, N2O, 20-500 ml/min (Low Flow) . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, Air, 1-10 l/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, Air, 100-1000 ml/min . . . . . . . . . . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, Air, 0.2-10 l/min (4-gas machines) . .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, CO2, 0.05-1.0 l/min (4-gas machines)
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Tube, O2-He, 2-10 l/min (4-gas machines) .
Later style w/o color band . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4103418
4112560-001
. . . 4107699
4112568-001
. . . 4103417
4112559-001
. . . 4107698
4112567-001
. . . 4103420
4112562-001
. . . 4105758
4112564-001
. . . 4103419
4112561-001
. . . 4105757
4112563-001
. . . 4106693
4112566-001
. . . 4106692
4112565-001
. . . 1101084
4112558-001
. . . 1101081
4112557-001
. . . 4110956
4112569-001
O2 Restrictor Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O2 Restrictor, Red (with ORMC or ORC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N2O Restrictor Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N2O Restrictor, Blue (ORMC with & without wire harness) . . . . . . . .
Black (machines w/ORC: E-Z Plumb) (with & without bypass)
256A
Restrictor, Yellow (CO2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
257 O-ring, #010, Neoprene (one per each restrictor housing) . . . . . . . . . .
258 Gasket, Large, 2x per Flow Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4103440
4110738-003
. . . 4111716
4110738-002
4110738-005
4110738-006
. . . 4101872
. . . 4102724
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4103382
. . . 4102336
. . . 4102141
. . . 4102792
4111819-001
4111819-002
. . . 4110573
. . . 4103352
. . . 4115871
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
253
254
255
256
259
260
261
262
263
Parts common to all flow control valves:
Stop Pin Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #018, Neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #112, Neoprene (machines w/ORC: E-Z Plumb) . . . .
O-ring, #113, Neoprene (earlier machines) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert, Flow Control Valve, unplated (machines w/ORC: E-Z
plated, (4th gas only)(machines w/ORC: E-Z Plumb) . .
Insert, Flow Control Valve (earlier machines) . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve, Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New part number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-41
.......
.......
.......
.......
Plumb)
.......
.......
.......
.......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
LATER MACHINE CONFIGURATIONS
275
274
SV49037
273
272
273
271
N2O
REGULATOR
ASSEMBLY
270
269
268
265
281
267
266
282
267
283
264
284
O2 REGULATOR
ASSEMBLY
276
280
277
285
289
O2 FLUSH VALVE
ASSEMBLY
278
288
287
286
8-42
279
AIR OR 3RD GAS
REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Rev. A
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
*O2 Regulator Assembly:
Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting, ¼ Tube x ¼ MPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Straight Fitting, ¼ MPT x
FPT (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting, 3/16 Tube x
MPT (2x) . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting,
MPT x
FPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tee Fitting, 3/16 Tube x 3/16 Tube x
MPT [Replaces
if machine has an additional O2 yoke] . . . . . . . . .
.......
.......
.......
.......
.......
previous
.......
........
........
........
........
........
two items
........
.
.
.
.
.
*N2O Regulator Assembly:
Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting, ¼ Tube x ¼ MPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Straight Fitting, ¼ MPT x
FPT (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting, 3/16 Tube x
MPT (2x) . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting,
MPT x
FPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tee Fitting, 3/16 Tube x 3/16 Tube x
MPT [Replaces
if machine has an additional N2O yoke] . . . . . . . .
.......
.......
.......
.......
.......
previous
.......
........
........
........
........
........
two items
........
.
.
.
.
.
*Air or 3rd Gas Regulator Assembly:
Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting, ¼ Tube x ¼ MPT . . . . .
Straight Fitting, ¼ MPT x
FPT (2x)
Elbow Fitting, 3/16 Tube x
MPT . . .
Straight Fitting, 3/16 Tube x
MPT .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
O2 Flush Valve and Related Parts:
Valve, Clippard, 2 way . . . . . . . . .
Straight Fitting, ¼ Tube x
MPT
Elbow Fitting, ¼ Tube x
MPT . .
Restrictor, flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button, O2 FLUSH . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label,
Dot, O2,
Green (USA)
White (UK, Canada) .
Blue (Germany) . . . . .
Set Screw, 3-48 x 3/16 (2x) . . . . . .
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4103340
. . . 4109408
. . . 4109410
. . . 4101867
4110792-006
. . . 4103249
. . . 4103178
. . . 4105981
4111266-002
. . HW04020
4110792-021
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4103590
4109401
4102906
4109409
4103513
. 4109404
4103591
4109401
4102906
4109409
4103513
. 4109404
4103590
4109401
4102906
4109409
4109415
* On earlier machine configurations the regulators were listed as complete assemblies
with fittings installed. Assembly numbers are listed below for reference:
Regulator Assembly, O2 Cylinder Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103797
Regulator Assembly, N2O Cylinder Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103798
Regulator Assembly, Air Cylinder Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104603
Rev. AA
8-43
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
7
SV00542
4
8
5
3
2
6
1
8-43A
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Fresh Gas outlet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108673
Bushing, common outlet (2x) . . .
Label, "Freshgas" . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shaft, 1/4 x 10-32 (M) x 2.88 (2x)
Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plate, locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer-R, unthreaded x 0.042 . . .
Rev. AA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-43B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4108658
. . . 4108666
. . . 4108657
4110975-002
4108660-001
. . . 4103512
4110792-036
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
LATER MACHINE CONFIGURATIONS
SV00576
CSA
290
290
290
290
290
299
305
A
296
305
303
300
297
291
292
302
295
294
301
304
298
305
A
293
O2 CYLINDER
CUTOFF VALVE
ASSEMBLY
AIR OR 3RD GAS
CYLINDER
CUTOFF VALVE
ASSEMBLY
8-44
305
A
N2O CYLINDER
CUTOFF VALVE
ASSEMBLY
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
CSA Items:
290
Relief Valve, 70 psi (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110364
291
292
293
294
*O2 Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly (Canada)
Pilot Actuator, Modified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clippard Valve, MJVO-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tee Fitting, ¼ Tube x ¼ Tube x
MPT . . . . .
Elbow Fitting, ¼ Tube x
MPT . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4106498
4106218
4109406
4109410
295
296
297
298
299
300
*N2O Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly (Canada)
Pilot Actuator, Modified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clippard Valve, MJVO-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tee Fitting, ¼ Tube x
MPT x ¼ Tube . . . . . .
Plug, ¼ Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting,
MPT x
FPT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow Fitting, ¼ Tube x
MPT . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4106498
4106218
4109407
4103072
4103513
4109410
301
302
303
304
305
*Air or 3rd Gas Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly (Canada)
Pilot Actuator, Modified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clippard Valve, MJVO-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tee Fitting, ¼ Tube x
MPT x ¼ Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug, ¼ Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Straight Fitting, ¼ Tube x
MPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4106498
4106218
4109407
4103072
4109408
305A
Hose barb fitting, brass, 1/16 ID hose x 1/8 MPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111771
* On earlier machine configurations the cutoff valves and regulators were listed as
complete assemblies with fittings installed. Assembly numbers are listed below for
reference:
Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly, O2 (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110163
Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly, N2O (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110161
Cylinder Cutoff Valve Assembly, 3rd Gas (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110162
Regulator
Regulator
Regulator
Regulator
Rev. AA
Assembly,
Assembly,
Assembly,
Assembly,
O2 Cylinder Pressure (Canada) . . . . . .
N2O Cylinder Pressure (Canada) . . . .
He/Air/N2 Cylinder Pressure (Canada)
CO2 Cylinder Pressure (Canada) . . . .
8-45
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4110656
4110655
4110568
4110657
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
SV00538
9
2
10
8
1
4
6
5
4
8-45A
3
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Fresh Gas outlet assembly (Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109015
Block, guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plate, locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common outlet, 15mm x 22mm . .
Block, solder asm . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, "Freshgas Outlet" . . . . . . . .
Screw, 1/4 OD x 1/4-28 x 4.6 L sltd
Spring, CPRSN, 0.36 OD x 1 3/8 L
Screw, 1/4-20 x 1 1/4 L, cap skt hd
Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-45B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4110707
4110708-001
. . . 4109013
4108662-001
4108666-001
. . . 4109011
4110975-002
. . HW01039
. . . 4108658
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
311
CUT-AWAY OF YOKES SHOWING
INDEX PIN POSITION FOR EACH GAS
306
NM4
O2
312
313
INDEX PINS
307
320
314
N2O
321
315
308
AIR
316
317
309
O2-He
319
318
310
CO2
318
A
SV49039
8-46
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
306
307
308
309
310
DESCRIPTION
Yoke,
Yoke,
Yoke,
Yoke,
Yoke,
O2* . . .
N2O* . .
Air* . . .
O2-He*
CO2* . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PART NUMBER
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1101620
1101621
1101625
4110957
1101624
Parts Common to All Yokes:
311 Nut, 3/16 Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104716
312 Check Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111792
313 Screw, 10-32 x
in. rd hd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW06006
314 Chain Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4101868
315 Chain, #10 Bead (5.75 in.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103940
Items 314 and 315 superseded by Chain Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112495-003
316 Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101655
Plug assembly includes items 314, 315, 316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112755-001
317 Bolt, Toggle Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101556
318 Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101595
318A
Plastic T-handle & bolt (replaces Items 317, 318, 319 on later models) 4113536
319 Roll Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW75003
320 Screw (Index Pin) (2x per yoke) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105929
321
Yoke Labels:
Label, O2, Green (USA) . . . . . . . . .
White (UK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blue (Germany) . . . . . . . . . .
Label, N2O, Blue (USA, UK, Canada)
Gray (Germany) . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Air, Yellow (USA, Germany) .
Black/White (UK) . . . . . . . . .
Label, O2-He, Green/Brown (USA) . .
White/Brown (Canada) . . . . .
Label, CO2, Gray (USA, UK) . . . . . .
Black (Germany) . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 1101768
. . . 4103890
4111266-001
. . . 1101619
4111266-003
. . . 4102742
. . . 4103826
. . . 4110950
. . . 4110942
. . . 1101639
4111266-005
* On earlier machine configurations the yokes were listed as complete assemblies with
check valves, labels and all hardware. Assembly numbers are listed below for
reference:
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Rev. J
Yoke
Yoke
Yoke
Yoke
Yoke
Yoke
Assembly,
Assembly,
Assembly,
Assembly,
Assembly,
Assembly,
O2 . . . . . . . .
O2 (Canada) .
N2O . . . . . . .
Air . . . . . . .
Air (Canada)
CO2 . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-47
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1101640
4109943
1101641
1101645
4109944
1101644
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
J21
J22
REMOTE
DISPLAY
OXIMETER
SENSOR
BP CUFF
332
B
332
C
332
D
323
J3
J3
J1
322
J2
J5
J4
324
325
332
F
J6
J8
332
A
326
332
E
327
328
330
329
331
332
SV00577
8-48
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
322
323
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Sensor Interface Panel (VPO) Asm (old style - not to be used w/AV2 vent) . . . . 4111339-001
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4111339-001
Sensor Interface Panel (VPO) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111339
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4111339
Exhaust interface panel asm. (machines w/o AV2+ ventilator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108147
Man/Auto sensor and exhaust interface panel asm (machines w/AV2+ ventilator)
(incl. cable to AV2+ vent. controller;
does not incl fitting & tubing to gas analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4113090-002
Panel Assembly Mounting Screws (8x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09000
324
Filter, AC Power Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112003
(Old Part Number: 4109578)
Filter Mounting Screws (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW09018
325
AC Power Cord Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109600
AC Power Cord Assembly (Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110625
326
Power Supply Circuit Assembly . . . . . . .
Later replaced by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Circuit Assembly (Tested)
Fuse, 250V, 5A clip type . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse, 250V, 5A wire type . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . 4110505
. . . . . 4112323
. . . SE4112323
SE4111557-001
. . EC00365-002
. . EC00366-001
327
Power Supply Assembly, Primary . . . . . . . .
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker, 2P 5.0A (2x) . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker, 1P w/switch 15A . . . . . .
Power Supply Assembly, Primary, 220/240V
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker, 2P 5.0A . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Breaker, 1P w/switch 15A . . . . . .
Battery (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
328
329
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4111301
. SE4111301
4110537-002
4111379-001
. . . 4111627
. SE4111627
4110537-002
4111379-001
. . . 4106093
331
332
Caster W/Brake (caster has base washer) (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Old Part Number: 4109382)
Caster W/O Brake (caster has base washer) (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Old Part Number: 4109383) (use S010135: EZ Roll, set of 4)
Caster, 6 inch EZ Roll w/o brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caster, 6 inch EZ Roll w/brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setscrew, Caster (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hole Plug, Setscrew (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4113006-001
4113006-002
. . HW04017
. . . 4102729
332A
332B
332C
332D
332E
332F
Absorber Pole . . . . . . . . . . .
Wing Screw -16 x 1 in. . .
Set screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll pin, 0.250 dia x 1 in. . .
Roll pin, 0.125 dia x 3/8 in.
Cylinder wrench . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
330
Rev. AA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-49
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111849
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111850
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1101724
. 1100078
. 1101684
HW75005
HW75004
. 4103737
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
Deleted
8-50
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
333
Deleted
334
Deleted
335
336
Deleted
Deleted
337
Deleted
338
339
340
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Rev. AA
PART NUMBER
8-51
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
343
A
343
NM4
SV45018
342
342
A
344
345
346
341
342
B
342
C
345
A
365
A
362
B
347
364
346
365 365
B
C
362
A
CAUTION:
365
348
366 OR 394
349
REF
347
A
350
REF
365
351
363
352
362
353
361
354
355
360
356
359
357
358
8-52
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
341
342
342A
342B
342C
343
343A
344
345
345A
346
347
374A
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
362A
362B
363
364
365
365A
365B
365C
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Absorber Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Absorber Assembly with PEEP and bypass valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspiratory Valve Assembly (incl. O2 sensor mount) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ref: Valve w/o O2 Sensor Mount (old no.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new no.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug Assembly, Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome & Label, Insp. Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Asm . . . . . . . . . .4112151 Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Inspiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expiratory Valve Assembly (old no.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(new no.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasket, Valve Dome (Both Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk (Both Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasket, Valve Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spiromed Sensor . . . . . . . . . .4106362 Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . .
Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasket, Canister Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen, Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canister Assembly (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rod, Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clip, E-Ring (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spring (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom Sub-Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
later replaced by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasket, absorber bottom (not shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, -16 SS (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cam Bar (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cam Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dowel Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose Assembly, Fresh Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dust Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rod, Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome asm, chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Disconnect Fitting (Breathing Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PEEP Bypass and Valve Assembly . . . . . . .4111527 Service Exchange .
Magnet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #126 (neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge Assembly, Breathing Pressure (Incl Mtg Ring and O-Ring) . . . . .
Later design gauge assembly with additional scale in hPa . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-Ring, #117, Silicone (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, PEEP OFF/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 8-32 x 1/2 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Washer, #8 split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breathing press hose asm (quick disc. ftg on each end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breathing press hose asm (quick disc. ftg one end, Luer fitting other end)
Q-disc, w/0 valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O2 Sensor: Complete Assembly, including capsule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor Capsule: old number:. . . . . 6803290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter (cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #025 (viton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #016 (viton) (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-53
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
new
....
....
....
....
. . . . . . 4109430
. . . . . . 4109431
. . . 4112773-001
. . . . . . 2122810
. . . . . . 4112773
. . . . . . 4106387
. . . . . . 4108329
. . . . SE4112151
. . . . . . 1100559
. . . . . . 2122812
. . . . . . 4112150
. . . . . . 2109230
. . . . . . 2109231
. . . . . . 2123249
. . . . . . 1100565
. . . . . . 1101690
. . . . SE4106362
. . . . . . 1101023
. . . . . . 4105848
. . . . . . 1100022
. . . . . . 4105851
. . . . . . 1101356
. . . . . . 1100097
. . . 4110975-010
. . . . . . 4108358
. . . . . . 4112932
. . . . . . 1101001
. . . . . HW50010
. . . . . . 1101018
. . . . . . 1101015
. . . . . . 1101017
. . . . . . 4108577
. . . . . . 4106874
. . . . . . 4102940
. . . . . . 1101355
. . . . . . 1101351
. . . . . . 4108139
. . . . SE4111527
. . . . . . 4114419
. . . . . . 4111878
. . . . . . 4113558
. . . . . . 4105853
. . . . . . 4115275
. . . . . . 4113387
. . . . . . 4113388
. . . . . . 4105766
. . . . . . 4110294
. . . . . HW01014
. . . . . HW65001
. . . . . . 4109368
. . . . . . 4108528
. . . . . . 4108137
. . . . . . ML08007
. . . . . . 4110374
number: 6850645
. . . . . . 4106363
. . . . . . 4106385
. . . . . . 4105791
. . . . . . 4106388
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
SV00365
4
1
3
2
5
8-53A
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
1
Ultrasonic Flow Sensor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4115754
Service Exchange part number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4115777
2
3
4
Flow Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114444
Transducer - set of two, incl. O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114445
O-ring - set of six . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4115147
5
Connector Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4114912
Rev. AA
8-53B
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
SV00527
8-53C
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
Bracket, Flow Sensor mounting . .
Clamp, Flow Sensor mounting . . .
Screw, 4-40 x 1.1 L cap skt hd (2x)
Washer, lock, split #4 . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
PART NUMBER
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-53D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4114889
. 4114888
HW01103
HW65000
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
366
367
369 370
382
368
381
387
386
383
373
371
380
377
372
375
376
378
384
374
393
379
392
380
A
385
388
380
B
377
A
391
390
ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
FLANGE
389
SV45015
8-54
Rev. J
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
366 Valve, Man/Auto Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102698
367
APL Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104839
368
Fiber Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Supplied with APL Valve)
369
Screw, Selector Valve Mounting, 8-32 x 7/16 in. Skt Hd Cap (3x) . . . . . . HW01013
370
Lock Washer, Selector Valve Mounting, #8 int-t (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW67000
371
O-Ring, Neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102941
372
Screw, Adapter Flange Mounting, 8-32 x ½ in. (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01014
373
Adapter Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102694
374
O-Ring, Silicone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105767
375
Valve Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102734
376
Valve Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102692
377
Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110975 P-005
377A
Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102700
378
Dowel Pin, 0.187 x ¾ in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW76002
379
Dowel Pin, 0.250 x
in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW76003
380
Valve Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102690
380A
Label, Bag/Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102699
380B
Label, Dot NAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101098
381
Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101011
382
Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4101848
383
Ball Bearing (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101637
384
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103118
385
Valve Switch Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102691
386
Screw, Adjustment, ¼-28 x ¼ in. (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW04014
387
Screw, Valve Switch Block Mounting, Upper, 8-32 x ¼ in. (2x) . . . . . . . . HW01019
388
Screw, Valve Switch Block Mounting, Lower, 8-32 x ½ in. (2x) . . . . . . . . HW01020
389
Bag Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102894
390
Swivel Bag Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101334
391
Screw, Bag Mount, 8-32 x
in. (4x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW02015
392
O-Ring, Silicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105868
393
Glide Ring, Teflon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101335
Rev. J
8-55
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
395
SV45026
400
404
396
405
401
403
402
406
407
ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
FLANGE
394
408
414
399
398
397
409
413
410
412
411
415
8-56
Rev. H
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
394
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
Valve, Man/Auto Selector (later design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112217-001
Service Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SE4112217-001
APL Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104839
Fiber Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Supplied with APL Valve)
Screw, Selector Valve Mounting, 8-32 x 7/16 in. Skt Hd Cap (3x) . . . . . . HW01013
Lock Washer, Selector Valve Mounting, #8 int-t (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW67000
O-Ring, #117 Silicone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105766
Label, "Scavenger Hose" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4104806
Screw, 5/16-18 x 3¾ in. Rd Hd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW06023
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110792-070
Screw, 8-32 x 7/16 in. Skt Hd Cap (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW01013
Lock Washer, #8 split (3x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HW65011
Connector Assembly, 22mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106744
Label, "Ventilator Hose" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100563
O-Ring, #117 Silicone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105766
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4110792-071
O-Ring, #120 EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112629-001
Nut, 5/16-18 Hexseal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112613-001
Hole Plug, 3/16 in. dia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4111663-001
Bag Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102894
Label, "Breathing Bag" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100561
Bag Mount Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4112622-001
415
Sensor Cord Asssembly (for AV2+ ventilator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4113126
Form, PMS, NM4 Anesthesia System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S010052
Rev. AA
8-57
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
416
NM4
AUXILIARY O2 FLOW METER, NEW STYLE
421
420
419
422
423
424
417
425
418
426
AUXILIARY O2 FLOW METER, OLD STYLE
431
428
430
432
429
433
SV00579
427
434
8-58
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
Auxiliary O2 Flow Meter Assembly, new style . . . . . . . . . .
Set Screw, cup point, 6-32 x ¼ in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x 1 1/16 in. btn hd (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kep nut, 10-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowmeter (incl. tube & valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label,
w/dot and green & white rings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Screw, cup point, 10-32 x
(2x) (used as mtg stud)
Label, AUXILIARY OXYGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109310
HW04003
. 4111442
HW09043
. 4111053
HW55002
. 4111460
. 4109373
HW04011
. 4109381
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
Auxiliary O2 Flow Meter Assembly, old style
Valve, flow control, sub-compact . . . . . . .
Label, AUXILIARY OXYGEN . . . . . . . . .
Label,
w/dot and green & white rings .
Screw, 10-32 x 5/8 in. cap skt hd . . . . . . .
Flat washer, #10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose barb ftg, 10-32 x 1/16 hose . . . . . . .
Ell, 3/16 hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109391
S0B7271
. 4109381
. 4109373
HW01027
HW66003
. 4102165
. 4103445
. 4109387
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Rev. AA
8-59
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
474
475
NM4
476
477
478
479
473
480
481
472
482
483
471
484
449
448
451
485
452
486
464
463
453
462
465
466
467
461
455
460
459
468
458
456
469
470
457
SV00580
8-60
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
ITEM
Open
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Reservoir Scavenger Assembly . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elbow,
M x ¼ in. hose . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
Body, DISS VAC x ¼ MPT . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, DISS VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose Barb Nipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
Screw, ¼-20 x
in. skt hd (2x) . . . . . . .
Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring #112 (neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chain, 8¼ lg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring #008 (neoprene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, ACTIVATE HOSPITAL VACUUM
Retaining Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, Valve Stem Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Nut, -24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wing Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, SCAVENGER HOSE (2x) . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x ¾ in. skt hd (4x) . . . . . . .
O-ring #019 (neoprene) . . . . . . .
O-ring #015 (neoprene) . . . . . . .
O-ring #019 (neoprene) . . . . . . .
O-ring #013 (neoprene) . . . . . . .
Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x ½ in. skt hd (2x)
Lock Washer, #10 split (2x) . . .
Flat Washer, #10 (2x) . . . . . . . .
Screw, ¼-20 x ½ in. skt hd (2x) .
Lock Washer, ¼ int-t (2x) . . . . .
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #008 (neoprene) . . . . . .
Flowmeter Housing . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #012 (neoprene) . . . . . .
Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 6-32 x
in. flat hd (2x) .
Silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, 10-32 x
in. btn hd (4x)
Rev. AA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-61
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4107624
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4109314
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106881
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103669
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103122
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4103123
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . HW01033
. . . 4110982
. . . 4104294
. . . 4110979
. . . 4102141
4112495-005
. . . 4102140
. . . 4102022
. . . 4109305
. . . 4110997
. . . 4109316
. . . 4112137
. . . 4105699
. . . 4112138
. . . 4104806
. . HW01028
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4106458
. 4104602
. 4106458
. 4102234
. 4106231
HW01025
HW65003
HW66003
HW01034
HW67005
. 4111002
. 4102022
. 4110980
. 1101523
. 4112289
HW05006
. 4110999
. 4111000
HW09005
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
499
502
500
498
501
497
503
492
491
490
504
493
494
496
505
495
489
509
510
511
512
513
487
507
488
514
SV00296
8-62
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
Open
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Reservoir Scavenger Assembly, old style . .
Reservoir Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, CAUTION... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, cap skt hd, ¼-20 x ¾ in. (2x) . . . .
Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, flat hd, 8-32 x ¾ in. (2x) . . . . . . .
DISS body x ¼ MPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISS nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose barb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tube, 1 in. dia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tube, ¾ in. dia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, btn hd, 10-32 x
in. . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #016 neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #010 neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #008 neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, cap skt hd, 6-32 x
in. . . . . . . . .
Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, cap skt hd, 6-32 x ¼ in. . . . . . . . .
Top, Scavenger Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
Plug assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
Label, ACTIVATE HOSPITAL VACUUM
O-ring, #008 neoprene . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nut, valve stem retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock nut, -24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wing nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rev. AA
8-63
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4109321
. 4109320
. 4104294
HW01036
. 4109314
HW03026
. 4103669
. 4103122
. 4103123
. 4109312
. 4109311
HW09005
. 4109322
. 4101872
. 4109309
. 4102022
HW01067
. 4109306
HW01007
. 4109307
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102098
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4109305
4102022
4109316
4102068
4105990
4105699
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
520
521
519
522
518
523
517
524
516
525
515
526
529
528
530
527
SV00178
8-64
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
Scavenger, A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chain assembly, 8¼ in. . . . . . . .
Screw, round hd, 10-32 x ½ in. .
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #112 neoprene . . . . . . .
Dust cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve ’A’ 5 cm H2O . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #027 neoprene . . . . . . .
Body, solder assembly . . . . . . . .
Label, SCAVENGER HOSE (2x)
Label, EXHAUST . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4106161
4112495-006
. . HW06007
. . . 4102140
. . . 4102141
. . . 1101527
4110792-007
. . . 2207032
. . . 4101871
. . . 4102105
. . . 4104806
. . . 4106878
527
528
529
530
531
Vent Grill Adapter (for 19 mm hose)
Screw, round hd, 10-24 x 3 in. (2x)
Toggle nut (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, SCAVENGER HOSE . . . . .
Deleted
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1101312
HW06012
. 4101862
. 4104806
Hose Barb Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4108114
Rev. AA
8-65
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
NM4
SV00291
548
549
545
550
546
544
552
553
554
555
543
542
556
541
540
532
539
538
537
535
536
8-66
534
Rev. AA
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
NM4
ITEM
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS (continued)
DESCRIPTION
Suction Scavenger . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wing nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #008 neoprene . . . . . . .
Label, RESERVOIR BAG . . . . .
DISS nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hose barb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bead Chain, 8¼ in. . . . . . . . . . .
Chain coupling (2x) . . . . . . . . . .
Screw, round hd, 10-32 x ½ in. .
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O-ring, #112 neoprene . . . . . . .
Cap assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
’A’ Valve, 1.8 cm H2O . . . . . . . .
Housing assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
Seal, ’A’ valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
’A’ Valve, 0.5 cm H2O . . . . . . . .
Dust cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted
O-ring, #215 neoprene . . . . . . .
’A’ Valve, 5 cm H2O . . . . . . . . .
Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dust cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label, SCAVENGER HOSE (2x)
Rev. AA
PART NUMBER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102088
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4105699
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4102068
. 4102022
. 4106879
. 4103122
. 4103123
. 4103940
. 4101868
HW06007
. 4102140
. 4102141
. 4104659
. 2116219
. 4104755
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4106321
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7264277
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4102036
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-67
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 4102038
. . . 2207032
4110792-007
. . . 4102035
. . . 4104806
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
Narkomed 4 Service Manual
Rev. AB summary of changes
Page
Description
6-1 thru 6-49 . . . . . . . . Entire section revised to reflect PMC nomenclature
continued
RETURN TO THIS MANUAL'S TABLE OF CONTENTS
RETURN TO CD-ROM TABLE OF CONTENTS
DrägerService
®
DrägerService is a division of
Draeger Medical, Inc.
3122 Commerce Drive
Telford, PA 18969
Tel: (215) 721-5402
(800) 543-5047
Fax: (215) 721-5784
Web: www.draegermedical.com
Printed in the U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement